IMPORTANT NOTICE

Act now to keep your code up-to-date.

The purchase of this code includes a
free subscription for all State-issued
supplements and errata. To receive
these important updates through
2019, you MUST register online
www.iccsafe.org/CAL16

2016 CALIFORNIA
REFERENCED
STANDARDS CODE
CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS
TITLE 24, PART 12
California Building Standards Commission

Effective January 1, 2017

For Errata and Supplement effective

dates see the History Note Appendix
 2016 California Referenced Standards Code
California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 12

First Printing: July 2016

ISBN: 978-1-60983-660-3

Published by

International Code Council

500 New Jersey Avenue, NW, 6th Floor
Washington, D.C. 20001
1-888-422-7233

PRINTED IN THE U.S.A.

 PREFACE

This document is Part 12 of thirteen parts of the official triennial compilation and publication of the adoptions, amendments and
repeal of administrative regulations to California Code of Regulations, Title 24, also referred to as the California Building Stan-
dards Code. This part is known as the California Referenced Standards Code.
The California Building Standards Code is published in its entirety every three years by order of the California legislature, with
supplements published in intervening years. The California legislature delegated authority to various state agencies, boards,
commissions and departments to create building regulations to implement the State’s statutes. These building regulations, or
standards, have the same force of law, and take effect 180 days after their publication unless otherwise stipulated. The California
Building Standards Code applies to occupancies in the State of California as annotated.
A city, county, or city and county may establish more restrictive building standards reasonably necessary because of local
climatic, geological or topographical conditions. Findings of the local condition(s) and the adopted local building standard(s)
must be filed with the California Building Standards Commission to become effective and may not be effective sooner than the
effective date of this edition of the California Building Standards Code. Local building standards that were adopted and
applicable to previous editions of the California Building Standards Code do not apply to this edition without appropriate
adoption and the required filing.
Should you find publication (e.g., typographical) errors or inconsistencies in this code or wish to offer comments toward
improving its format, please address your comments to:

California Building Standards Commission

2525 Natomas Park Drive, Suite 130
Sacramento, CA 95833–2936
Phone: (916) 263–0916
Email: cbsc@dgs.ca.gov
Web page: www.bsc.ca.gov

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

The 2016 California Building Standards Code (Code) was developed through the outstanding collaborative efforts of the
Department of Housing and Community Development, Division of State Architect, Office of the State Fire Marshal, Office of
Statewide Health Planning and Development, California Energy Commission, California Department of Public Health, Califor-
nia State Lands Commission, Board of State and Community Corrections, and the California Building Standards Commission
(Commission).
This collaborative effort included the assistance of the Commission’s Code Advisory Committees and many other volunteers
who worked tirelessly to assist the Commission in the production of this Code.
Governor Edmund G. Brown Jr.
Members of the California Building Standards Commission
Secretary Marybel Batjer – Chair
Steven Winkel – Vice-Chair
James Barthman Larry Booth
D. Malcolm Carson Elley Klausbruckner
Erick Mikiten Raj Patel
Cheryl Roberts Peter Santillan
Kent Sasaki
Jim McGowan – Executive Director
Michael L. Nearman – Deputy Executive Director

For questions on California state agency amendments, please refer to the contact list on page v.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE iii

iv 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE
 CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS, TITLE 24
California Agency Information Contact List

Board of State and Community Corrections Department of Housing and Community Development
www.bscc.ca.gov ....................................................... (916) 445-5073 www.hcd.ca.gov .........................................................(916) 445-9471
Local Adult Jail Standards Residential—Hotels, Motels, Apartments,
Local Juvenile Facility Standards Single-Family Dwellings; and
Permanent Structures in Mobilehome &
California Building Standards Commission Special Occupancy Parks
www.bsc.ca.gov ......................................................... (916) 263-0916 (916) 445-3338
Factory-Built Housing, Manufactured Housing &
California Energy Commission Commercial Modular
www.energy.ca.gov .........................Energy Hotline (800) 772-3300
Mobilehome—Permits & Inspections
Building Efficiency Standards Northern Region–(916) 255-2501
Appliance Efficiency Standards Southern Region–(951) 782-4420
Compliance Manual/Forms
(916) 445-9471
California State Lands Commission Employee Housing Standards

www.slc.ca.gov.......................................................... (562) 499-6312

Department of Public Health
Marine Oil Terminals
www.dph.ca.gov.........................................................(916) 449-5661
California State Library Organized Camps Standards
www.library.ca.gov ................................................... (916) 653-5217 Public Swimming Pools Standards

Department of Consumer Affairs: Division of the State Architect

Acupuncture Board www.dgs.ca.gov/dsa...................................................(916) 445-8100
www.acupuncture.ca.gov .......................................... (916) 515-5200
Access Compliance
Office Standards
Fire and Life Safety
Board of Pharmacy
www.pharmacy.ca.gov .............................................. (916) 574-7900 Structural Safety
Pharmacy Standards Public Schools Standards
Bureau of Barbering and Cosmetology Essential Services Building Standards
www.barbercosmo.ca.gov ......................................... (800) 952-5210 Community College Standards

Barber and Beauty Shop, State Historical Building Safety Board

and College Standards Alternative Building Standards
Bureau of Electronic and Appliance Repair,
Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development
www.bearhfti.ca.gov.................................................. (916) 999-2041
www.oshpd.ca.gov .....................................................(916) 440-8356
Insulation Testing Standards
Hospital Standards
Structural Pest Control Board Skilled Nursing Facility Standards &
www.pestboard.ca.gov .............................................. (800) 737-8188 Clinic Standards
Structural Standards
Permits (916) 654-3362
Veterinary Medical Board
www.vmb.ca.gov........................................................ (916) 515-5220 Office of the State Fire Marshal
Veterinary Hospital Standards
osfm.fire.ca.gov..........................................................(916) 445-8200
Department of Food and Agriculture Code Development and Analysis
www.cdfa.ca.gov Fire Safety Standards

Meat & Poultry Packing Plant Standards

Rendering & Collection Standards ........................... (916) 900-5004
Dairy Standards ........................................................ (916) 900-5008

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE v

 HOW TO DETERMINE WHERE
CHANGES HAVE BEEN MADE

Symbols in the margins indicate where changes have been

made or language has been deleted.

This symbol indicates that a change has been made.

> This symbol indicates deletion of language.

vi 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER 12-1 ADMINISTRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 CHAPTER 12-7-4 FIRE-RESISTIVE

Section STANDARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
12-1-101 Title, Purpose and Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
CHAPTER 12-7-5 FIRE-RESISTIVE
12-1-106 Permits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
STANDARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

CHAPTER 12-3 RELEASING SYSTEMS

CHAPTER 12-7A MATERIALS AND
FOR SECURITY BARS IN
CONSTRUCTION METHODS
DWELLINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
FOR EXTERIOR WILDFIRE
Introduction EXPOSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Section
12-3-1 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 CHAPTER 12-8-1 FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS
12-3-2 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 FOR FIRE PROTECTION . . . . . 49
Construction
APPENDIX 12-8-1A CALCULATION OF THE
Section
TOTAL RATE OF HEAT AND
12-3-3 Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 CARBON MONOXIDE OR
12-3-4 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 CARBON DIOXIDE
Performance PRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Section
APPENDIX 12-8-1B GUIDE TO MOUNTING
12-3-5 Test Setup and Sample Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . 5
TECHNIQUES FOR WALL AND
12-3-6 Secure Attachment Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 CEILING INTERIOR FINISH
12-3-7 Operation Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 MATERIAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
12-3-8 Manual Actuation Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
12-3-9 Endurance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 CHAPTER 12-10-1 EXITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
12-3-10 Environmental Exposure Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
CHAPTER 12-10-2 EXITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
12-3-11 Abuse Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Markings and Instructions
CHAPTER 12-10-3 EXITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Section
12-3-12 Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 CHAPTERS 12-11A and 12-11B
12-3-13 Instruction Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 BUILDING AND FACILITY
ACCESS SPECIFICATIONS . . . . 81
CHAPTER 12-4A LABORATORY ANIMAL Sections
QUARTER STANDARDS . . . . . . . . 9 12-11A.201 and 12-11B.201 Detectable Warnings. . . . . . 81
Product Approval for
CHAPTER 12-4-1 STAGE AND PLATFORMS . . . . . 11 Detectable Warning Products
and Directional Surfaces. . . . 81
CHAPTER 12-7-1 FIRE-RESISTIVE 12-11A.202 and 12-11B.202 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
STANDARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 12-11A.203 and 12-11B.203 Detectable
Warning Products . . . . . . . . 81
CHAPTER 12-7-2 FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS 12-11A.204 and 12-11B.204 Directional Surfaces . . . . . . 81
RESERVED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 12-11A.205 and 12-11B.205 Independent Entity . . . . . . . 81
12-11A.206 and 12-11B.206 Two-year Approval. . . . . . . 81
CHAPTER 12-7-3 FIRE-RESISTIVE 12-11A.207 and 12-11B.207 Fee. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
STANDARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 12-11A.208 and 12-11B.208 Disability Access
Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE vii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

12-11A.209 and 12-11B.209 Detectable Warning Products

and Directional Surfaces . . . 81
12-11A.210 and 12-11B.210 Significant Degradation. . . . 81
12-11A.211 and 12-11B.211 Selection of
Independent Entity . . . . . . . 81

CHAPTER 12-12 ENGINEERING

RESERVED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

CHAPTER 12-13 STANDARDS FOR

INSULATING MATERIAL . . . . . . 85

CHAPTER 12-16-1 ENGINEERING REGULATIONS—

QUALITY AND DESIGN
OF THE MATERIALS OF
CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Division I—Construction
Section
12-16-101 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

CHAPTER 12-16-2 ENGINEERING REGULATIONS—

QUALITY AND DESIGN OF
THE MATERIALS OF
CONSTRUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Division 1—Construction
Section
12-16-201 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

CHAPTER 12-31C RADIATION

SHIELDING STANDARDS . . . . 101

CHAPTER 12-71 AIR FILTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

CHAPTER 12-72-1 PROTECTIVE

SIGNALING SYSTEMS. . . . . . . 105

CHAPTER 12-72-2 PROTECTIVE

SIGNALING SYSTEMS. . . . . . . 119

CHAPTER 12-72-3 PROTECTIVE

SIGNALING SYSTEMS. . . . . . . 129

HISTORY NOTE APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

viii 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 CHAPTER 12-1

ADMINISTRATION

SECTION 12-1-101
TITLE, PURPOSE AND SCOPE
12-1-101.11 Application.
12-1-101.11.12 DSA/SS — Division of the State Architect,
Structural Safety.
Application — Public elementary and secondary schools,
community college buildings and state-owned or state-leased
essential services buildings.
Enforcing Agency — Division of the State Architect, Struc-
tural Safety.
Authority: Education Code Sections 17310 and 81142, and Health and
Safety Code Section 16022.
Reference: Education Code Sections 17280 through 17316, and 81130
through 81147, and Health and Safety Code Sections 16000 through 16023.

The Division of the State Architect has been delegated the

responsibility and authority by the Department of General
Services to review and approve the design and observe the
construction of public school buildings and state-owned or
state-leased essential services buildings.
The applicable building standards are as follows:
1. Administrative Regulations.
1.1 School Buildings; Sections 4-301 through 4-355,
Group 1, Chapter 4, Part 1, Title 24, California
Code of Regulations.
1.2 State-owned or State-leased Essential Services
Buildings; Sections 4-201 through 4-249, Chap-
ter 4, Part 1, Title 24, California Code of Regu-
lations.
2. Technical Regulations.
Various model codes adopted by reference into the Cali-
fornia Building Standards Code, Title 24, Parts 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
and 12, California Code of Regulations, for school buildings
and state-owned or state-leased essential service buildings.

SECTION 12-1-106
PERMITS
12-1-106.3.3.1 [For DSA/SS] Public schools. Plans and
specifications for the construction, alteration or addition to
any school building owned, leased or rented by any public
school district shall be submitted to the Division of the State
Architect for review and approval.

For all other provisions, see the 2010 Edition, Title 24, Part 12, Chapter 12-1.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 1

2 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE
 CHAPTER 12-3

RELEASING SYSTEMS FOR SECURITY BARS IN DWELLINGS

(This standard includes provisions of Underwriters Laboratories Subject 2326, Appendix B,
dated December 17, 1999, reprinted with their permission.)

INTRODUCTION SECTION 12-3-2

GENERAL
12-3-2.1 Components.
SECTION 12-3-1
SCOPE 12-3-2.1.1 Except as indicated in Section 12-3-2.1.2, a
component of a product covered shall comply with the
12-3-1.1 These requirements cover releasing systems for requirements for that component.
bars, grilles, mesh, glazing or other items intended to provide
security at doors and windows required for emergency escape 12-3-2.1.2 A component need not comply with a specific
from dwelling units. When actuated by the occupant, the sys- requirement that:
tem allows the obstructions over the door or window to be (a)Involves a feature or characteristic not needed in the
moved so occupants can escape in the event of an emergency. application of the component in the product covered
12-3-1.2 These requirements only cover the ability of the by these requirements, or
releasing system to be manually activated from the interior of (b)Is superseded by these requirements.
a dwelling unit by an occupant to effect an escape through the 12-3-2.1.3 A component shall be used in accordance with
protected opening. its recognized rating established for the intended condi-
12-3-1.3 These requirements cover releasing systems tions of use.
intended for use on the interior side of doors or windows in 12-3-2.1.4 Specific components are recognized as being
all climatic locations. incomplete in construction features or restricted in perfor-
12-3-1.4 These requirements do not evaluate the ability of the mance capabilities. Such components are intended for use
releasing system or obstructions to resist an external forced only under limited conditions, such as certain tempera-
entry attack. tures not exceeding specific limits, and shall be used only
under those specific conditions for which they have been
12-3-1.5 These requirements do not evaluate the ability of the recognized.
releasing system or obstructions to be opened or removed
from the exterior of the residential dwelling unit by emer- 12-3-2.2 Units of measurement.
gency response personnel during rescue operations. 12-3-2.2.1 When a value for measurement is followed by a
12-3-1.6 Products covered by these requirements are intended value in other units in parentheses, the first stated value is
for installation in dwelling units to protect door and window the requirement.
openings that are designated by the California Building Stan- 12-3-2.3 Installation instructions.
dards Code to be used as the secondary means of escape from 12-3-2.3.1 A copy of the operating and installation instruc-
the living area. tions or equivalent information is to be furnished with the
12-3-1.7 Products covered by these requirements are not samples submitted for investigation for use as a guide in
intended to be used to protect doors in means of egress path the examination and test of the mechanism. For this pur-
for nonresidential occupancies, the common egress path of pose, a printed edition is not required.
multifamily residential dwelling units or the primary means 12-3-2.4 Definitions.
of egress path in a single-family dwelling unit.
12-3-2.4.1 Dwelling unit. A single unit, providing com-
12-3-1.8 These requirements do not cover window guards or plete, independent living facilities for one or more per-
fall prevention devices that are intended to prevent falls from sons, including permanent provisions for living, sleeping,
upper story windows. eating, cooking and sanitation.
12-3-1.9 These requirements do not apply to storm doors and 12-3-2.4.2 Escape. For the purposes of these require-
windows or light duty screens used for insect control. ments, escape refers to movement of occupants from the
12-3-1.10 A product that contains features, characteristics, interior of a residential dwelling unit to a safe point out-
components, or materials new or different from those covered side of the dwelling unit during an emergency fire condi-
by these requirements, and that involve a risk of fire, electric tion.
shock, or injury to persons shall be evaluated using the appro- 12-3-2.4.3 Emergency means of escape. A passage inde-
priate additional component and end-product requirements as pendent of and remote from the primary means of escape
determined necessary to maintain an acceptable level of that provides a means of travel from living and sleeping
safety. spaces inside a dwelling unit to the outside.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 3

RELEASING SYSTEMS FOR SECURITY BARS IN DWELLINGS

12-3-2.4.4 Means of escape. A concept included in build- intuitive motions. The system shall be capable of being oper-
ing codes that, in most cases, requires sleeping rooms and ated in all lighting conditions.
living areas in dwelling units to be provided with at least
12-3-3.9 Manual actuation of the system shall not require two
one primary means of escape and one secondary means of
different forces to be applied at the same time, such as apply-
escape to the outside.
ing force to the actuator while also pushing on the bars.
12-3-2.4.5 Primary means of escape. A door, stairway or
12-3-3.10 When fully opened, the assembly shall provide a
ramp providing a means of unobstructed travel from living
minimum clear opening of not less than 5.7 square feet (0.53
spaces inside a dwelling unit to the outside at street or
m2) with the width not less than 20 inches (508 mm) and the
ground level.
height not less than 24 inches (610 mm), measured parallel to
12-3-2.4.6 Security bars. For the purposes of these the plane of the opening.
requirements, the term “security bars” includes “burglar
bars” and refers to metal and other bars, grilles, grates and 12-3-3.11 Security bars shall be constructed so that they do
other barriers that are designed to provide security for not swing up to open. They shall not include projections that
doors and windows in dwelling units. The purpose of can easily snag the clothing of those escaping through the
security bars, by their mere presence on a building, is to opening.
deter a potential forced entry into the dwelling. 12-3-3.12 Security bars shall have been constructed such that
a sphere 4 inches (102 mm) in diameter shall not pass through
any opening and shall not create other potential head entrap-
CONSTRUCTION ment hazards.

SECTION 12-3-3 SECTION 12-3-4

ASSEMBLY MATERIALS
12-3-3.1 Security bar releasing systems consist of the security 12-3-4.1 The materials employed shall have adequate
bars, latches, manual actuators, cables, connectors, hinges mechanical strength to perform their expected function.
and mounting hardware. The entire system shall be packaged
in a single container. Standard mounting hardware including 12-3-4.2 O-rings, gaskets and seals shall comply with UL
screws, bolts and washers are allowed to be provided sepa- Standard 157, 1996 Edition. Polymeric materials shall com-
rately. ply with UL Standard 746C, 1995 Edition, Section 25-27.
Exception: The security bars shall be allowed to be pro- Exception: O-rings, gaskets, seals and polymeric materi-
vided separately if the instruction manual complies with als that are used as decorative parts, or whose failure will
Section 12-3-13.2. not affect the ability of the system to comply with these
requirements.
12-3-3.2 The system shall be of a type capable of being read-
ily maintained in proper operating condition. 12-3-4.3 Components constructed of dissimilar metals shall
not be used in applications where contact between them is
12-3-3.3 The system shall be designed to immediately likely to cause galvanic corrosion. The materials employed
unlatch the security bars when actuated. It shall be able to be shall reduce the likelihood of the release mechanism becom-
operated from the inside of a building by the occupants with- ing inoperative due to corrosion.
out the use of tools, keys, or special knowledge or effort.
12-3-4.4 Ferrous metal parts shall be 300 series stainless steel
12-3-3.4 The manual actuator used to release the security bars or protected against corrosion using minimum G60 or A60
shall be designed to be mounted inside the dwelling unit for hot-dipped mil galvanization, 0.0104 mm thick zinc coating,
operation by the occupants. Covers or other barriers that can 0.0127 mm thick cadmium coating or two coats of organic
obstruct access to actuators shall not be provided if they outdoor paint.
inhibit the proper operation of the system.
12-3-4.5 Manual actuators.
12-3-3.5 The release mechanism shall not depend on springs
to release the latch, although springs are allowed to be pro- 12-3-4.5.1 Security bar releasing assembly mechanisms
vided to assist in the operation. shall include a manual actuation mechanism that is capa-
ble of unlatching the security bars so that they can be
12-3-3.6 The system shall be designed to prevent it from opened by the occupants. The actuating force shall be
being locked in a closed position with a pad lock or similar applied in one of the following manners:
device.
Finger actuated: Pushing with the index finger or pull-
12-3-3.7 Systems provided with an automatic actuating
ing a loop with the index finger in a curled position.
mechanism shall also include a manual release system that
complies with these requirements. The automatic actuation Hand actuated: Pulling, pushing, twisting, rotating or
portion of the system, even in the event of its failure, shall not turning a lever, knob, handle, rod or similar actuator with
inhibit operation of the manual releasing system. the hand or multiple fingers.
12-3-3.8 Manual actuation of the system shall release the Foot actuated: Kicking, depressing or stepping on an
security bars quickly and with simple, easily understood and actuating pedal, lever, stirrup or similar actuator.

4 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 RELEASING SYSTEMS FOR SECURITY BARS IN DWELLINGS

12-3-4.5.2 On foot-actuated systems, only a single foot 12-3-5.2 Test fixture.

motion shall be used to disengage the bar assembly from
the latch. On finger- and hand-actuated systems, one or 12-3-5.2.1 The test fixture in which the assembly is
two distinct hand or finger motions shall be used to disen- mounted shall consist of the wood stud construction
gage the bar assembly from the latch. described in Section 12-3-5.2.2. Systems that require a
specific mounting arrangement not represented by these
12-3-4.5.3 Releasing the actuator after the latch has been test fixtures, such as masonry or brick, shall be mounted in
disengaged from the bar assembly shall not reengage the a fixture of equivalent dimensions and rigidity, as
bar assembly. described in the installation instructions. If agreeable to
12-3-4.5.4 No features or methods shall be provided or the testing laboratory and manufacturer, the wood stud fix-
referenced in the instruction manual to inhibit the opera- ture shall be representative of all mounting structures, pro-
tion of the releasing mechanism. vided the system is securely held in place in the fixture
during all tests.
12-3-4.6 Cables and connectors.
12-3-5.2.2 The entire test fixture shall be constructed of
12-3-4.6.1 Cables connecting actuators to latches and commercially available two by four trade size vertical
release mechanisms shall only be used in applications wood studs [nominal 1.5 inches by 3.5 inches (38.1 mm by
where the force transmitted by them during normal opera- 89 mm)], spaced on maximum 16 inch (406 mm) centers.
tion is less than l/10 the manufacturer’s rated working ten- The opening shall be framed with two by four plates and
sion or compression. minimum two layers of two by four for headers. For win-
12-3-4.6.2 Cables and connectors shall not be damaged, or dow openings, a minimum of two layers of two by four
have wire strands frayed during normal installation or use, shall be used for the sill and cripple studs shall be pro-
and shall not contact sharp objects when installed as vided. The frame shall be secured in place so it does not
intended. move when the system is subjected to the test forces noted
below. The frame shall extend a minimum of 12 inches
12-3-4.6.3 The means used to secure cables or connectors (305 mm) above and on each side of the opening.
to latches, release mechanisms and actuators shall provide
a tight, reliable nonslip connection. 12-3-5.2.3 Actual doors and windows or their frames shall
not be required to be mounted in the opening unless the
12-3-4.7 Hinges. presence of such doors, windows or frames affects the
12-3-4.7.1 Hinges shall operate smoothly and reliably, and operation of the system, or unless part of the system is
shall not be susceptible to rust or corrosion. mounted on the door or window frame.
12-3-5.2.4 The exterior side of the assembly shall be cov-
ered by 3/4-inch (19 mm) thick trade size CDX plywood,
PERFORMANCE
secured with minimum 11/2-inch (38 mm) nails or screws,
secured at least every 12 inches (305 mm) to each stud, sill
and header. The interior side of the assembly shall be cov-
SECTION 12-3-5
ered with a layer of 1/2-inch (13 mm) gypsum wallboard,
TEST SETUP AND SAMPLE PREPARATION
secured with minimum 11/4-inch (32 mm) nails or screws
12-3-5.1 Sample selection. at least every 12 inches (305 mm) to each stud, sill and
12-3-5.1.1 Representative samples of the releasing system header.
shall be assembled to a test fixture as described in the 12-3-5.2.5 Openings in the test fixture shall be sized to
installation instructions, unless otherwise noted in specific accommodate the size of the assembly under test, as
tests. The assembly shall include the mounting, hardware, described in the installation instructions. Opening size
releasing mechanisms and fasteners recommended in the shall be allowed to vary if the size used is judged to not
instructions. affect the results of any test performed.
12-3-5.1.2 Samples to be tested shall include each type 12-3-5.3 Sample assembly.
and sizes of releasing system shown in the installation
instructions. Each type of releasing mechanism shall be 12-3-5.3.1 Samples of the releasing system shall arrive at
subjected to the complete test program, unless it can be the test site in the packaging anticipated for distribution
shown that tests on one type of mechanism are representa- and sale, and accompanied by the installation instructions.
tive of the worst case testing on another mechanism. The The samples are to be installed on the test fixture by a rep-
sample shall be tested with mounting hardware and secu- resentative of the certification organization, using com-
rity bars that represent the worst case conditions of use. mon hand and power tools as recommended by the
This shall be considered to be the security bars with the instruction manual. Any specialty tools required for
heaviest weight, greatest dimensions, and systems that cre- assembly shall be so identified in the instructions.
ate the greatest torque, moment and frictional forces on the
12-3-5.3.2 When multiple tests are required on an assem-
hinges and releasing mechanism.
bly, they are allowed to be performed on the same test fix-
12-3-5.1.3 The test report shall document the systems ture, provided that new hole or openings are used for
tested, along with the basis for sample selection. mounting. Portions of the test fixture shall be allowed to

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 5

RELEASING SYSTEMS FOR SECURITY BARS IN DWELLINGS

be replaced to accommodate new mounting holes or SECTION 12-3-8

brackets. MANUAL ACTUATION TEST
12-3-5.3.3 Samples that include grease, graphite, silicon or 12-3-8.1 Following the Operation Test, each of the two sam-
other lubricants shall also be tested with the lubricant ple assemblies shall be operated five times, and the forces
removed or not applied. required to unlatch the system shall be measured and
recorded. These forces shall not exceed the values indicated
12-3-5.3.4 When assembled in accordance with the instal- in Sections 12-3-8.2 through 12-3-8.4.
lation instructions the system shall be securely held in
place in the test fixture and shall operate consistently in 12-3-8.2 A force gauge shall be used to apply the actuating
the intended fashion. force. The force shall be applied in the orientation anticipated
by the design, using an appropriate force gauge and attach-
ments, such as hooks, loops or probes. The gauge shall be
capable of measuring the maximum force applied on each
SECTION 12-3-6
attempt. The force shall be applied in a location and fashion
SECURE ATTACHMENT TEST
that is most likely to unlatch the actuator, and shall be
12-3-6.1 Two samples of the system shall be subjected to the allowed to range from a slow gradual application of force to a
following test sequence. faster application of force of not less than 1 second in dura-
tion.
12-3-6.2 The system, when in the closed position, shall resist
50-pound (22 N) force without opening, loosening in the test 12-3-8.2.1 The average force required to unlatch finger-
fixture or damaging the releasing assembly. The force shall actuated systems shall not exceed 5 pounds (22 N) over
be applied on the exterior side of the test fixture in a location the five attempts. The force required to unlatch the system
that is most likely to move or damage the system. The force during any of the attempts shall not exceed 10 pounds (44
shall be gradually applied perpendicular to the opening and N).
held for a period of one minute. A 3/8-inch (10 mm) diameter 12-3-8.2.2 The average force required to unlatch hand-
rope looped through the security bars, or similar arrangement, actuated systems shall not exceed 5 pounds (22 N) over
shall be used to apply the force. the five attempts. The force required to unlatch the system
during any of the attempts shall not exceed 10 pounds (44
N).
SECTION 12-3-7
OPERATION TEST 12-3-8.2.3 The average force required to unlatch foot-
actuated systems shall not exceed 15 pounds (66 N) over
12-3-7.1 Following the Secure Attachment Test, each of the the five attempts. The force required to unlatch the system
two samples of the system shall unlatch immediately without during any of the attempts shall not exceed 30 pounds
intentional delay during each of 10 attempts to operate the (132 N).
system, and the security bars shall be fully opened to create
12-3-8.3 In lieu of complying with Section 12-3-8.2, foot-
the opening specified in Section 12-3-3.10. During each
actuated systems designed to be operated by a kick shall suc-
attempt, the actuating mechanism shall be operated as
cessfully unlatch and disengage the latching mechanism each
intended, using a finger, hand or foot movement as described
of five times when subjected to the following impact. The
in the operating instructions provided to unlatch the security
impact shall be applied by swinging a 25-pound (11.4 kg)
bars. The security bars shall then be opened to the full open
weight on a 4-foot (1.2 m) pendulum from 10 inches (254
position, and the system shall then be reset to the closed posi-
mm) away, measured horizontally. The point of impact on the
tion. An examination shall be performed to verify that the
foot actuator shall be at the bottom of the pendulum swing.
security bars are completely reset prior to the next attempt.
12-3-8.4 Once the system is unlatched, a maximum force
12-3-7.2 Springs provided in the latch or on the security bars required to set the security bars in motion shall not exceed 30
that are intended to move the security bars from the latched pounds (132 N), and the maximum force required to open the
position shall be removed or disabled prior to the test. security bars to the minimum required width shall not exceed
12-3-7.3 Prior to the test, the assembly shall be operated and 15 pounds (66 N).
reset a number of times to acquaint the operator with the sys-
tem and its opening and reselling operation. On some sys-
tems, it may be necessary to slam, tap or otherwise carefully SECTION 12-3-9
align the security bars in the latch to successfully reset the ENDURANCE TEST
system into the closed position. 12-3-9.1 A sample of the security bar releasing system shall
12-3-7.4 In the event that the actuating mechanism or assem- function as intended during 250 cycles of operation without
bly does not operate as intended during each of the 10 failure or excessive wear of the parts, including serving or
attempts, the test assembly, mounting method, actuating fraying of individual cable wires. Following the cycling, the
motion and system resetting procedure shall be reviewed to system shall be subjected to the Operation Test.
determine a potential cause of failure. After correcting any 12-3-9.2 The system shall be operated and reset as described
identified problems, the set of 10 operations shall be repeated in the manufacturer's operating instructions. As part of the
with no unsuccessful attempts. cycling, it is only necessary to unlatch, disengage and reset

6 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 RELEASING SYSTEMS FOR SECURITY BARS IN DWELLINGS

the system, and not open the security bars to the full open bars. The diagram or symbols shall be readily visible to occu-
position. The cycling rate shall not exceed 30 cycles per min- pants when the assembly is mounted as intended.
ute. 12-3-12.3 Security bars and the latching mechanism shall be
marked with the name or logo of the testing agency certifying
to compliance of the products with this standard, and identifi-
SECTION 12-3-10 cation of the standard as SFM SB-2000.
ENVIRONMENTAL EXPOSURE TEST
12-3-12.4 Adhesive-backed labels used to provide required
12-3-10.1 After each of the following exposures, test assem-
markings shall be suitable for the application and shall com-
blies shall be subjected to the Manual Actuation Test. The
ply with UL Standard 969, 1995 Edition.
test shall be performed while the test assemblies are in the
test chambers, or immediately after their removal from the
test chamber. Opening forces after these conditionings shall SECTION 12-3-13
not exceed the values shown in Section 12-3-8.2 or 12-3-8.3. INSTRUCTION MANUAL
A single sample shall be subjected to each exposure. The
same sample, or different sample, shall be allowed to be used 12-3-13.1 Installation and operating instructions shall be pro-
for each exposure condition. vided with each system. Installation instructions shall
describe how to install and initially test the system, and pro-
12-3-10.2 Elevated ambient. Samples shall be conditioned vide periodic testing and maintenance. Operating instructions
in a 120°F (49°C) environment for 24 hours. shall be provided that include diagrams, drawing and symbols
12-3-10.3 Low ambient. Samples shall be conditioned in a describing how to operate the system and escape in the event
32°F (0°C) environment for 24 hours. of a fire or other emergency.
12-3-10.4 Humidity test. Samples shall be conditioned for 12-3-13.2 When the releasing mechanism assembly is pro-
24 hours in moist air having a relative humidity of 85 +/– 5 vided separately from the security bar assembly in accor-
percent at a temperature of 90°F +/– 5°F (32 +/– 2°C). dance with Section 12-3-3.1, the instruction manual shall
describe the compatible security bars that have been investi-
gated and found suitable for use with the releasing assembly.
SECTION 12-3-11 Security bars shall be identified by the manufacturer’s name
ABUSE TEST and model number and maximum dimensions.
12-3-11.1 A sample shall comply with the Manual Actuation 12-3-13.3 The installation instructions shall include direc-
Test requirements in Sections 12-3-8.2 and 12-3-8.3 after tions on mounting the actuator inside the room at a height not
being subjected to the simulated abuse provided in Section exceeding 48 inches (1.2 m) from the finished floor.
12-3-11.2.
12-3-11.2 The sample shall be subject to six impacts of 5
feet-pounds (6.8 N · m) each applied with a 2-inch diameter
(51 mm) steel ball on portions of the release system that are
most likely to adversely affect the operation of the system.

MARKINGS AND INSTRUCTIONS

SECTION 12-3-12
MARKINGS
12-3-12.1 Security bars and the latching mechanism shall be
permanently marked with the company name, model number
and date of manufacture. When a manufacturer produces
assemblies at more than one factory, each such assembly
shall have a distinctive marking to identify it as the product of
a particular factory.
12-3-12.2 Symbols or diagrams shall be marked on the man-
ual actuator to identify how to manually release the security

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 7

8 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE
 CHAPTER 12-4A

LABORATORY ANIMAL QUARTER STANDARDS

STANDARD 12-4A-1
Department of Health Services
Authority: Sections 102, 208 and 25811.
Reference: Sections 102, 208 and 436.5.

Laboratory Animal Quarters

Sec. 12-4A-101. Laboratory animal quarters shall comply
with Chapter IV, “Guide for Care and Use of Laboratory Ani-
mals,” U.S. Department of Health, Education and Welfare,
Publication Number 85-23, Revised 1985.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 9

10 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE
 CHAPTER 12-4-1

STAGE AND PLATFORMS

SMOKE OR HEAT VENTILATORS

STANDARD 12-4-1

STATE FIRE MARSHAL (h) Corrosion resistant. Ventilators shall be constructed

of corrosion-resistant materials. Iron and steel parts shall be
SMOKE OR HEAT VENTILATORS protected against corrosion by enameling, galvanizing, plat-
Sec. 12-4-100. ing or other equivalent means. This includes all parts upon
which proper mechanical operation may depend. Bearings
(a) Application. The minimum design, construction and and hinge points shall be corrosion resistant or of such mate-
performance standard set forth herein for stage and platform rial and design as to ensure against binding due to corrosion.
smoke or heat ventilators are those deemed necessary to
establish conformance to the provisions of these regulations. Ventilators designed and constructed in accordance with
the above may be accepted without additional tests establish-
(b) Scope. This standard covers ventilators and shutters ing the effects of frost, expansion by heat or warping of the
designed to open under conditions of excessive smoke or heat framework.
to provide openings for the release to the atmosphere of accu-
mulated smoke or heat. (i) Plastic covers. Plastic covers shall be of the dome type
having a continuous curvature with the center not less in
A smoke or heat ventilator covered by this standard con- height than 10 percent of the span having the least dimension
sists of a prefabricated frame of metal or other noncombusti- but not less than 5 inches.
ble materials; a cover of noncombustible or plastic materials;
an automatic releasing device; and the control rigging. The (j) Area. The minimum dimension for an effective vent
control rigging may include electrically operated units for opening should not be less than 4 feet in any direction. The
normal opening and closing. effective venting area is the minimum cross-sectional area
through which smoke and gases must pass in route to the
(c) Tested and listed component parts. Component atmosphere. The effective venting area of monitors shall be
parts, devices, combinations of devices and electrical equip- the cross-sectional area of the throat or the area of the side
ment which have been tested and listed by an approved test- lights on one side of the monitor, whichever is the lesser.
ing agency for the intended purpose need not be individually
retested. Such individually tested and listed component parts, Ventilators having plastic covers shall not exceed 100
devices and equipment shall be subjected to the performance square feet in area.
standard tests to determine their suitability for use in the (k) Fail-safe design. The ventilator cover, lid, sidelight or
smoke or heat ventilator. shutter shall be designed to fail safe in the event of fire and
(d) Alternate constructions. Ventilators having materials shall not fall back over the opening. It shall require a manual
or forms of construction differing from this standard may be operation to reclose the cover, lid, sidelight or shutter.
investigated and tested in accordance with these regulations, (l) Opening counterforce.
and if found to be substantially equivalent in performance
may be given recognition for approval. 1. Gravity-type ventilators shall have securely attached
weights to provide a continuous excess counter-
(e) Marking. Units shall be provided with a manufactur- weight of not less than 30 pounds throughout the
ers label or other permanent markings clearly identifying the opening arc of the lid or sidelight.
manufacturer and model numbers. Plastics in dome-type ven-
tilators shall be identified by brandmarkings, imprint or other 2. Devices used to open ventilators shall be designed to
markings acceptable to the State Fire Marshal. exert a continuous opening force, at all times normal
to the lid of not less than 30 pounds. When springs
(f) Framing design. The unit and cover shall be so formed are used they shall not be stressed to more than 50
and assembled that they will have the strength and rigidity percent of their capacity when the lid is in a closed
necessary to resist the abuses to which they are liable to be position.
subject without adversely affecting their performance, and
without operational failure due to partial collapse with the 3. Louvered-type shutters intended for installation in
resulting reduction of spacings, loosening or displacement of gables shall be of the gravity type. The excess
parts, or other serious defects. counter-weight shall be not less than 2 pounds per
square foot of gross shutter area.
(g) Curb design. The ventilator design shall include pro-
visions for mounting on roof curbs or shall in themselves (m) Automatic heat or smoke detectors shall be placed in
incorporate a design to provide the equivalent of roof curbs. the underside of the ventilator at or above the roof line.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 11

STAGE AND PLATFORMS

(n) Test procedure.

1. Ventilators and shutters shall be mounted for the
tests in a manner simulating their intended use. The
lid, cover or sidelight shall be held in a closed posi-
tion by a fusible link, or an automatic heat or smoke
actuated detector or combination thereof, and the
fusible link or detector controls.
2. The opening counterforce shall be measured at the
geometric center of the lid, cover or sidelight. The
automatic detector shall be released and measure-
ments of the counterforce taken at various points
throughout the opening arc but at not less than at 30
inches and at 60 inches from the plane of the lid
when in a closed position, and at a point past 90
inches from the horizontal.
3. The opening force of gable-type shutter ventilators
shall be measured from the top of the operating bar.
(o) Test report. The test report shall include but is not
limited to the following:
1. A detailed description of the unit and its intended
operation.
2. Engineering data and shop drawings. Shop drawings
shall bear the seal or stamp of a registered or
licensed engineer or architect attesting to the struc-
tural integrity of the ventilator as it relates to the
provisions of Section 12-4-100 (f).
3. Photographs (4 inches by 5 inches or larger) of the
unit with markings identifying component parts of
the unit.
4. Description and results of the tests performed.

12 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 CHAPTER 12-7-1

FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS
FIRE TESTS OF BUILDING CONSTRUCTION AND MATERIALS
STANDARD 12-7-1

STATE FIRE MARSHAL steel as specified in Section 12-7-110 (c). In combustible

SCOPE assemblies five or more thermocouples shall be located on
Sec. 12-7-100. the bottom of soffit of joists or beams. Thermocouples shall
be placed in representative locations such as at midspan, over
(a) This standard for fire tests contains methods that are joints in the ceiling, over light fixtures, over air-outlet open-
applicable to assemblies of masonry units and to composite ings or similar locations.
assemblies of structural materials for buildings, including
bearing and other walls and partitions, columns, girders, (c) Thermocouple locations on unexposed side. Tem-
beams, slabs, and composite slab and beam assemblies for perature readings shall be taken at not less than nine points on
floors and roofs. They are also applicable to other assemblies the surface of the unexposed side. Five of these shall be sym-
and structural units that constitute permanent integral parts of metrically disposed, one to be approximately at the center of
a finished building. the specimen and four at approximately the center of its quar-
ter sections. The other four shall be located at the discretion
(b) It is the intent that classifications shall register perfor-
of the testing authority to obtain representative information
mance during the period of exposure and shall not be con-
on the performance of the construction under test. None of
strued as having determined suitability for use after exposure.
the thermocouples shall be located nearer than 11/2 times the
thickness of the construction, or nearer than 12 inches to the
FIRE TESTING FURNACES AND CONTROL edges. An exception shall be made in those cases where there
is an element of the construction at the edges which is not
Sec. 12-7-101. Fire testing furnaces and their control shall otherwise represented in the remainder of the construction.
conform to SFM 12-7-1, Fire Testing Furnaces. Also, none of the thermocouples shall be located opposite or
on top of beams, girders, pilasters, or other structural mem-
bers if temperatures at such points will obviously be lower
UNEXPOSED SURFACE TEMPERATURES than at other more representative locations.
Sec. 12-7-102.
(d) Temperature intervals. Temperature readings shall
(a) Thermocouples. Temperatures of unexposed surfaces be taken at intervals not exceeding 15 minutes until a reading
shall be measured with thermocouples placed under flexible, exceeding 212°F (100°C) has been obtained at any one point.
oven-dry, felted asbestos pads, 6 inches square, 0.4 inch in Thereafter the readings may be taken more frequently at the
thickness, and weighing not less than 1.0 nor more than 1.4 discretion of the testing body, but the intervals need not be
pounds per square foot. The pads shall be sufficiently soft so less than five minutes.
that, without breaking, they may be shaped to contact over
the whole surface against which they are placed. The wire (e) Maximum unexposed temperature rise. Where the
leads of the thermocouple shall have an immersion under the conditions of acceptance place a limitation on the rise of tem-
pad and be in contact with the unexposed surface for not less perature of the unexposed surface, the temperature end point
than 31/2 inches. The hot junction of the thermocouple shall of the fire endurance period shall be determined by the aver-
be placed approximately under the center of the pad. The out- age of the measurements taken at individual points; except
side diameter of protecting or insulating tubes shall not be that if a temperature rise 30 percent in excess of the specified
more than 5/16 inch. The pad shall be held firmly against the limit occurs at any one of these points, the remainder shall be
surface and shall fit closely about the thermocouples. The ignored and the fire endurance period judged as ended.
wires for the thermocouple in the length covered by the pad
shall be not heavier than No. 18 B.&S. gage (0.04 inch) and
shall be electrically insulated and heat- and moisture-resistant CLASSIFICATION AS DETERMINED BY TEST
coatings. Sec. 12-7-103.
Note: In tests of assemblies with roof coverings, the ther- (a) Fire exposure report. Results shall be reported in
mocouples and pads shall be placed on top of the roof cov- accordance with the performance tests prescribed in these
ering. methods. They shall be expressed in time periods of resis-
(b) Ceiling-floor, ceiling-roof assemblies. Temperature tance, to the nearest integral minute. Reports shall include
readings shall be taken in the center of the plenum, on the observations of significant details of behavior of the material
bottom side of the floor or roof deck, and on the structural or construction during the test and after the furnace fire is cut
members in fire-endurance tests of ceiling-floor and ceiling- off, including information on deformation, spalling, cracking,
roof assemblies. Thermocouples shall be located on structural burning of the specimen or its component parts, continuance

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 13

FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS

of flaming and production of smoke. The form and contents National Standard Play Pipe of corresponding size equipped
of reports shall be in accordance with Section 12-7-115. with a 11/8-inch discharge tip of the standard-taper, smooth-
(b) Structural fire report. Reports of tests involving wall, bore pattern without shoulder at the orifice. The water pres-
ceiling-floor, ceiling-roof or beam constructions in which sure and duration of application shall be as specified in Table
restraint is provided against expansion, contraction or rota- SFM 12-7-1A.
tion of the construction shall describe the method used to pro- (f) Nozzle distance. The nozzle orifice shall be 20 feet
vide this restraint and include details of the restraining frame from the center of the exposed surface of the test sample if
as well as information recorded during the test concerning the the nozzle is so located that, when directed at the center, its
forces imposed on that structure by the test specimen. axis is normal to the surface of the test sample. If otherwise
located, its distance from the center shall be less than 20 feet
by an amount equal to 1 foot for each 10 degrees of deviation
TEST SPECIMEN from the normal.
Sec. 12-7-104. (g) Protection and conditioning of test specimen. The test
(a) Representative specimen. The test specimen shall be specimen shall be protected during and after fabrication to
truly representative of the construction for which classifica- ensure normality of its quality and condition at the time of test.
tion is desired, as to materials, workmanship and details such It shall not be tested until a large portion of its final strength
as dimensions of parts, and shall be built under conditions has been attained, and, if it contains moisture, until the excess
representative of those obtaining as practically applied in has been removed to achieve an air-dry condition in accor-
building construction and operations. The physical properties dance with the requirements given in Items 1 through 3. The
of the materials and ingredients used in the test specimen testing equipment and sample undergoing the fire test shall be
shall be determined and recorded. When necessary for evalu- protected from any condition of wind or weather that might
ation of test reports, the sponsor shall furnish them to the lead to abnormal results. The ambient air temperature at the
enforcing agency. beginning of the test shall be within the range of 50 to 90°F (10
to 32°C). The velocity of air across the unexposed surface of
(b) Specimen size. The size and dimensions of the test the sample, measured just before the test begins, shall not
specimen specified herein are intended to apply for rating exceed 4.4 feet per second, as determined by an anemometer
constructions of dimensions within the usual general range placed at right angles to the unexposed surface. If mechanical
employed in buildings. If the conditions of use limit the con- ventilation is employed during the test, an air stream shall not
struction to smaller dimensions, a proportionate reduction be directed across the surface of the specimen.
may be made in the dimensions of the specimens for a test
qualifying them for such restricted use. 1. Prior to the fire test, constructions shall be conditioned
with the objective of providing, within a reasonable
time, a moisture condition within the specimen approx-
DURATION AND CONDUCT OF TESTS imately representative of that likely to exist in similar
Sec. 12-7-105. constructions in buildings. For purposes of standardiza-
tion, this condition is to be considered as that which
(a) Fire endurance. The fire endurance test on the speci- would be established at equilibrium resulting from dry-
men with its applied load, if any, shall be continued until fail- ing in an ambient atmosphere of 50 percent relative
ure occurs, or until the specimen has withstood the test humidity at 73°F. However, with some constructions, it
conditions for a period equal to that herein specified in the may be difficult or impossible to achieve such unifor-
conditions of acceptance for the given type of construction. mity within a reasonable period of time. Accordingly,
(b) Hose stream test. Where required by the conditions of where this is the case, specimens may be tested when
acceptance, a duplicate sample shall be subjected to a fire the dampest portion of the structure, the portion at 6-
exposure test for a period equal to one-half of that indicated inch depth below the surface of massive constructions,
as the resistance period in the fire endurance test, but not for has achieved a moisture content corresponding to dry-
more than one hour, immediately after which the sample shall ing to equilibrium with air in the range of 50 to 75 per-
be subjected to the impact, erosion, and cooling effects of a cent relative humidity at 73 + 5°F. In the event that
hose stream directed first at the middle and then at all parts of specimens dried in a heated building fail to meet these
the exposed face, changes in direction being made slowly. requirements after a 12-month conditioning period, or
in the event that the nature of the construction is such
(c) Exemption. The hose stream shall not be required in that it is evident that drying of the specimen interior
the case of constructions having a resistance period, indicated will be prevented by hermetic sealing, these require-
in the fire endurance test, of less than one hour. ments may be waived, except as to attainment of a large
(d) Optional program. The submitter may elect, with the portion of final strength, and in the specimen tested in
advice and consent of the testing body, to have the hose the condition in which it then exists.
stream test made on the sample subjected to the fire endur- 2. Specimens shall be exposed to the controlled condi-
ance test and immediately following the expiration of the fire tions outlined in Item 1 until the interior or dampest
endurance test. section of the assembly attains a relative humidity of 75
(e) Stream equipment and details. The stream shall be percent or less. If during the conditioning of the speci-
delivered through 21/2-inch hose, discharging through a men it appears desirable or is necessary to use acceler-

14 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS

ated drying techniques, it is the responsibility of the feet. The test specimen shall be restrained on all four edges.
laboratory conducting the test to avoid procedures The fire testing furnace, its arrangement and control during
which will significantly alter the structural or fire fire tests shall conform to SFM 12-7-3, Section 12-7-301 (a),
endurance characteristics of the specimen or both from Vertical Large-scale Wall Furnace.
those produced as the result of drying in accordance
with procedures given in Item 1. (b) Conditions of acceptance. The test shall be regarded
as successful if the following conditions are met:
3. Within 72 hours prior to the fire test, information on the
actual moisture content and distribution within the 1. The wall or partition shall have withstood the fire
specimen shall be obtained. This information shall be endurance test without passage of flame or gases hot
included in the test report. enough to ignite conditioned cotton waste, for a period
equal to that for which classification is desired.

TESTS OF BEARING WALLS AND PARTITIONS Note: Cotton waste shall be conditioned by drying
in an oven at a temperature of 120°F for a period of
Sec. 12-7-106. not less than one hour prior to the test.
(a) Size of sample. The area exposed to fire shall be not 2. The wall or partition shall have withstood the fire and
less than 100 square feet with neither dimension less than 9 hose stream test as specified in Section 12-7-105 with-
feet. The test specimen shall not be restrained on its vertical out passage of flame, of gases hot enough to ignite cot-
edges. The fire testing furnace, its arrangement and control ton waste, or passage of the hose stream.
during fire tests shall conform to SFM 12-7-3, Section 12-7-
301 (a), Vertical Large-scale Wall Furnace. 3. Transmission of heat through the wall or partition
during the fire endurance test shall not have been such
(b) Loading. During the fire endurance test, and fire and as to raise the temperature on its unexposed surface
hose stream test, a superimposed lead shall be applied to the more than 250°F (139°C) above its initial temperature.
construction in a manner calculated to develop theoretically,
as nearly as practicable, the working stresses contemplated by 4. Deflection of the wall or partition during the fire endur-
the design. ance test shall not exceed 6 inches. The deflection of
specimens varying from the dimensions given in Sec-
(c) Conditions of acceptance. The test shall be regarded
tion 12-7-107 (a) shall be determined proportionately.
as successful if the following conditions are met:
1. The wall or partition shall have sustained the applied load
during the fire endurance test without passage of flame or TEST OF COLUMNS
gases hot enough to ignite conditioned cotton waste, for a
period equal to that for which classification is desired. Sec. 12-7-108.
Note: Cotton waste shall be conditioned by drying (a) Size of sample. The length of the column exposed to
in an oven at a temperature of 120°F for a period of fire shall, when practicable, approximate the maximum clear
not less than one hour prior to the test. length contemplated by the design, and for building columns
shall be not less than 9 feet. The contemplated details of con-
2. The wall or partition shall have sustained the applied load nections and their protection, if any, shall be applied accord-
during the fire and hose stream test as specified in Section ing to the methods of acceptable field practice.
12-7-105, without passage of flame, of gases hot enough
to ignite cotton waste, or passage of the hose stream, and (b) Loading.
after cooling but within 72 hours after its completion shall
sustain the dead lead of the test construction plus twice 1. During the fire endurance test, the column shall be
the superimposed load specified above. exposed to fire on all sides and shall be loaded in a
manner calculated to develop theoretically, as nearly as
3. Transmission of heat through the wall or partition practicable, the working stresses contemplated by the
during the fire endurance test shall not have been such design. Provision shall be made for transmitting the
as to raise the temperature on its unexposed surface load to the exposed portion of the column without
more than 250°F (139°C) above its initial temperature. unduly increasing the effective column length.
4. Deflection of the wall or partition during the fire endur- 2. If the submitter and the testing body jointly so decide,
ance test shall not exceed 6 inches. The deflection of the column may be subjected to 13/4 times its designed
specimens varying from the dimensions given in Sec- working load before the fire endurance test is under-
tion 12-7-106 (a) shall be determined proportionately. taken. The fact that such a test has been made shall not
be construed as having had a deleterious effect on the
fire endurance test performance.
TESTS OF NONBEARING WALLS AND PARTITIONS
(c) Condition of acceptance. The test shall be regarded as
Sec. 12-7-107.
successful if the column sustains the applied load during the
(a) Size of sample. The area exposed to fire shall be not fire endurance test for a period equal to that for which classi-
less than 100 square feet, with neither dimension less than 9 fication is desired.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 15

FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS

ALTERNATE TEST OF PROTECTION (a) Size and construction of sample.

FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL COLUMNS
1. The area exposed to fire shall be not less than 180
Sec. 12-7-109. square feet, with neither dimension less than 12 feet.
(a) Application. This test procedure does not require col- Structural members, if a part of the construction
umn loading at any time and may be used at the discretion of under test, shall lie within the combustion chamber
the testing laboratory to evaluate steel column protections and have a clearance of not less than 8 inches from
that are not required by design to carry any of the column its walls. No individual classification shall be made
load. of structural members which have a clearance of less
(b) Size and character of sample. than 24 inches from its walls. The fire testing fur-
nace, its arrangement and control during fire tests
1. The size of the steel column used shall be such as to shall conform to the provisions of SFM 12-7-3, Sec-
provide a test specimen that is truly representative of tion 12-7-301 (c), for Horizontal Large-scale Floor
the design, materials and workmanship for which Furnace.
classification is desired. The protection shall be
applied according to the methods of acceptable field 2. Structural members forming a part of the assembly
practice. The length of the protected column shall be shall be supported in accordance with the recom-
at least 8 feet. The column shall be vertical during mended fabrication procedures for the type of con-
application of the protection and during the fire struction. Assemblies representing forms of
exposure. The rating of performance shall not be construction that restrain structural elements and top
applicable to sizes of columns smaller than those deck shall be supported by a restraining frame,
tested. incorporated in or attachable to the furnace structure
in such a manner that comparable restraint shall
2. The applied protection shall be restrained against
occur during the test.
longitudinal temperature expansion greater than that
of the steel column by rigid steel plates or reinforced (b) Loading. Throughout the fire endurance test, a super-
concrete attached to the ends of the steel column imposed load shall be applied to the test specimen. This load,
before the protection is applied. The size of the together with the weight of the specimen, shall be as nearly as
plates or amount of concrete shall be adequate to practicable the maximum theoretical dead and live loads per-
provide direct bearing for the entire transverse area mitted by nationally recognized design standards.
of the protection.
(c) Temperature measurement. The temperature of the
3. The ends of the specimen, including the means for steel in structural members shall be measured by thermocou-
restraint, shall be given sufficient thermal insulation ples at three or more sections equally spaced along the length
to prevent appreciable direct heat transfer from the of the members with one section located at mid-span; alter-
furnace. nately when thermocouples are placed at four sections, they
(c) Temperature measurement. The temperature of the may be at the quarter points provided no thermocouples shall
steel in the column shall be measured by at least three ther- be placed within 24 inches of the furnace walls; except that in
mocouples located at each of four levels. The upper and cases where the cover thickness is not uniform along the
lower levels shall be 2 feet from the ends of the steel column, specimen length, at least one of these sections shall include
and the other two intermediate levels shall be equally spaced. the point of minimum cover. For solid section steel beams,
The thermocouples at each level shall be so placed as to mea- there shall be four thermocouples at each section: one at the
sure significant temperatures of the component elements of center on the exposed face of the bottom flange, one on the
the steel section. edge of the bottom flange, one on the web at the center and
(d) Exposure to fire. During the fire endurance test, the one on the bottom at the edge of the top flange. For reinforced
specimen shall be exposed to fire on all sides for its full or prestressed concrete structural members, thermocouples
length. shall be located on each of the tension reinforcing elements
unless there are more than eight elements, in which case ther-
(e) Conditions of acceptance. The test shall be regarded mocouples shall be placed on eight elements of selected in
as successful if the transmission of heat through the protec- such a manner as to obtain representative temperatures of all
tion during the period of fire exposure for which classifica- the elements. For designs employing trusses or open-web
tion is desired does not raise the average (arithmetical) steel joists, four thermocouples shall preferably be placed at
temperature of the thermocouples at any one of the four lev- mid-span of each truss or joist, two on the bottom chord, one
els above 1000°F (537.8°C), or does not raise the temperature at the middle of the web element and one on the bottom of the
above 1200°F (648.8°C) at any one of the measured points. top chord with locations selected in such a manner as to
obtain representative temperatures of all the elements, pro-
vided, however, that no more than four joists need to be so
TESTS OF FLOORS AND ROOFS instrumented. For designs employing combustible framing,
Sec. 12-7-110. (The following is applicable to floors and three or more thermocouples shall be placed approximately at
roofs with or without attached, furred or suspended ceilings, mid-span on three or more framing members and so located
and requires application of fire exposure to the underside of as to obtain representative temperatures on the soffits of the
the construction.) framing members.

16 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS

(d) Conditions of acceptance. In obtaining an assembly (g) Structural frame members, conditions of acceptance.
classification, the following conditions shall be met: 1. The construction shall have sustained the applied
1. The construction shall have sustained the applied load load during the fire endurance test for a period equal
during the fire endurance test without passage of flame to that for which classification is desired.
or gases hot enough to ignite conditioned cotton waste 2. For assemblies employing solid steel beams the
for a period at least equal to that for which classifica- transmission of heat through the protection during
tion is desired. the period of fire endurance for which classification
Note: Cotton waste shall be conditioned by drying is desired does not raise the temperature at any loca-
in an oven at a temperature of 120°F for a period of tion on the member above 1200°F, nor the average
not less than one hour prior to the test. temperature recorded by four thermocouples at any
section above 1000°F.
2. The transmission of heat through the construction
during the fire endurance test shall not have been such 3. For assemblies employing open-web steel joists or
as to raise the average temperature of the thermocou- steel trusses spaced 4 feet or more on centers, the
ples on its unexposed surface more than 150°F (139°C) transmission of heat through the protection on the
above its initial temperature. steel joists or trusses during the period of fire endur-
ance for which classification is desired does not
3. Structural failure, deflection or sagging of the structural
raise the average temperature of all joists or truss
elements of the test specimen or any portion of the
thermocouples above 1000°F.
structural elements in excess of 12 inches shall be
judged as the end of the fire endurance period. 4. For assemblies employing concrete structural mem-
bers the transmission of heat through the cover to
4. For assemblies employing steel structural members,
the steel during the period for which classification is
including decks designed as structural diaphragms the
desired does not raise the average temperature of the
transmission of heat through the protection during the
thermocouples at any section on the steel above
period of fire endurance for which classification is
800°F for cold drawn prestressing steel or 1000°F
desired does not raise the temperature at any location
for reinforcing steel.
on the member above 1200°F, nor the average of the
thermocouples at any section above 1000°F.
5. For assemblies employing multiple open web steel TESTS OF LOADED RESTRAINED
joists (spaced less than 48 inches on center), the trans- STRUCTURAL FRAME MEMBERS
mission of heat through the protection during the period Sec. 12-7-111.
of fire endurance for which classification is desired
does not raise the average of all thermocouples in all (a) Application. An individual classification of a structural
joists above 1000°F. frame member (beams, girders, joists, etc.) may be developed
by this test procedure. The structural frame member may be
6. For assemblies employing concrete structural members, tested with a representative floor or roof section; and the fire
the transmission of heat through the cover to the steel endurance classification so derived shall be applicable to the
during the period for which classification is desired structural frame member when used with any floor or roof con-
does not raise the average temperature of the thermo- struction which has a comparable or greater thermal capacity
couples at any section on the steel above 800°F for cold for heat dissipation from the beam than the floor or roof with
drawn prestressing steel or 1000°F for reinforcing steel. which it was tested. The fire endurance classification devel-
(e) Reports of results. The fire endurance shall be oped by this method shall not be applicable to sizes of struc-
reported for the floor or roof assembly as tested, and a differ- tural frame members smaller than those tested.
ent fire endurance classification from that of the assembly for (b) Size and construction of specimen. The structural
structural members shall not be recorded without reference to frame member shall be such as to provide a test specimen that
Section 12-7-110 (f) and (g). is representative of the design, materials and workmanship
(f) Alternate classification procedure for loaded struc- for which classification is desired. Any protection shall be
tural frame members. Fire endurance classifications may be applied according to the methods of acceptable field practice.
developed for structural frame members tested as part of a The length of the structural frame member exposed to the fire
floor or roof assembly as described in Section 12-7-110 (a) shall be not less than 12 feet, and the member shall be tested
through (c) using the conditions of acceptance described in in a horizontal position. Specimens representing forms of
Section 12-7-110 (g). The fire endurance classification so construction in which restraint due to thermal expansion
derived shall be applicable to the structural frame member occurs shall be supported by a restraining frame in such a
when used with any floor or roof construction which has a manner that comparable restraint shall occur during the test.
comparable or greater thermal capacity for heat dissipation A section of a representative floor or roof construction not
from the beam, and equal or greater compressive strength less than 5 feet wide, symmetrically located with reference to
than the floor or roof with which it was tested. The fire-resis- the structural frame member and extending its full length may
tance classification developed by this method shall not be be included in the test assembly and exposed to fire from
applicable to sizes of structural frame members smaller than below. The floor or roof construction shall not be supported
those tested. or restrained along its span length or ends.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 17

FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS

(c) Furnace. The fire testing furnace, its arrangement and procedure may be used to evaluate the protection for steel
control during fire tests shall conform to SFM 12-7-3, Fire beams, girders and trusses without application of design load,
Testing Furnaces, Section 12-7-301, for the Horizontal provided that the protection is not required by design to func-
Large-scale Floor Furnace, or the Horizontal Large-scale tion structurally in resisting applied loads. The furnace and its
Beam Furnace. control during fire tests shall conform to SFM 12-7-3, Fire
Testing Furnaces, Section 12-7-301, for the Horizontal
(d) Loading. Throughout the fire endurance test, a super-
Small-scale Beam Furnace, the Horizontal Large-scale Beam
imposed load shall be applied to the test specimen. This load,
Furnace or the Horizontal Large-scale Floor Furnace.
together with the weight of the specimen, shall be as nearly as
practicable the maximum theoretical dead and live loads per- (b) Size and character of sample.
mitted by nationally recognized design standards.
1. The size of the steel beam, girder or truss shall be
(e) Temperature measurements. The temperature of such as to provide a test specimen that is representa-
the steel in structural members shall be measured by ther- tive of the design, materials and workmanship for
mocouples at three or more sections spaced along the length which classification is desired. The protection shall
of the members with one section located at the mid-span, be applied according to the methods of acceptable
except that in cases where the cover thickness is not uni- field practice, and the projection below the ceiling,
form along the structural frame member length at least one if any, shall be representative of the conditions of
of these sections shall include the point of minimum cover. intended use. The length of the beam, girder or truss
For solid steel beams there shall be four thermocouples at exposed to the fire shall be not less than 7 feet, and
each section: one shall be located at the center on the the member shall be tested in a horizontal position.
exposed face of the bottom flange: one on the edge of the A section of a representative floor or roof construc-
bottom flange, one on the web at the center and one on the tion not less than 5 feet wide, symmetrically located
bottom of the top flange. For open-web steel joists there with reference to the beam, girder or truss and
shall be four thermocouples at each section: two on the bot- extending its full length, may be included in the test
tom of the lower chord, one at the middle of the web and assembly and exposed to fire from below.
one on the bottom of the top chord. For trusses there shall be
The rating of performance shall not be applicable
not less than four thermocouples at each section: one on the
to sizes of solid structural members or elements of
bottom of the top chord, one at the middle of the nearest
built-up structural members, such as trusses, smaller
diagonal or vertical member and two on the bottom of the
than those tested.
lower chord. For reinforced or prestressed concrete struc-
tural members, thermocouples shall be located on each of 2. The applied protection shall be restrained against
the tension reinforcing elements, unless there are more than longitudinal expansion greater than that of the steel
eight such elements, in which case thermocouples shall be beam, girder or truss by rigid steel plates or rein-
placed on eight elements selected in such a manner as to forced concrete attached to the ends of the member
obtain representative temperature on all the elements. before the protection is applied. The ends of the
member, including the means for restraint, shall be
(f) Conditions of acceptance. In deriving a structural frame given sufficient thermal insulation to prevent appre-
member classification, the following conditions shall be met: ciable direct heat transfer from the furnace to the
1. The structural frame member shall have sustained unexposed ends of the member or from the ends of
the applied load during the fire endurance test for a the member to the outside of the furnace.
period at least equal to that for which classification (c) Temperature measurement. The temperature of the
is desired. steel in the beam, girder or truss shall be measured with not
2. For structural steel members, the transmission of less than four thermocouples at each of not less than three
heat through the protection during the period of fire sections equally spaced along the length of the beam, girder
endurance for which classification is desired does or truss, symmetrically disposed and not nearer than 2 feet
not raise the temperature of the thermocouple at any from the inside face of the walls of the furnace. The thermo-
location on the structural steel member above couples at each section shall be symmetrically placed so as to
1200°F nor the average of the thermocouples at any measure significant temperatures of all component elements
section above 1000°F. of the steel section.
3. For concrete beams, the transmission of heat through (d) Conditions of acceptance. The test shall be regarded
the cover to the steel during the period of fire endur- as successful if the transmission of heat through the protec-
ance for which classification is desired does not raise tion during the period of fire exposure for which classifica-
the average temperature of the thermocouples at any tion is desired does not raise the average (arithmetical)
section on the steel above 800°F for cold drawn pre- temperature of the thermocouples at one of the sections above
stressing steel or 1000°F for reinforcing steel. 100°F, or does not raise the temperature above 1200°F at any
one of the measured points. The fire-resistance classification
Sec. 12-7-112.
so derived shall be applicable to the beam, girder or truss
(a) Application. Where the size and construction of the when used with any floor or roof construction which has an
sample, or the loading specified in Sections 12-7-110 (a) and equal or greater thermal capacity for heat dissipation from the
(b) is not feasible by design or dimensions, this alternate test beam than the floor or roof with which it was tested.

18 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS

TESTS OF CEILING CONSTRUCTIONS porting members (beams or slabs) shall not

Sec. 12-7-113. exceed 1200°F and the average temperature of
the top and bottom of the beams, when used, shall
(a) Application. This test procedure is to be used for clas- not exceed 1000°F.
sification of ceilings that are not an integral part of a floor
construction and where 36 inches or more space is provided
above the top of the joists or beams supporting and protected TESTS OF PROTECTION FOR COMBUSTIBLE
by the ceiling. FRAMING, OR FOR COMBUSTIBLE FACINGS
(b) Size of sample. The area exposed to fire shall be not ON THE UNEXPOSED SIDE OF WALLS,
less than 180 square feet, with neither dimension less than 12 PARTITIONS AND FLOORS
feet, and the ceiling surface at its edges shall be in contact Sec. 12-7-114.
with the test furnace structure. (a) Character of sample. Test panels carrying wall, parti-
(c) Test construction and enclosure. The test ceiling tion or floor protection shall be finished with the protections
construction shall include all structural members and details which are the subject of the test, except that where the finish
including hangers, if any, but not walkways. Above the ceil- on the unexposed side is not the subject of the test and is not
ing during the test, there shall be provided a tight flat-topped specifically indicated, the testing laboratory shall apply a fin-
enclosure, the underside of the covering material of which ish judged suitable for the purpose. In case a floor construc-
shall be 36 inches above the top of the joists or beams sup- tion, as installed for actual use, is to have no finish on the
porting and protected by the ceiling. The top of the enclosure unexposed side, it shall be so tested.
shall be made of cement-asbestos board 1/4 inch in thickness (b) Size of sample. The area exposed to fire shall be, for
under asbestos millboard 1/2 inch in thickness, and the side tests of wall and partition protection, not less than 100 square
walls of 8-inch common brick, or it shall be of a construction feet with neither dimension less than 9 feet; for tests of floor
having equivalent heat conductivity and heat capacity. Where protection, not less than 180 square feet with neither dimen-
use of the ceiling under a combustible construction is con- sion less than 12 feet.
templated, at least five 15-inch square panels of 1-inch pine
boards shall be attached to the underside of the top of the (c) Conditions of acceptance. The test shall be regarded
enclosure. The temperatures on the bottom surface of these as successful if the following conditions are met:
panels shall be measured. 1. The protection shall have withstood the fire endurance
(d) Conditions of acceptance. The test shall be regarded test, without ignition of the materials protected, for a
as successful if the following conditions are met: period equal to that for which classification is desired.
1. The ceiling shall have withstood the fire endurance test 2. Transmission of heat through the protection during the
without the passage of flame or ignition of combustible fire endurance test shall not have been such as to raise
members or materials forming part of the construction the temperatures at its contact with the protected struc-
above the ceilings as evidenced by glow or flame. tural members or facings of the test panel more than
250°F (130°C) above the initial temperatures at these
2. Transmission of heat through the ceiling during the fire
points, except that for members closely embedded on
endurance test shall not have been such as to raise the
three sides in masonry, concrete or similar noncombus-
average temperature above the test ceiling more than
tible materials the permissible temperature rise may be
indicated in Items A, B and C. The limiting tempera-
325°F (181°C).
tures shall be the average of those taken at not less than
five points, one of which shall be approximately at the
center, and four at approximately the centers of the STANDARD FIRE ENDURANCE
quarter sections. TEST REPORT FORM
A. With combustible supports or other combustible Sec. 12-7-115. Reports of fire endurance tests specified in
material in contact with the ceiling, the tempera- Section 12-7-103 shall include all data and in the form pre-
ture increase at the points of contact shall not scribed in this section.
exceed 250°F.
(a) Cover page. Cover page shall include: Laboratory,
B. With combustible supports or other combustible Laboratory Project Number, Sponsor and Date Tested.
material not in contact with the ceiling, the tem-
(b) Title page. Title page shall include: Table of Contents,
perature increase on the surface of any combusti-
Summary of Construction and Fire Endurance Time. The sig-
ble members, pine panels, or combustible
nature of the fire-protection engineer responsible for the con-
material adjacent to the ceiling shall not exceed
duct of the test may be on the title page or at the conclusion of
250°F. The temperature on the exposed surface
the report.
of combustible members not in contact with the
ceiling shall be measured under a sheet of mica (c) Test facility. A complete description and details of the
approximately 0.002 inch in thickness. furnace and recording equipment shall be provided. This may
C. With no combustible material above the ceiling be in an appendix to the report.
construction, the average temperature measured 1. Describe details of end conditions (wedges, bearing,
on the lower surface of the main structural sup- means to prevent rotation), describe details of the

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 19

FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS

restraining frame, degree of restraint or reactive forces supports, flaming, smoke, loss of material, etc.;
opposing expansion and the method used to provide and
this restraint. C. At end of test include amount of drop out, condi-
2. If construction is tested under load, indicate how load is tion of fasteners, sag, etc.
applied and controlled (include loading diagram). 4. Report appearance of the unexposed face:
3. If construction is tested as nonload bearing indicate A. Every 15 minutes;
whether frame is rigid or moves in test.
B. At any noticeable development including crack-
(d) Description of materials. Type, size, class, strength,
ing, smoking, buckling, giving details and time;
densities, trade name and any additional data necessary to
and
fully define and identify materials. The testing laboratory
shall indicate whether materials meet ASTM standards by C. At end of test.
markings, or by statement of sponsor, or by physical or chem- 5. Report time of failure by:
ical test by the testing laboratory. The sponsor shall authorize
the testing laboratory to provide all data to the enforcing A. Temperature rise;
agency as may be necessary for evaluation. B. Failure to carry load; and
(e) Description of test assembly. C. Passage of flame-heat-smoke.
1. Give size of test specimen including dimensions of 6. If hose stream is required, repeat necessary parts of
all parts. Items 3 and 5. If failure occurs in hose stream test,
2. Give details of structural design, including safety describe.
factor of all structural members in the test assembly. (g) Comments by testing engineer.
3. Include plan, elevation, principal cross section, plus 1. Included shall be a statement concerning construc-
other sections as needed for clarity. Detailed draw- tion being representative of field construction. If
ing of complete assembly. construction does not represent typical field con-
4. Give details of attachment of test panel in frame. struction, all deviations shall be noted.
5. Give location of thermocouples, deflection points 2. If construction is unsymmetrical, clearly indicate
and other items for test. face exposed to fire.
6. Describe general ambient conditions at: 3. Fire test.
A. Time of construction; (h) Summary of results. Shall include:
B. During curing (time from construction to test); and 1. Endurance time.
C. Time of test. 2. Nature of failure.
7. Record air movement across unexposed face of test 3. Hose stream results.
specimen. (i) Pictures. Pictures shall be provided as necessary to
8. Report relative humidity in specimen. clarify and show what cannot be covered in the report. Pic-
tures shall include:
(f) Description of test.
1. Assembly in construction with closeups of details sup-
1. Except as provided in Section 12-7-102 (d), report
plementing the report.
temperatures at beginning and every five minutes. If
charts are included in report, clearly indicate time 2. Exposed face prior to test.
and Fahrenheit temperature: 3. Unexposed face at start of endurance test.
A. In furnace space. 4. Unexposed face at end of fire endurance test.
B. On unexposed face for each thermocouple. 5. Exposed face at end of fire endurance test.
C. On protected framing members as stipulated in 6. If hose stream test is required, repeat Items 1 through 5.
test method. In combustible assemblies indicate
temperatures on framing back of protection, sof- TABLE SFM 12-7-1A
CONDITIONS FOR HOSE STREAM TEST
fit of joists or other framing members.
DURATION OF
WATER
D. On request of the enforcement agency, furnish PRESSURE AT
APPLICATION,
MINUTES PER
the temperatures in the plenum at mid-depth of BASE OF NOZZLE
100 SQUARE
ceiling-floor assemblies and underside of floor. (POUNDS PER
FEET OF
SQUARE INCH)
EXPOSED AREA
2. Report deflections every 5 minutes for first 15 minutes,
and last hour of test. Every 10 minutes in between. 4 hours, and over 45 5
3. Report appearance of exposed face: 2 hours, and over, if less than 4 30 21/2
1
A. Every 15 minutes; 1 /2 hours, and over, if less than 2 30 11/2
1 hour, and over, if less than 11/2 30 1
B. At any noticeable development, give details and
time, i.e., cracks, buckling, twisting, expansion of Less than 1 hour, if desired 30 1

20 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 CHAPTER 12-7-2

FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS

Reserved

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 21

22 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE
 CHAPTER 12-7-3

FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS

FIRE TESTING FURNACES

STANDARD 12-7-3

STATE FIRE MARSHAL (h) Protection of equipment and test specimen. The test-
SCOPE ing furnaces, equipment and test specimen undergoing the
Sec. 12-7-300. This standard sets forth the general require- fire test shall be protected from any condition of wind or
ments for the design and control of fire testing furnaces weather, that might lead to abnormal results. The ambient air
intended for fire exposure testing and assignment of fire temperature of the testing room at the beginning of the test
endurance ratings of building materials, assemblies of build- shall be within the range of 50°F to 90°F (10°C to 32°C).
ing materials, equipment and devices. Velocity of air across the unexposed face of the test specimen
shall not exceed 4.4 feet per second, as determined by an ane-
Furnace design and dimensions mometer placed at right angles to the unexposed surface,
Sec. 12-7-301. Furnaces shall consist of a furnace chamber measured before or during the test. If mechanical ventilation
and an insulated specimen frame. The furnace chamber walls is employed during the test, an airstream shall not be directed
and floor shall consist of insulating fire brick or equivalent across the surface of the specimen.
heat-reflective materials. Furnace dimensions shall be not
less than shown in the following:
BURNERS AND FUEL
(a) Vertical large-scale wall furnace. The furnace expo-
sure panel or door shall consist of an insulated steel restrain- Sec. 12-7-302.
ing frame having an available opening for the test sample of (a) Burners.
not less than 200 square feet in area with neither dimension
1. In vertical furnaces, burners shall be placed in the
less than 9 feet.
back wall of the furnace. The location of the burners
(b) Vertical half-scale wall furnace. The furnace expo- and provisions for combustion air shall be such as to
sure panel or door shall consist of an insulated steel restrain- provide an even flame exposure to the entire
ing frame having an available opening of not less than 50 exposed face of the test specimen. Combustion air
square feet for the test sample. Neither dimension of the fur- openings shall be provided in such a manner as to
nace opening shall be less than 7 feet. normally prevent induction of combustion air
(c) Horizontal large-scale floor furnace. The furnace through any opening in the test specimen.
exposure panel shall consist of an insulated steel restraining 2. In horizontal furnaces, burners shall be placed in the
frame having an available opening of not less than 180 square floor or side walls. Burrs and the provisions for
feet for the test sample. Neither dimension of the furnace combustion air shall be so arranged as to provide a
opening shall be less than 12 feet. uniform exposure to the entire exposed face of the
(d) Horizontal small-scale furnace. The furnace expo- test specimen.
sure panel shall consist of an insulated frame having an avail- 3. In column furnaces, burners shall be placed in the
able opening of not less than 35 square feet for the test four walls to provide an even luminous flame expo-
sample. Neither dimension of the furnace opening shall be sure to all sides of the test sample.
less than 5 feet. (b) Fuel. Furnaces shall be supplied with natural, manu-
(e) Horizontal large-scale beam furnace. The furnace factured or bottled gas.
exposure panel shall consist of an insulated steel restraining
frame having an available opening of not less than 180 square
feet for the test sample. Neither dimension of the furnace TIME-TEMPERATURE CURVE
opening shall be less than 5 feet. Sec. 12-7-303. The conduct of fire tests of materials, assem-
(f) Horizontal small-scale beam furnace. The furnace blies, methods of construction, equipment and devices shall
exposure panel for the “Alternate Test of Protection for be controlled to conform to the applicable portion of the stan-
Structural Steel Beams, Girders and Trusses” shall consist of dard time-temperature curve shown in Figure 12-7-3-1. The
an insulated steel frame having an available opening of not points on the curve that determine its character are:
less than 35 square feet for the test sample. Neither dimension 1000°F (538°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . at 5 minutes
of the furnace opening shall be less than 5 feet.
1300°F (704°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . at 10 minutes
(g) Column furnace. The column furnace shall be of such
dimensions as to provide an opening for column sections not 1500°F (843°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . at 30 minutes
less than 8 feet in clear length. 1700°F (927°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . at 1 hour

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 23

FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS

1792°F (978°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . at 11/2 hours (b) Temperature recording. The furnace temperatures
shall be read at intervals not exceeding 5 minutes during the
1850°F (1010°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . at 2 hours
first 2 hours, and thereafter the intervals may be increased to
1925°F (1052°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . at 3 hours not more than 10 minutes.
2000°F (1093°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . at 4 hours (c) Furnace control accuracy. The accuracy of the fur-
For a closer definition of the time-temperature curve, see nace control shall be such that the area under the time-tem-
Table 12-7-3A. perature curve, obtained by averaging the results from the
thermocouple readings, is within 10 percent of the corre-
sponding area under the standard time-temperature curve for
FURNACE CONTROL fire tests of 1 hour or less duration, within 7.5 percent for
those over 1 hour and not more than 2 hours, and within 5
Sec. 12-7-304. percent for tests exceeding 2 hours in duration. Individual
(a) Thermocouples. thermocouple readings shall not exceed or fall below the
standard time-temperature curve by more than 15 percent.
1. Furnace thermocouples shall be protected by sealed
porcelain tubes having 3/4-inch outside diameter and 1/8- (d) Furnace correction. When the indicated resistance
inch wall thickness, or, as an alternate, in the case of period is 1/2 hour or over, determined by the average or maxi-
base-metal thermocouples, shall be protected by 1/2- mum temperature rise on the unexposed surface or within the
inch wrought steel or wrought iron pipe of standard test sample, or by failure under load, a correction shall be
weight or equivalent protection of approved type. The applied for variation of the furnace exposure from that pre-
exposed length of the pyrometer tube and thermocouple scribed, where it will affect the classification, by multiplying
in the furnace chamber shall be not less than 12 inches. the indicated period by two-thirds of the difference in area
between the curve of average furnace temperature and the
2. In the large-scale horizontal floor and vertical wall fur- standard curve for the first three-fourths of the period and
naces, the temperature of the fire test exposure shall be dividing the product by the area between the standard curve
deemed to be the average temperature obtained from and a base line of 60°F (20°C) for the same part of the indi-
the readings of not less than nine thermocouples sym- cated period, the latter area increased by 54 Fahr-hour or 30
metrically disposed and distributed to show the tem- Cent-hour (3240 Fahr-minutes or 1800 Cent-minutes) to
perature near all parts of the test specimen. In the compensate for the thermal lag of the furnace thermocouples
vertical half scale and horizontal small-scale furnaces, during the first part of the test. For fire exposure in the test
the number of thermocouples shall be proportioned to higher than standard, the indicated resistance period shall be
those of the large-scale furnaces, but shall in no case be increased by the amount of the correction and be similarly
less than four thermocouples. decreased for fire exposure below standard.
3. In the column furnace, the temperature of the fire test
Note: The correction can be expressed by the following
exposure shall be deemed to be the average temperature
formula:
obtained from the readings of not less than eight ther-
mocouples symmetrically disposed at two levels to 21 ( A – AS )
show the temperature near all parts of the test speci- C = ---------------------------
3 ( AS + L )
men. The two levels shall be located approximately 2
feet from the top and bottom of an 8-foot clear height where:
furnace.
C = correction in the same units as 1
4. In the vertical wall furnaces, the junction of the thermo-
couples shall be placed 6 inches from the exposed face 1 = indicated fire endurance period
of the test specimen at the beginning of the test. The A = area under the curve of indicated average furnace
junction of the thermocouples shall, during the fire test temperature for the first three-fourths of the
and as a result of deflection, be maintained at 6 inches indicated period
from the exposed face of the test specimen.
AS = area under the standard furnace curve for the same
5. In horizontal beam, floor and roof furnaces having a part of the indicated period
furnace chamber not less than 180 square feet in area,
the junction of the thermocouples shall be 12 inches L = lag correction in the same units as A and AS (54
from the exposed face of the test specimen at the begin- Fahr-hour or 30 Cent-hour (3240 Fahr-minutes or
ning of the test, and shall not touch the test specimen 1800 Cent-minutes)
during the test as a result of its deflection.
(e) Furnace pressure. The pressure in the furnace cham-
6. In horizontal beam, floor and roof furnaces having a ber during the fire test shall be maintained as nearly equal to
furnace chamber less than 180 square feet in area, the atmospheric pressure as possible. Horizontal furnaces may be
junction of the thermocouples shall be placed 6 inches operated at a slight negative pressure sufficient to reduce
from the exposed face of the test specimen at the begin- haze permitting visual observation. Furnace stacks shall be
ning of the test and, during the test, shall not touch the equipped with dampers to facilitate maintenance of furnace
test specimen as a result of its deflection. pressure.

24 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS

CORRELATION floor for heat dissipation, noncombustible assembly having

Sec. 12-7-305. Tests of specific assemblies of materials shall an insulating concrete floor or other type of design.
be conducted for correlation (or correlation factor) of furnace Comparison of test results shall provide evidence of equiv-
exposure by comparison with tests of identical assemblies alent exposure based on transmitted temperatures on the
and materials conducted in furnaces of “Approved Listing unexposed side, on structural framing members, on the
Agencies” which furnaces are deemed as conforming to the underside of floor or roof decks, and in the plenum space.
design and operating requirements of this standard.
Correlation tests of wall furnaces shall include tests of two
assemblies, one combustible and one noncombustible.
Correlation tests of horizontal furnaces dependent on
intended test specimens shall include at least one test for each
type of assembly such as combustible ceiling-floor assembly,
noncombustible assembly having a high thermal capacity

TABLE 12-7-3A
STANDARD TIME-TEMPERATURE CURVE FOR CONTROL OF FIRE TESTS
AREA ABOVE 68°F BASE AREA ABOVE 20°C BASE
TIME TEMPERATURE
°Fahr. °Fahr. °Cent. °Cent.
hr.: min. °Fahr. min. hr. °Cent. min. hr.
0;00 68 00 0 20 00 0
0;05 1 000 2 330 39 538 1 290 22
0:10 1 300 7 740 129 704 4 300 72
0:15 1 399 14 150 236 760 7 860 131
0:20 1 462 20 970 350 795 11 650 194
0:25 1 510 28 050 468 821 15 590 260
0:30 1 550 35 360 589 843 19 650 328
0:35 1 584 42 860 714 862 23 810 397
0:40 1 613 50 510 842 878 28 060 468
0:45 1 638 58 300 971 892 32 390 540
0:50 1 661 66 200 1 103 905 36 780 613
0:55 1 681 74 220 1 237 916 41 230 687
1:00 1 700 82 330 1 372 927 45 740 762
1:05 1 718 90 540 1 509 937 50 300 838
1:10 1 735 98 830 1 647 946 54 910 915
1:15 1 750 107 200 1 787 955 59 560 993
1:20 1 765 115 650 1 928 963 64 250 071
1:25 1 779 124 180 2 070 971 68 990 1 150
1:30 1 792 132 760 2 213 978 73 760 1 229
1:35 1 804 141 420 2 357 985 78 560 1 309
1:40 1 815 150 120 2 502 991 83 400 1 390
1:45 1 826 158 890 2 648 996 88 280 1 471
1:50 1 835 167 700 2 795 1 001 93 170 1 553
1:55 1 843 176 550 2 942 1 006 98 080 1 635
2:00 1 850 185 440 2 091 1 010 103 020 1 717

(continued)

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 25

FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS

TABLE 12-7-3A—continued
STANDARD TIME-TEMPERATURE CURVE FOR CONTROL OF FIRE TESTS
AREA ABOVE 68°F BASE AREA ABOVE 20°C BASE
TIME TEMPERATURE
°Fahr. °Fahr. °Cent. °Cent.
hr.: min. °Fahr. min. hr. °Cent. min. hr.
2:10 1 862 203 330 3 389 1 017 112 960 1 882
2:20 1 875 221 330 3 689 1 024 122 960 2 049
2:30 1 888 239 400 3 991 1 031 133 040 2 217
2:40 1 900 257 720 4 295 1 038 143 180 2 386
2:50 1 912 276 110 4 602 1 045 153 390 2 556
3:00 1 925 294 610 4 910 1 052 163 670 2 728
3:10 1 938 313 250 5 221 1 059 174 030 2 900
3:20 1 950 332 000 5 533 1 066 184 450 3 074
3:30 1 962 350 890 5 848 1 072 194 940 3 249
3:40 1 975 369 890 6 165 1 079 205 500 3 425
3:50 1 988 389 030 6 484 1 086 216 130 3 602
4:00 2 000 408 280 6 805 1 093 226 820 3 780
4:10 2 012 427 670 7 128 1 100 237 590 3 960
4:20 2 025 447 180 7 453 1 107 248 430 4 140
4:30 2 038 466 810 7 780 1 114 259 340 4 322
4:40 2 050 486 560 8 110 1 121 270 310 4 505
4:50 2 062 506 450 8 441 1 128 281 360 4 689
5:00 2 075 526 450 8 774 1 135 292 470 4 874
5:10 2 088 546 580 9 110 1 142 303 660 5 061
5:20 2 100 566 840 9 447 1 149 315 910 5 248
5:30 2 112 587 220 9 787 1 156 326 240 5 437
5:40 2 125 607 730 10 129 1 163 337 630 5 627
5:50 2 138 628 360 10 473 1 170 349 930 5 818
6:00 2 150 649 120 10 819 1 177 360 620 6 010
6:10 2 162 670 000 11 167 1 184 372 230 6 204
6:20 2 175 691 010 11 517 1 191 383 900 6 398
6:30 2 188 712 140 11 869 1 198 395 640 6 594
6:40 2 200 733 400 12 223 1 204 407 450 6 791
6:50 2 212 754 780 12 580 1 211 419 330 6 989
7:00 2 225 776 290 12 938 1 218 431 270 7 188
7:10 2 238 797 920 13 299 1 225 443 290 7 388
7:20 2 250 819 680 13 661 1 232 455 380 7 590
7:30 2 262 841 560 14 026 1 239 467 540 7 792
7:40 2 275 863 570 14 393 1 246 479 760 7 996
7:50 2 288 885 700 14 762 1 253 492 060 8 201
8:00 2 300 907 960 15 133 1 260 504 420 8 407

26 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 27

28 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE
 CHAPTER 12-7-4

FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS

FIRE DOOR ASSEMBLY TESTS

STANDARD 12-7-4

STATE FIRE MARSHAL (c) Thermocouples. Unexposed surface temperatures

SCOPE shall be measured with thermocouples placed under flexible,
Sec. 12-7-400. oven-dry, felted asbestos pads of the following approximate
dimensions and weight: 6 inches square, 0.40 inch in thick-
(a) Application. These methods of fire tests are applicable ness, and weighing 0.026 pound. The pads shall be held
to door assemblies of various materials and types of construc- firmly against the surface of the door(s) and shall fit closely
tion for use in wall openings to retard the passage of fire about the thermocouples without breaking. The thermocouple
(flame, heat and smoke). leads shall be immersed under the pad for distance of not less
(b) Performance. Tests made in conformity with these than 31/2 inches, with the hot junction under the center of the
test methods will register performance during the test expo- pad. The thermocouple leads under the pads shall be not
sure, but such tests shall not be construed as determining suit- heavier than No. 18 B.&S. gage (0.04 inch) and shall be elec-
ability for use after exposure to fire. trically insulated with heat-resistant and moisture-resistant
coatings.
(c) Suitability of assemblies. It is the intent that tests
made in conformity with these test methods will develop data (d) Recording interval. Unexposed surface temperatures
to enable enforcing agencies to determine the suitability of shall be read at the same intervals as used for the furnace tem-
door assemblies for use in locations where fire resistance of a peratures, Section 12-7-304 (b).
specified duration is required.

TEST ASSEMBLIES
FIRE TESTING FURNACES AND CONTROL Sec. 12-7-403.
Sec. 12-7-401.
(a) Construction and size.
(a) Furnaces. Fire testing furnaces and their control shall
conform to SFM 12-7-3, Fire Testing Furnaces, Section 12-7- 1. The construction and size of the test fire door assem-
301 (a), Vertical Large-scale Wall Furnaces. bly, consisting of single doors, doors in pairs, spe-
cial purpose doors (such as dutch doors, double
(b) Half scale. If the proposed conditions of use limit the egress doors, etc.) or multisection doors shall be rep-
construction to smaller dimensions, and for the evaluation of resentative of that for which classification or rating
hardware intended for use on doors not exceeding 4 feet in is desired. The materials and construction of the
width by7 feet 2 inches in height, fire testing furnaces con- door and frame, and the details of the installation,
forming to Section 12-7-301 (b), Vertical Half-scale Wall hardware, hangers, guides, trim, finish, and clear-
Furnace, may be utilized. Constructions and hardware for ance or lap shall be recorded to ensure positive iden-
ceiling access doors intended for use in fire-endurance rated tification or duplication in all respects.
ceiling-floor assemblies shall be tested in furnaces conform-
ing to SFM 12-7-3, Section 12-7-301 (b), (d) or (f). 2. A floor structure shall be provided as part of the
opening to be protected, except where such floor
interferes with the operation of the door. The floor
UNEXPOSED SURFACE TEMPERATURES segment shall be of noncombustible material and
shall project into the furnace approximately twice
Sec. 12-7-402. the thickness of the test door.
(a) Temperatures recorded. The unexposed surface tem- (b) Mounting of doors for test purposes.
peratures of all fire door assemblies shall be recorded. The
unexposed surface temperature shall be determined in the 1. Swinging doors shall be mounted so as to open into
manner specified in Sections 12-7-402 (b), (c) and (d). the furnace chamber, except doors in pairs swinging
in opposite directions shall be mounted so as to have
(b) Surface temperature locations. Unexposed surface one door leaf open into and one door leaf open away
temperatures shall be taken at not less than three points, with from the furnace chamber.
at least one thermocouple in each 16 square foot area of the
door(s). Thermocouples shall not be located over reinforce- 2. Sliding and rolling doors, except passenger elevator
ments extending through the door, over glass panels or nearer shaft doors, shall be mounted on the exposed side of
than 12 inches from the edge of the door. the opening in the wall closing the furnace chamber.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 29

FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS

3. Passenger elevator shaft doors shall be mounted on CONDUCT OF TESTS

the unexposed side of the opening in the wall clos- Sec. 12-7-404.
ing the furnace chamber.
(a) Time of testing. Masonry settings shall be allowed to
4. Access-type door and chute-type door and frame dry at least three days before tests are made.
assemblies shall be mounted so as to have one
assembly open into the furnace chamber and another (b) Fire endurance test.
assembly open away from the furnace chamber. 1. The pressure in the furnace chamber shall be main-
Ceiling access doors and frame assemblies shall be tained as nearly equal to the atmospheric pressure as
mounted in a representative ceiling with the room possible.
side of the access door opening into the furnace 2. The test shall be continued until the exposure period
chamber. of the desired classification or rating is reached,
5. Dumbwaiter and service counter door and frame unless the conditions of acceptance set forth in the
assemblies shall be mounted on the exposed side of appropriate paragraphs are exceeded in a shorter
the opening in the wall. period.
6. Door frames shall be evaluated when mounted so as (c) Hose stream test.
to have the doors open either away from or into the 1. Immediately following the fire endurance test, the
furnace chamber at the discretion of the enforcing test assembly shall be subjected to the impact, ero-
agency to obtain representative information on the sion and cooling effects of a hose stream directed
performance of the construction under test. first at the middle and then at all parts of the
7. Surface-mounted hardware (fire exit devices) for use exposed surface, changes in direction being made
on fire doors shall be evaluated by being installed on slowly.
one door assembly swinging into the furnace cham- 2. The hose stream shall be delivered through a 21/2-
ber and another door assembly swinging away from inch hose discharging through a national standard
the furnace chamber. play-pipe of corresponding size equipped with a
8. The mounting of all doors shall be such that they fit 11/8-inch discharge tip of the standard-taper
snugly within the frame, against the wall surfaces, or smooth-bore pattern without shoulder at the ori-
in guides, but such mounting shall not prevent free fice. The water pressure at the base of the nozzle
and easy operation of the test door. and duration of the application in seconds per
9. Clearances for swinging doors shall be (with a square feet of exposed area shall be as given in
minus 1/16-inch tolerance) as follows: 1/8 inch along Table 12-7-4A.
the meeting edge of doors in pairs, 3/8 inch at the bot- 3. The tip of the nozzle shall be located 20 feet from
tom edge of single swing doors and 1/4 inch at the and on a line normal to the center of the test door.
bottom edge of a pair of doors. If impossible to be so located, the nozzle may be on
10. Clearances for horizontal sliding doors not mounted a line deviating not more than 30 degrees from the
within guides (with a minus 1/8-inch tolerance) shall line normal to the center of the test door. When so
be as follows: 1/2 inch between door and wall surfaces, located the distance from the center shall be less
3
/8 inch between door and floor structure and 1/4 inch than 20 feet by an amount equal to 1 foot for each
between the meeting edges of center parting doors. A 10 degrees of deviation from the normal.
minimum lap of 4 inches of the door over the wall TABLE 12-7-4A
opening at sides and top shall be provided. HOSE STREAM TEST

11. Clearances for vertical sliding doors moving within WATER PRESSURE
DURATION OF
APPLICATION,
guides (with a minus 1/8-inch tolerance) shall be as DESIRED RATING
AT BASE OF
SECONDS PER
NOZZLE, POUNDS
follows: 1/2 inch between door and wall surfaces PER SQUARE INCH
SQUARE FOOT
along the top and/or bottom door edges with guides EXPOSED AREA
mounted directly to the wall surface, and 3/16 inch 3 hours 45 3
between meeting edges of biparting doors or 3/16 1
inch between door and floor structure or sill. 1 /2 hours and over if 30 1.5
less than 3 hours
12. Clearances for passenger elevator sliding doors
1 hour and over if less
(with a minus 1/8-inch tolerance) shall be as follows: than 11/2 hours 30 0.9
3
/8 inch between door and wall surfaces and 3/8 inch
between multisection door panels. Multisection door Less than 1 hour 30 0.6
panels shall overlap 3/4 inch. Door panels shall lap
the wall opening 3/4 inch at the sides and top.

30 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS

REPORT edge, except that light browning without any

Sec. 12-7-405. flaming may occur at throughbolts and the latch
rose.
1. The report shall record the construction and mounting
details of the door(s) as provided in Section 12-7-403. (b) Hardware. When hardware is to be evaluated for use
Drawings and photographs of construction and mount- on fire doors, it shall hold the door closed under the condi-
ing details shall be provided. tions of acceptance for an exposure period of three hours, and
the latch bolts shall remain projected and shall be intact after
2. The results shall be reported in accordance with the the test. Builders fire door hardware shall not be equipped
performance in tests prescribed in these test methods. with any dogging device, set screw or other arrangement
The report shall show the performance under the which can be used to prevent projection and latching of the
desired exposure period chosen from the following: 20 latch bolt, locking device or locking bolt upon closing of the
minutes, 30 minutes, 45 minutes, 1 hour, 11/2 hours or 3 door(s). The hardware need not be operable after the test. All
hours. The report shall include the temperature mea- parts essential to the latching or unlatching of fire exit hard-
surements of the furnace, and, if determined, of the ware devices shall be constructed of materials having a soli-
unexposed side of the test assembly. It shall also con- dus temperature of not less than 1000°F.
tain a record of all observations having a bearing on the
performance of the test assembly. (c) Swing doors.
1. The movement of swing doors shall not permit any
portion of the edges to move from the original posi-
CONDITIONS OF ACCEPTANCE tion in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the
Sec. 12-7-406. door more than the thickness of the door during the
first half of the classification period, nor more than
(a) General. 27/8 inches during the entire classification period and
1. A door assembly shall be considered as meeting the as a result of the hose stream.
requirements for acceptable performance when it 2. The movement of swing doors mounted in pairs
remains in the opening during the tests specified in shall not permit any portion of the meeting edges to
this standard within the limitations contained in this move more than the thickness of the door away from
section for the desired endurance rating. the adjacent door edge in a direction perpendicular
2. The test assembly shall have withstood the fire to the plane of the doors during the entire classifica-
endurance test and hose stream test without develop- tion period and as a result of the hose stream.
ing openings anywhere through the assembly, 3. An assembly consisting of a pair of swinging doors,
except that dislodging of small fragments from the incorporating an astragal shall not separate in a
central area of the glass light shall be disregarded. direction parallel to the plane of the doors more than
The edges of the individual glass light shall remain 3
/4 inch not equal to the throw of the latch bolt along
in place. the meeting edges.
Exception: The hose stream test shall not be 4. An assembly consisting of a pair of swinging doors,
required for opposite swing double egress exit without an overlapping astragal, for a fire and hose
doors, and for doors of fire endurance rating of stream exposure of 11/2 hours or less, shall not sepa-
less than 45 minutes with or without approved rate along the meeting edges more than 3/8 inch,
wired glass lights. including the initial clearance between doors.
3. Flaming on the unexposed surface of a door assem- 5. An assembly consisting of a single swinging door
bly shall not be permitted during the first 30 minutes shall not separate more than 1/2 inch at the latch loca-
of the classification periods. Some intermittent light tion.
flames (tongues of flame not exceeding approxi-
mately 6 inches in length) for periods not exceeding 6. Door frames to be evaluated with doors shall remain
five-minute intervals are permissible along the securely fastened to the wall on all sides and shall
edges of door after 30 minutes. During the last 15 not cause through openings between frame and
minutes of the classification period the unexposed doors or between frame and adjacent wall.
surface area of the door covered by light flaming or (d) Sliding doors.
charring shall be contained within a distance of 11/2
inches from a vertical door edge and within 3 inches 1. Doors mounted on the face of the wall shall not
from the top edge of the door. move from the wall sufficiently to develop a separa-
tion of more than 21/8 inches at the point of separa-
Exception: On doors not subjected to the hose tion during the entire classification period and as a
stream test, finished with surface veneers or result of the hose stream.
crossbands and veneers, surface flaming on the
unexposed surface shall not burn or char cross- 2. Doors mounted in guides shall not release from
bands or surface veneer along the hinge or latch guides and guides shall not loosen from fastenings.
jamb and shall not burn or char crossbands or sur- 3. The bottom bar of rolling steel doors shall not sepa-
face veneer down more than 1/2 inch from the top rate from the floor structure more than 3/4 inch

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 31

FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS

during the entire classification period and as a result 6. Temperature rise on the unexposed fact at the end of
of the hose stream. 30 minutes. Temperature rise classification shall be
4. The meeting edge of centerparting horizontal sliding 250°F max., 450°F max., 650°F max. or no refer-
doors and biparting vertical sliding doors shall not ence on the label to temperature rise denoting a tem-
separate more than the door thickness in a direction perature rise on the unexposed surface in excess of
perpendicular to the plane of the doors. 650°F at the end of 30 minutes.
5. The meeting edges of centerparting horizontal slid- (c) Glass lights. All doors with glass vision panels of 100
ing doors and biparting vertical sliding doors with- square inches or less in area carry the same temperature rat-
out an overlapping astragal for a fire and hose ing as the door without glass lights. All doors with glass
stream exposure of 11/2 hours or less shall not sepa- lights in excess of 100 square inches are rated as having a sur-
rate along the meeting edges more than 3/8 inch, face temperature in excess of 650°F max., at the end of 30
including the initial clearance between doors. minutes.
6. The meeting edges of centerparting horizontal slid-
ing doors incorporating an astragal shall not separate
in a direction parallel to the plane of the doors more
than 3/4 inch nor equal to the throw of the latch bolt
along the meeting edges.
7. The bottom edge of service counter doors or single
slide dumbwaiter doors shall not separate from the
sill more than 3/8 inch.
8. A resilient astragal when required for life-safety
purposes shall not deteriorate sufficiently to cause
through openings during the fire endurance part of
the test, but small portions may be dislodged during
the hose stream part of the test.
9. The lap edges of passenger elevator doors, including
the lap edges of multisection doors, shall not move
from the wall or adjacent panel surfaces sufficiently
to develop a separation of more than 27/8 inches at
the point of separation during the entire classifica-
tion period and as a result of the hose stream.
10. The meeting edges of centerparting passenger eleva-
tor door assemblies, for a fire and hose stream expo-
sure of 11/2 hours or less, shall not move apart more
than 11/4 inches as measured in any horizontal plane
during the entire classification period and as a result
of the hose stream.

MARKING
Sec. 12-7-407.
(a) Label. Fire assemblies shall bear a label issued by an
approved listing agency or a label approved by the State Fire
Marshal showing the fire-protection rating of the assembly.
(b) Label markings. The markings on the labels approved
by the State Fire Marshal shall include the following:
1. Name and address of the listee.
2. Model number or identification of the assembly.
3. Serial number assigned by the listing agency or file
number assigned by the State Fire Marshal.
4. Rating of 3, 11/3, 1, 3/4, 1/2 or 1/3 hour indicating dura-
tion of exposure to fire.
5. Letter A, B, C, D or E following the hourly rating
designating the location for which the assembly is
designed.

32 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 CHAPTER 12-7-5

FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS

Interior Finish of Decorative Material

STANDARD 12-7-5

STATE FIRE MARSHAL Section 12-7-502

SCOPE (a) Framed Rigid Combustible Decorative Material.
Sec. 12-7-500. These requirements and methods of test apply Rigid combustible decorative material and assemblies of
to unframed and framed rigid construction. materials not more than 1/4 inch in thickness used for folding
doors, room dividers, decorative screens and similar applica-
tions, and which are installed with all edges protected, shall
TEST SETUP AND PERFORMANCE conform to the following:
Section 12-7-501 1. All exposed edges shall be protected with frames of
(a) Unframed Rigid Combustible Decorative Material. metal or other noncombustible material, or solid wood
Rigid combustible decorative material and assemblies of of minimum 1/4-inch dimension.
materials not more than 1/4 inch in thickness used for folding 2. The total square foot area of the material shall not
doors, room dividers, decorative screens and similar applica- exceed ten percent of that of the floor area of the room
tions, which do not create concealed spaces and which are in which the material is installed.
installed with exposed edges, shall be flame resistant in
3. When tested as follows, flames shall not reach the top
accordance with the following:
edge of the specimen.
1. Test specimen shall be 12 inches wide and 24 inches
The test shall be conducted in a draft free area, on a
long. Four specimens shall be tested, two in each direc-
specimen of the material 12 inches by 12 inches sus-
tion of the material.
pended at a 45-degree angle from the horizontal with
2. The specimen shall be suspended vertically with its the upper and lower edges in a horizontal plane. The
lower edge 2 inches above the top of a 3/8 inch diameter test flame shall be 3 inches long from a bunsen burner
Bunsen Burner. The test shall be performed in a draft- of approximately 1/2-inch inside diameter with the air
free area. supply completely shut off. The burner shall be posi-
3. The flames from the burner shall be 4 inches long and tioned so that its top is 1 inch vertically below a point
shall be adjusted with sufficient air supply to eliminate on the lower surface of the test specimen, 1 inch up
any yellow flame tips but without any distinct inner from its lower horizontal edge, and midway between
blue cone. the inclined edges. The exposure to the test flame and
the duration of test shall be for a period of 2 minutes.
4. The specimen shall be exposed to the flame at each cor-
ner and at not less than one other point along the lower
edge. Each exposure shall be of sufficient duration to
determine if the material will ignite and continue to
burn, but shall be not less than 20 seconds.
5. The criteria for acceptance shall be as follows:
(A) There shall be not more than intermittent flaming
appreciably beyond the area exposed to the test
flame.
(B) Flame shall not reach the top of the specimen.
(C) On removing the test flame there shall be not more
than one second of after flaming except there may
be nonprogressive flaming of short duration in
areas of accumulated char which were directly
exposed to the test flame.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 33

34 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE
 CHAPTER 12-7A

MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION METHODS

FOR EXTERIOR WILDFIRE EXPOSURE

EXTERIOR WALL SIDING AND SHEATHING

SFM STANDARD 12-7A-1

12-7A-1.1 Application. The minimum design, construction ing on the unexposed side at the end of a 60-minute
and performance standards set forth herein for exterior wall observation period.
siding and sheathing are those deemed necessary to establish 12-7A-1.6 Equipment. Unless otherwise noted, dimensions
conformance to the provisions of these regulations. Materials in the following descriptions shall be followed with a toler-
and assemblies that meet the performance criteria of this stan- ance of ± 0.5 inch (13 mm).
dard are acceptable for use as defined in California Building
Standards Code. 1. Wall assembly holding fixture. The test specimen
support assembly shown in Figure 1 is designed to per-
12-7A-1.2 Scope. This standard evaluates the performance of mit rapid installation and removal of wall assemblies,
exterior walls of structures when exposed to direct flames. and to prevent edge penetration of fire at the margins of
12-7A-1.3 Referenced documents. the wall assembly. It includes a sturdy frame assembly
to hold the specimen and a simulated soffit that is non-
1. ASTM E 2257, Test Method for Room Fire Test of combustible. The frame assembly permits a 4-foot by
Wall and Ceiling Materials and Assemblies. 8-foot (1220 mm by 2440 mm) prefabricated wall sec-
2. ASTM D 4442, Test Methods for Direct Moisture Con- tion to be inserted and to be sealed in such a way that
tent Measurement of Wood and Wood-Base Materials. protects the edges from fire. Side shields are situated
near the vertical edges and to within 12 inches (304
3. ASTM D 4444, Test Methods for Use and Calibration mm) of the top of the test wall assembly as shown in
of Hand-Held Moisture Meters. Figure 1 to aid in minimizing extraneous drafts to the
4. California Building Code, Chapter 7A. surface of the assembly.
12-7A-1.4 Definitions. 2. Burner.
1. Siding (cladding). Any material that constitutes the 2.1. Burner details. The ignition source for the test
exposed exterior covering of an exterior wall and is shall be a gas diffusion burner with a nominal 4-
applied over sheathing or is directly attached to the wall inch-wide by 39-inch-long (100 mm wide by 1000
structural system. mm long) porous top surface of a refractory mate-
rial, as shown in Figure 2. With the exception of
2. Sheathing. The material placed on an exterior wall top surface dimensions, the essential configuration
beneath cladding or siding and is directly attached to of the burner is comparable to the burner design
the wall structural system. described in ASTM E 2257. The burner enclosure
12-7A-1.5 Summary of test method. shall be positioned so that it is centered relative to
the width of the test wall. The distance from the
1. Direct flame exposure. This test method provides for bottom of the test specimen to the top surface of
the direct flame exposure of a wall specimen to a flame the burner shall be 12 inches ± 2 inches (300 mm ±
source centered at the base of a 4-foot by 8-foot (1220 50 mm). The bottom of the test specimen shall be
mm by 2440 mm) test assembly. protected from burner fire exposure by the place-
2. Gas burner. The method employs a gas burner to pro- ment of a 4-foot-wide (1220-mm) thermal barrier
duce a diffusion flame in contact with the test wall consisting of nominal 0.75 inch (19 mm) cement
assembly. board (or equivalent) between the burner enclosure
and the test specimen. The burner enclosure shall
3. Heat output. The gas burner produces a prescribed net
be in contact with the protective barrier. The ther-
rate of heat output of 8535 Btu/min (150 kW) for a
mal barrier shall be positioned so that the top edge
period of 10 minutes, after which the flame exposure is
extends 3 inch ± 1 inch (76 mm ± 25 mm) above
terminated.
the top edge of the burner, and fastened to the base
4. Resistance to fire penetration. The test method mea- of the wall in such a manner to prevent obstruction
sures the ability of the wall system to resist fire penetra- of the burner flame caused by distortion away from
tion from the exterior to the unexposed side of the test the surface of the wall. Any gaps between the top
assembly under the conditions of exposure. Observa- edge of the thermal barrier and the test wall surface
tions are made for the appearance of sustained flaming shall be filled with ceramic wool, or equivalent,
or glow on the unexposed side and/or sustained glow- prior to the test.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 35

MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION METHODS FOR EXTERIOR WILDFIRE EXPOSURE

Natural gas, methane or propane shall be sup- used for testing and obtain a heat release rate
plied to the burner through a metered control sys- value of 150 kW.
tem. The gas supply to the burner shall produce a 2. Take measurements at least once every 6 sec-
net heat output of 8535 ± 454 Btu/min (150 ± 8 onds and start 1 minute prior to ignition of the
kW) throughout the flame exposure. burner. Determine the average heat output
The burner shall be ignited by a pilot burner or a over a period of at least 1 minute by the oxy-
remotely controlled spark igniter. gen consumption method, or calculate the heat
2.2. Burner output verification. The gas supply to the output from the gas mass flow and the net heat
burner shall be the same as used for testing. of combustion.
1. Without a test specimen in the apparatus, 3. Perform verification prior to each day of test-
place the gas burner in the configuration to be ing.

FIGURE 1. TEST FIGURE SCHEMATIC

FIGURE 2. GAS BURNER IGNITION SOURCE

36 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION METHODS FOR EXTERIOR WILDFIRE EXPOSURE

12-7A-1.7 Test assembly. 90°F (32°C) for the period of time necessary to cure or
condition the assembly components. Test specimens
1. Dimensions. The test specimen's dimensions shall be 4
are to be stored so that each will be surrounded by
feet wide by 8 feet high (1220 mm by 2440 mm). The
freely circulating air. Pieces of any hygroscopic materi-
test specimen shall be representative of the end-use
als from the same stock from which the test specimen
wall assembly except as specified in Items 3 and 4. The
was constructed shall be tacked to the specimen during
test specimen shall be mounted in the steel frame hold-
construction in such a manner that they are easily
ing fixture assembly as shown in Figure 1.
removed. These pieces shall be conditioned with the
2. Joint details. The test specimen shall incorporate joint completed specimens. Prior to testing, the pieces of
detail(s) representative of actual installation. hygroscopic materials shall be tested for moisture con-
3. Wall assemblies without internal cavity spaces. For tent.
wall assemblies without internal cavity spaces, the 8.1. Make the moisture determination on two samples
entire wall assembly shall constitute the test specimen from each piece and report the average. For lumber
to be tested. The wall assembly shall be constructed in and other wood-based materials, use Test Methods
accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and/or D 4442. Use of an appropriately calibrated mois-
building code requirements, where applicable. Other ture meter, as described in Test Methods D 4444,
components of the wall assembly, such as building felt to determine the moisture content of wood or wood
and sheathing, are employed to conform to the manu- products is also permitted. For other hygroscopic
facturer’s specifications and/or building codes. materials, use test methods appropriate for those
4. Wall assemblies with internal cavity spaces. For wall materials.
assemblies with internal cavity spaces, the materials on 8.2. For lumber used in the construction of the support-
what would be considered the interior (unexposed) side ing wall structure, the moisture content shall not be
of the wall assembly shall be omitted from the test more than 12 percent. For wood sheathing, the
specimen. Materials such as insulation normally moisture content shall not exceed 8 percent. For
installed within the cavity space shall be omitted from other hygroscopic materials, the moisture shall be
the test specimen. The wall assembly used as the test within ranges specified by the manufacturer before
specimen shall include the structural support elements the assembly is constructed. These specified
and any sheathing, weather barrier and cladding ranges shall be typical for exposure at 77 ± 9°F [25
attached to the exterior surface of the structural support ± 5°C] and 55 ± 10% relative humidity.
elements.
12-7A-1.8 Weathering. Weathering of materials shall be in
5. Layered materials. For wall assemblies composed of accordance with California Building Code Section 703A
layered materials, such as sheathing, siding (cladding) Standards of Quality.
and underlayment, the installation of such layered
materials shall be in accordance with the manufac- 12-7A-1.9 Conduct of tests.
turer’s instructions, or in the absence of such instruc-
1. Test room environment. The ambient temperature in
tions, applicable building code requirements. In the
the test room shall be above 60°F (15°C) and the rela-
absence of manufacturer’s specifications, the wall
tive humidity shall be less than 75 percent. The test
assembly shall include the following minimum compo-
room shall be draft-protected and equipped with an
nents: nominal 2 x 4 studs spaced 16 inches (410 mm)
exhaust hood system for removal of products of com-
on center, and the desired exterior siding material. If
bustion during testing.
sheathing is used, tests shall be run on typical 7/16-inch
oriented strandboard (OSB) of Exposure 1 rating. 2. Airflow. The horizontal airflow, measured at a hori-
Where specified by the manufacturer, sheathing mate- zontal distance of 20 inches (0.5 m) from the edge of
rial and installation shall be in accordance with the the wall assembly, shall not exceed 1.64 ft/s (0.5 m/s).
manufacturer’s instructions. The sheathing shall have
one vertical seam on a selected stud with a 0.125 inch 3. Placement of test frame. Prior to testing, and without
(3 mm) gap. the test specimen in place, position the frame assembly
under the exhaust hood and set the gas burner for the
6. Edge protection. Protect the vertical and horizontal prescribed level of output.
edges of the test specimen with 12-mm-thick ceramic
wool blanket (or equivalent) to eliminate the gap 4. Placement of specimen. Once the burner output is ver-
between the holder and the test specimen and prevent ified, position the specimen holder assembly at the
unwanted edge effects caused by heat transfer to the desired test location under the collection hood.
edges of the test specimen through the sample holder. 5. Test specimen. Insert the test specimen into the frame
7. Replicates. Three matched test specimen assemblies assembly, sealing all edges with ceramic wool.
shall be tested.
6. Ignition. Simultaneously ignite the gas burner and start
8. Pre-test conditioning of test specimens. The com- the timer marking the beginning of the test. Control the
pleted test specimens are to be stored indoors at tem- burner to a constant 150 ± 8 kW output. Control the
peratures not lower than 60°F (16°C) nor higher than hood duct flow to collect all products of combustion.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 37

MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION METHODS FOR EXTERIOR WILDFIRE EXPOSURE

7. Flame exposure. Continue the flame exposure until 12-7A-1.11 Conditions of Acceptance. Should one of the
flame penetration of the test specimen and sustained three replicates fail to meet the Conditions of Acceptance,
flaming on the unexposed side occurs or for a period of three additional tests may be run. All of the additional tests
10 minutes, then extinguish the burner. must meet the Conditions of Acceptance.
8. Observation. If sustained flaming on the unexposed 1. Absence of flame penetration through the wall assem-
side of the test specimen has not occurred, observe the bly at any time.
unexposed side of the test specimen for an additional 2. Absence of evidence of glowing combustion on the
60 minutes for evidence of sustained flaming or glow- interior surface of the assembly at the end of the 70-
ing combustion on the unexposed side. Terminate the minute test.
observation prior to the completion of the 60-minute
observation period if all evidence of flame, glow and
smoke has disappeared.
Note: An infrared thermometer has been found to be
useful to detect the increase of temperature on the
unexposed side of the test assembly.
9. Documentation. Perform photographic and/or video
documentation before, during and after each test.
12-7A-1.10 Report. The report shall include the following:
1. Name and address of the testing laboratory.
2. Name and address of test sponsor.
3. Description of the test specimen including construction
details of the wall system, including details of individ-
ual components (such as type, thickness, and installa-
tion method of any sheathing) and the manufacturer’s
installation details and limitations as applicable.
4. Number of specimens tested.
5. Description of weathering, as applicable.
6. Moisture content of hygroscopic elements of wall sys-
tem construction at the time of testing.
7. Details of the burner verification, including heat supply
rate.
8. Date of test, test identification number and date of
report.
9. The test results shall include:
9.1. A notation of the time and location of sustained
flaming on the unexposed side of the test specimen
during the test, along with the sequence number of
the test specimen.
9.2. A determination of the presence of glow on the
unexposed side of the test specimen at the end of
the 60-minute observation period.
9.3. Observations of the burning characteristics of the
exposed surface of the test wall during and after
the flame exposure.

38 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION METHODS FOR EXTERIOR WILDFIRE EXPOSURE

EXTERIOR WINDOWS
SFM STANDARD 12-7A-2

12-7A-2.1 Application. Exterior window assemblies that Note: Larger windows may be tested by expanding
meet the performance criteria of this standard are acceptable the size of the rear wall of the Wall Assembly Test
for use as defined in the California Building Standards Code. Module.
12-7A-2.2 Scope. This standard evaluates the performance of 2. Materials. In the absence of the window manufac-
exterior windows used in structures when exposed to direct turer's specifications, the wall assembly shall include
flames. the following minimum components:
12-7A-2.3 Referenced documents. 2.1. 2 by 4 inch studs spaced 16 inches (410 mm) on
1. AAMA (for definitions) Training Manual, Residential center, framed out to incorporate a rough opening
& Light Commercial Window and Door Installation sized to receive the test window such that the win-
Training and Registration Program. dow is centered relative to the width of the wall;
2. CAWM 400-95, Standard Practice for Installation of 2.2. Gypsum board for mounting around the window
Windows with Integral Mounting Flange in Wood once it is installed;
Frame Construction. 2.3. Pieces of gypsum cut into narrow strips for use as
12-7A-2.4 Definitions. trim around the window;
1. Frame (Jambs). This usually consists of two vertical 2.4. Caulk to be used as per the window manufacturer's
members (side jambs) and two horizontal members instructions.
(head and sill) that hold the sash. Frames and sash are 3. Wall assembly. A noncombustible wall shall be used
typically made of steel, aluminum, vinyl, fiberglass, with a manufacturer or code-specified opening for the
wood or a combination of these materials. particular window. Install window in framed rough
2. Glazing. The glass in a window. It may include layers opening following manufacturer guidelines. Apply
of plastic as well as glass. manufacturer-recommended caulk to nailing flange
3. Sash. The fixed or movable parts of the window in prior to installation. Use narrow strips of gypsum board
which the panes of glass are set. as trim around window, covering the nail flange of the
window. Any type of framing material may be tested.
12-7A-2.5 Test apparatus.
3.1. Fit the window test assembly into the rear wall of
1. Wall assembly test module. The module is designed the Wall Assembly Test Module, sealing all edges,
to permit rapid installation and removal of window/ including the soffit-to-wall joint. Ceramic wool or
wall assemblies, and is designed to prevent edge pene- comparable material shall be used for sealing.
tration of fire at the margins. It includes two noncom-
bustible side walls attached to a wall frame assembly, 12-7A-2.7 Conduct of tests.
and a simulated soffit that is also noncombustible. The 1. Burner output verification. Without the window in
assembly permits a prefabricated 4 × 8 ft (1.2 × 2.4 m) place, set the burner for 150 kW output. Conduct a ver-
wall section containing the test window to be inserted ification run of 3 minutes to assure the heat release rate,
from the rear and sealed in such a way that the edges and then turn off the burner.
are protected from fire (see Figure 1).
2. Test. Place the burner against the wall assembly at the
2. Burner. A 4 × 39 inch (100 × 1000 mm) diffusion center. Ignite the burner at the 150 kW output and con-
burner shall be used. Natural gas, methane or propane trol during the test for constant and uniform output.
shall be supplied to the burner through a metered con- Optional radiometers can be placed behind the Wall
trol system. The gas supply to the burner shall produce Assembly Test Module to measure heat flux through
a net heat output of 150 ± 4 kW throughout the flame the window glass.
exposure. Burner output can be determined from HRR
or calculated from the gas flow rate, temperature, and 3. Duration and observations. The test shall be contin-
pressure. ued until flame-through occurs at the window. Flame-
through can occur at the glass (glazing) and/or in the
3. Burner location. The burner shall be positioned so that frame. At this point, the burner shall be extinguished
it is centered relative to the width of the wall assembly and the assembly monitored for sustained combustion.
and against the wall. The distance from the floor to the Note the time elapsed and location of penetration if it
top of the burner shall be 12 inches (300 mm). occurs.
12-7A-2.6 Test assembly. 4. Report. Report a description of the window unit,
1. Window. The window width cannot exceed 3 feet (900 including the types of frames, cladding and panes being
mm) due to the limitations of the test fixture. The tested and details of the installation. Record when and
burner’s flame shall cover the full width of the window how the glass breaks or flame-through occurs in the
sill. The distance from top of the burner to bottom of framing materials or sash, and/or if the framing mate-
window will be 8 inches (200 mm). rial deforms or otherwise suffers a loss of integrity such

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 39

MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION METHODS FOR EXTERIOR WILDFIRE EXPOSURE

that the glass cannot be held in place, and a record of

the time at which any of these events occur.
12-7A-2.8 Conditions of Acceptance.
1. Duration of direct flame exposure. To pass this test
standard, the window and window assembly shall with-
stand 8 minutes of direct flame exposure with the
absence of flame penetration through the window
frame or pane, or structural failure of the window frame
or pane.
2. Flame penetration or structural failure. Flame pene-
tration or structural failure of the flame or pane anytime
during the test constitutes failure of this test standard.

FIGURE 1. SCHEMATIC OF THE WALL ASSEMBLY

Test Module used for evaluating the fire performance of a window.

40 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION METHODS FOR EXTERIOR WILDFIRE EXPOSURE

HORIZONTAL PROJECTION UNDERSIDE

SFM STANDARD 12-7A-3

12-7A-3.1 Application. The minimum design, construction 12-7A-3.6 Materials.

and performance standards set forth herein for the exposed
1. Framing. The materials used shall be representative of
underside of horizontal projections such as the horizontal sof-
the grades that would be typical of eave construction
fits of roof eaves, floor projections, and exposed underfloor
and installed in the eave’s subassembly as per accepted
areas are those deemed necessary to establish conformance to
construction practices.
the provisions of these regulations. Materials and assemblies
that meet the performance criteria of this standard are accept- 2. Soffit. Material selected for the test.
able for use as defined in the California Building Standards 12-7A-3.7 Test system preparation (Figure 1).
Code.
1. Eaves fabrication. The 4-foot-wide by 2-foot (1.2 m
12-7A-3.2 Scope. This standard evaluates the fire-resistive by 0.6 m) test specimen shall be constructed to fit into a
performance of horizontal projection assemblies including 4-foot-wide (1.2 m) space at the top of the test assem-
the horizontal soffits of roof eaves, floor projections, and bly described in SFM 12-7A-1. Normal eave framing,
exposed underfloor areas when subjected to direct flame joints in soffit material, and other typical features pres-
exposure to the underside of a horizontal projection. ent in the constructed assembly shall be present in the
12-7A-3.3 Referenced documents. test specimen.
1. ASTM D 4442, Test Methods for Direct Moisture Con- 2. Test Fixture. The test fixture shall be as described in
tent Measurement of Wood and Wood-Base Materials. SFM 12-7A-1, with the exception that the top soffit
2. ASTM D 4444, Test Methods for Use and Calibration projection of the wall assembly fixture is modified to
of Hand-Held Moisture Meters. facilitate installation and removal of eave assemblies.
Gypsum board (or equivalent) is used to create a non-
3. California Building Code, Chapter 7A. combustible wall surface in the 4 x 8 ft. opening in the
12-7A-3.4 Definitions. wall test fixture.
1. Eaves. A projecting edge of a roof that extends beyond 3. Eaves assembly. Fit the eave assembly into the test
the supporting wall as in CBC 702A “Roof Eave” or module so that the horizontal surface of the assembly is
similar horizontal projection assembly. 84 inches (2.1 m) from the top of the burner.
2. Soffit. The enclosed underside of any exterior over- 4. Moisture content. Measure the moisture content of the
hanging section of a roof eave or similar horizontal pro- wooden members of the assembly using a moisture
jection assembly (see CBC 702A “Roof Eave Soffit”). meter (ASTM D 4444), and, for sheathing products, by
12-7A-3.5 Equipment. methods outlined in ASTM D 4442.
1. Burner. A 12 by 12-inch (300 by 300 mm) diffusion 5. Sealing. Seal the edges and ends with ceramic wool or
burner shall be used. Natural gas, methane or propane comparable material to prevent flame penetration in
shall be supplied to the burner through a metered con- these locations of the eave assembly.
trol system. The gas supply to the burner shall produce 12-7A-3.8 Conduct of Tests.
a net heat output of 300 ± 15 kW throughout the flame
exposure. Burner output can be determined from HRR 1. Airflow. The wall test shall be conducted under condi-
or calculated from the gas flow rate, temperature, and tions of ambient airflow.
pressure. 2. Number of tests. Conduct the tests on three replicate
2. Infrared temperature analyzer (optional). Intended eaves assemblies.
for monitoring the temperature change of the inside of 3. Burner output verification. Without the eaves assem-
the eaves. bly in place, adjust the burner for 300 ± 15 kW output.
3. Moisture content. Prior to testing, all materials (lum- Extinguish the burner.
ber and soffit material) shall be conditioned to a con- 4. Burner positioning. Center the burner with respect to
stant weight or for a minimum of 30 days at 73 ± 4ºF the width of the eaves wall assembly and 0.75 inch (20
(23 ± 2ºC) and 50 ± 5% relative humidity, whichever mm) from the wall. The distance from the floor to the
occurs first. Constant weight shall be defined as occur- top of the burner shall be 12 inches (300 mm).
ring when the change in test material weight is less than
or equal to 2 percent in a 24-hour period. Lumber mois- 5. Procedure.
ture content shall be between 8 and 12 percent (oven- 5.1 Ignition. Ignite the burner, controlling for a con-
dry basis) and sheathing shall not exceed 8 percent stant 300 ± 15 kW output.
(oven-dry basis).
5.2 Flame exposure. Continue the exposure until
flame penetration of the eaves occurs or for a 10-
minute period.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 41

MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION METHODS FOR EXTERIOR WILDFIRE EXPOSURE

5.3 Continued combustion. If penetration does not 12-7A-3.10 Conditions of Acceptance. Should one of the
occur, continue observation for an additional 30 three replicates fail to meet the Conditions of Acceptance,
minutes or until all combustion has ceased. three additional tests may be run. All of the additional tests
Note: An infrared thermometer has been found to must meet the Conditions of Acceptance.
be useful to detect the increase of temperature on 1. Absence of flame penetration of the eaves or horizontal
the back side of the eaves and as an aid to identify projection assembly at any time.
the areas of potential combustion. 2. Absence of structural failure of the eaves or horizontal
6. Observations. Note the time, location and nature of projection subassembly at any time.
flame penetration. 3. Absence of sustained combustion of any kind at the
12-7A-3.9 Report. The report shall include a description of conclusion of the 40-minute test.
the eaves material, details of the construction of the eaves,
moisture content of the framing and wood-based soffit ele-
ments as applicable, and point of flame penetration. Provide
details on the time and reasons for early termination of the
test.

FIGURE 1. EAVES TEST ASSEMBLY

42 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION METHODS FOR EXTERIOR WILDFIRE EXPOSURE

DECKING
SFM STANDARD 12-7A-4

12-7A-4.1 Application. The minimum design, construction 3.1. In the absence of recommended installation guid-
and performance standards set forth herein for unloaded ance, the edge-to-edge spacing shall be 3/16 inch (5
decks are those deemed necessary to establish conformance mm) with boards mechanically attached to the
to the provisions of these regulations. Materials and assem- joists using deck screws.
blies that meet the performance criteria of this standard are 3.2. If nominal 6-inch-wide deck boards are used, a
acceptable for use as defined in California Building Stan- total of 5 boards shall be used for each deck.
dards Code. Changing the board width could change the num-
12-7A-4.2 Scope. This standard evaluates the performance of ber of deck boards.
decks (or other horizontal ancillary structures in close prox- 12-7A-4.6 Materials.
imity to primary structures) when exposed to direct flames
and brands. The under-deck flame exposure test is intended to 1. Cross-sectional dimension. All deck board materials
determine the heat release rate (HRR) and degradation modes are to have cross-sectional dimensions equivalent to
of deck or other horizontal boards when exposed to a burner use in service.
flame simulating combustibles beneath a deck. The burning 2. Description. The material under test should be
brand exposure test is intended to determine the degradation described as completely as possible (unit weight, thick-
modes of deck or other horizontal boards when exposed to a ness, width, and general information regarding compo-
burning brand on the upper surface. sition).
12-7A-4.3 Referenced document. 3. Condition of test material. Prior to testing, all materi-
1. ASTM D 4444, Test Methods for Use and Calibration als (deck boards and joist material) shall be conditioned
of Hand-Held Moisture Meters. to a constant weight or for a minimum of 30 days at 73
± 4ºF (23 ± 2ºC) and 50 ± 5% relative humidity, which-
2. ASTM E 108, Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof ever occurs first. Constant weight shall be defined as
Coverings. occurring when the change in test material weight is
3. California Building Code, Chapter 7A. less than or equal to 2 percent in a 24-hour period.
4. UL 790, Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof 12-7A-4.7 PART A. Under-deck flame test.
Coverings. 12-7A-4.7.1 Equipment.
12-7A-4.4 Definitions. 1. Burner. A 12 x 12 inch (300 x 300 mm) sand diffusion
1. Deck boards. Horizontal members that constitute the burner shall be used. Natural gas, methane or propane
exposed surface of the ancillary structure. shall be supplied to the burner through a metered con-
2. Deck surface area. The test specimen area defined by trol system. The gas supply to the burner shall produce
the overall specimen length and width after assembly. a net heat output of 80 ± 4 kW throughout the flame
exposure. Burner output can be determined from HRR
3. Heat release rate. The net rate of energy release as or calculated from the gas flow rate, temperature, and
measured by oxygen depletion calorimetry. pressure.
12-7A-4.5 Test assembly. 2. Oxygen depletion calorimeter. The equipment shall
1. Size. The overall size of the test deck shall be nomi- include a hood, associated ducting, and instrumentation
nally 24 x 24 inches (610 x 610 mm) unless width vari- to provide HRR data by oxygen depletion calorimetry.
ation of deck boards requires an increase in overall 12-7A-4.7.2 Test system preparation. See Figure No. 1.
deck width (i.e., the direction of joists) in order to meet
the overall dimensions. The length of individual deck 1. Deck support assembly. The assembly that holds the
boards shall be 24 inches (610 mm). test deck over the burner.

2. Joists. The deck is supported by two nominal 2 x 6 2. Baffle panels and joist support. Horizontal metal
Douglas-fir joists running perpendicular to the deck plates to support the deck joists along their full length,
boards, and constructed with a 16-inch (406 mm) cen- and also to confine burner flames to the underside of
ter-to-center spacing. A comparable species that may the deck boards located between the support joists.
be more commonly used for structural framing of decks 3. Back wall. Ceramic fiber board or another noncombus-
in a given region can be substituted for Douglas-fir. tible panel product for the back wall material. Total
3. Deck board spacing and fastening. Edge-to-edge height of the back wall shall be 8 feet (2.4 m).
spacing and method of attachment shall conform to the 4. Ledger board. A 4-foot-long (1.2 m) simulated 2 x 6
manufacturer’s installation recommendations. The ledger board shall be constructed of layers of ceramic
front deck board shall be flush with the ends of the fiber board (or other noncombustible panel product)
joists, and the rear deck board shall overhang the end of and attached to the wall at a height slightly below the
the joists by 1 inch (25 mm). overhang of the rear deck board of the test deck.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 43

MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION METHODS FOR EXTERIOR WILDFIRE EXPOSURE

12-7A-4.7.3 Conduct of tests. three additional tests may be run. All of the additional tests
1. Airflow. The test shall be conducted under conditions must meet the Conditions of Acceptance.
of ambient airflow. 1. Effective net peak heat release rate of less than or equal
2. Number of tests. Conduct the test on three replicate to 25 kW/ft2 (269 kW/m2).
assemblies. 2. Absence of sustained flaming or glowing combustion
3. Burner output verification. Without a deck in the of any kind at the conclusion of the 40-minute observa-
apparatus, set the output of the burner to 80 ± 4 kW. tion period.
Conduct a verification run of 3 minutes to ensure the 3. Absence of falling particles that are still burining when
heat release rate, and then turn off the burner. reaching the burner or floor.
4. Measurement of heat release rate. HRR is measured 12-7A-4.8 PART B. Burning brand exposure.
during the tests with a properly calibrated oxygen
depletion calorimeter. Since HRR is typically a post- 12-7A-4.8.1 Equipment.
test analysis, this criterion for Acceptance may be 1. Wind tunnel. The wind tunnel shall have the capability
determined at the end of the test. of providing 12 mph (5.4 m/s) airflow over the deck
5. Burner positioning. Center the burner directly under assembly.
the middle deck board, midway between the joists. The 2. Anemometer. Device for measuring airflow across the
distance from the top of the burner to the bottom of the deck.
deck boards shall be 27 inches (690 mm).
3. Burner. Gas-fueled burner for brand ignition.
6. Moisture content. Measure the moisture content of the
wooden members of the assembly using a moisture 12-7A-4.8.2 Test system preparation. See Figure 2. The
meter (ASTM D 4444). ASTM E 108 “A” brand roof test apparatus is to be used,
with the following modifications:
7. Procedure.
1. Deck support. The deck shall be supported horizon-
7.1. Ignition. Ignite the burner, controlling for a con- tally with the center 60 inches (150 mm) from the front
stant 80 ± 4 kW output. opening of the wind tunnel and the joists parallel to the
7.2. Flame exposure. Continue the exposure for a 3- airflow and resting on two transverse metal supports.
minute period. Extinguish the burner. The top surfaces of these supports, no more than 3
inches (75 mm) wide, are at the same height as the floor
7.3. Continued combustion. Continue observation for
of the wind tunnel.
an additional 40 minutes or until all combustion
has ceased. 2. Fragments. Burning fragments shall be free to fall to
8. Observations. Note physical changes of the deck the floor of the room.
boards during the test, including structural failure of 12-7A-4.8.3 Conduct of tests.
any deck board, location of flaming and glowing igni-
1. Number of tests. Conduct the test on three replicate
tion, and loss of material (i.e., flaming drops of parti-
assemblies.
cles falling from the deck). It is desirable to capture the
entire test with a video recorder to allow review of the 2. Moisture content. Measure the moisture content of the
details of performance. wooden members of the assembly using a moisture
12-7A-4.7.4 Report. The report shall include a description of meter (ASTM D 4444).
the deck board material and the time of any degradation 3. Procedure. Adhere to ASTM E 108 “Standard Test
(effective net peak heat release rate, structural failure, flam- Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings” (burning
ing drops or particles falling from the deck) during the test. brand test, “A” brand), with apparatus modified as
1. Calculated rate of heat release. The effective net peak described above in “Test system preparation” and the
heat release rate (HRR) shall be calculated as follows: following procedure:
1.1. During the first 5 minutes of the test (the 3 minutes 3.1. The air velocity shall be calibrated using the 60-inch
during which the ignition source burner is operat- (1.5 m) framework spacing, with a smooth noncom-
ing and the immediately following 2 minutes) the bustible calibration deck at a 5-inch per 12-inch hor-
effective net peak HRR of the test assembly shall izontal incline positioned 60 inches (1.5 m) from the
be reported as: effective net peak HRR = (peak front opening of the wind tunnel. All other measure-
heat release rate – 80 kW) / (deck surface area). ment details shall be followed as specified in Sec-
tions 4.4.2, 4.4.3, and 4.4.4 of ASTM E 108.
1.2. During the remaining test duration the effective net Although ASTM E 108 specifies calibration to be
peak heat release rate of the test assembly shall be conducted with the 33-inch (840-mm) framework
reported as: effective net peak HRR = (peak heat spacing used for the intermittent flame test set up,
release rate) / (deck surface area). tests have shown that at the nominal 12 mph setting,
12-7A-4.7.5 Conditions of Acceptance. Should one of the there was not difference in measured velocity
three replicates fail to meet the Conditions of Acceptance, between the 33- and 60-inch framework spacing.

44 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION METHODS FOR EXTERIOR WILDFIRE EXPOSURE

3.2. Mount the test specimen at a zero horizontal Heat Release Rate is not monitored because of the
incline positioned 60 inches (1.5 m) from the front impracticability with the specified airflow.
opening of the wind tunnel. 4. Observations. Note physical changes of the deck
3.3. Ignite the “A” brands as specified in Section 9.4 of boards during the test, including deformation from the
ASTM E 108 as reprinted here: horizontal plane, location of flaming and glowing com-
bustion, and loss of material (i.e., flaming drops of par-
1. Each 12- x 12-inch (300 x 300 mm) face for ticles falling from the deck). It is desirable to capture
30 seconds. the entire test with a video recorder to allow review of
the details of performance.
2. Each 2.25- x 12-inch (57 x 300 mm) edge for
45 seconds. 12-7A-4.8.4 Report. The report shall include description of
the deck board material, and the time of any degradation
3. Each 12- x 12-inch (300 x 300 mm) face again (accelerated combustion, board collapse, flaming drops or
for 30 seconds. particles falling from the deck).
3.4. Center the burning brand laterally on the deck with 12-7A-4.8.5 Conditions of Acceptance. Should one of the
the front edge 2.5 inches (64 mm) from the enter- three replicates fail to meet the Conditions of Acceptance,
ing air edge of the deck. three additional tests may be run. All of the additional tests
must meet the Conditions of Acceptance:
3.5. Continue the exposure for a 40-minute period or
until all combustion of the deck boards ceases. The 1. Absence of sustained flaming or glowing combustion
test shall be terminated immediately if flaming com- of any kind at the conclusion of the 40-minute observa-
bustion accelerates uncontrollably (runaway com- tion period.
bustion) or structural failure of any deck board 2. Absence of falling particles that are still burning when
occurs. reaching the burner or floor.

FIGURE 1. DECK TEST ASSEMBLY (UNDER DECK-FLAME)

FIGURE 2. DECK TEST ASSEMBLY (BURNING-BRAND)

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 45

MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION METHODS FOR EXTERIOR WILDFIRE EXPOSURE

DECKING ALTERNATE METHOD A

SFM STANDARD 12-7A-4A

12-7A-4A.1 Application. The minimum design, construction Changing the board width could change the num-
and performance standards set forth herein for unloaded ber of deck boards.
decks are those deemed necessary to establish conformance 12-7A-4A.6 Materials.
to the provisions of these regulations. Materials and assem-
blies that meet the performance criteria of this standard are 1. Cross-sectional dimension. All deck board materials
acceptable for use as defined in the California Building Stan- are to have cross-sectional dimensions equivalent to
dards Code. use in service.
12-7A-4A.2 Scope. This standard evaluates the performance 2. Description. The material under test should be
of decks (or other horizontal ancillary structures in close described as completely as possible (unit weight, thick-
proximity to primary structures) when exposed to direct ness, width, and general information regarding compo-
flames and brands. The under-deck flame exposure test is sition).
intended to determine the heat release rate (HRR) and degra- 3. Condition of test material. Prior to testing, all materi-
dation modes of deck or other horizontal boards when als (deck boards and joist material) shall be conditioned
exposed to a burner flame simulating combustibles beneath a to a constant weight or for a minimum of 30 days at 73
deck. The burning brand exposure test is intended to deter- ± 4ºF (23 ± 2ºC) and 50 ± 5 percent relative humidity,
mine the degradation modes of deck or other horizontal whichever occurs first. Constant weight shall be
boards when exposed to a burning brand on the upper surface. defined as occurring when the change in test material
weight is less than or equal to 2 percent in a 24-hour
12-7A-4A.3 Referenced document.
period.
1. ASTM E 108. Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Note: The moisture content of joists shall be
Roof Coverings. between 8- and 10-percent moisture content.
2. California Building Code, Chapter 7A. 12-7A-4A.7 Under-deck flame test.
12-7A-4A.4 Definitions. 12-7A-4A.7.1 Equipment.
1. Deck boards. Horizontal members that constitute the 1. Burner. A 12- x 12-inch (300 x 300 mm) diffusion
exposed surface of the ancillary structure. burner shall be used. Natural gas, methane or propane
2. Heat release rate. The net rate of energy release as shall be supplied to the burner through a metered con-
measured by oxygen depletion calorimetry. trol system. The gas supply to the burner shall produce
a net heat output of 80 ± 4 kW throughout the flame
12-7A-4A.5 Test assembly. exposure. Burner output can be determined from HRR
1. Size. The overall size of the test deck shall be nomi- or calculated from the gas flow rate, temperature, and
nally 24 x 24 inches (610 x 610 mm) unless width vari- pressure.
ation of deck boards requires an increase in overall 2. Oxygen depletion calorimeter. The equipment shall
deck width (i.e., the direction of joists) in order to meet include a hood, associated ducting, and instrumentation
the overall dimensions. The length of individual deck to provide HRR data by oxygen depletion calorimetry.
boards shall be 24 inches (610 mm).
12-7A-4A.7.2 Test system preparation. See 12-7A-4 Figure
2. Joists. The deck is supported by two nominal 2 x 6 No. 1.
Douglas-fir joists running perpendicular to the deck
1. Deck support assembly. Assembly that holds the test
boards, and constructed with a 16-inch (406 mm) cen-
deck over the burner.
ter-to-center spacing. A comparable species that may
be more commonly used for structural framing of decks 2. Baffle panels and joist support. Horizontal metal
in a given region can be substituted for Douglas-fir. plates to support the deck joists along their full length,
and also to confine burner flames to the underside of
3. Deck board spacing and fastening. Edge-to-edge the deck boards located between the support joists.
spacing and method of attachment shall conform to the
manufacturer’s installation recommendations. The 3. Back wall. Ceramic fiber board or another noncombus-
front deck board shall be flush with the ends of the tible panel product for the back wall material. Total
joists, and the rear deck board shall overhang the end of height of the back wall is 8 feet (2.4 m).
the joists by 1 inch (25 mm). 4. Ledger board. A 4-foot-long (1.2 m) simulated 2 x 6
3.1. In the absence of recommended installation guid- ledger board shall be constructed of layers of ceramic
ance, the edge-to-edge spacing shall be 3/16 inch (5 fiber board (or other noncombustible panel product)
mm) with boards mechanically attached to the and attached to the wall at a height slightly below the
joists using deck screws. overhang of the rear deck board of the test deck.
3.2. If nominal 6-inch-wide deck boards are used, a
total of five boards shall be used for each deck.

46 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION METHODS FOR EXTERIOR WILDFIRE EXPOSURE

12-7A-4A.7.3 Conduct of tests.

1. Airflow. The test is conducted under conditions of
ambient airflow.
2. Number of tests. Conduct the test on three replicate
assemblies.
3. Burner output verification. Without a deck in the
apparatus, set the output of the burner to 80 ± 4 kW.
Conduct a verification run of 3 minutes to ensure the
heat release rate, and then turn off the burner.
4. Measurement of heat release rate. HRR is measured
during the tests with a properly calibrated oxygen
depletion calorimeter. Since HRR is typically a post-
test analysis, this criterion for Acceptance may be
determined at the end of the test.
5. Burner positioning. Center the burner directly under
the middle deck board, midway between the joists. The
distance from the top of the burner to the bottom of the
deck boards shall be 27 inches (690 mm).
6. Moisture content. Measure the moisture content of the
wooden members of the assembly using a moisture
meter (ASTM D 4444).
7. Procedure.
7.1. Ignition. Ignite the burner, controlling for a con-
stant 80 ± 4 kW output.
7.2. Flame exposure. Continue the exposure for a 3-
minute period. Extinguish the burner.
7.3. Continued combustion. Continue observation for
an additional 40 minutes or until all combustion
has ceased. The test shall be terminated immedi-
ately if flaming combustion accelerates uncontrol-
lably (runaway combustion) or structural failure of
any deck board occurs.
8. Observations. Note physical changes of the deck
boards during the test, including structural failure of
any deck board, location of flaming and glowing igni-
tion, and loss of material (i.e., flaming drops of parti-
cles falling from the deck). It is desirable to capture the
entire test with a video recorder to allow review of the
details of performance.
12-7A-4A.7.4 Report. The report shall include a description
of the deck board material and the time of any degradation
(effective net peak heat release rate) during the test.
12-7A-4A.7.5 Conditions of acceptance. Should one of the
three replicates fail to meet the Condition of Acceptance,
three additional tests may be run. All of the additional tests
must meet the Condition of Acceptance with an effective
peak heat release rate of less than or equal to 25 kW/ft2 (269
kW/m2).

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 47

MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION METHODS FOR EXTERIOR WILDFIRE EXPOSURE

IGNITION-RESISTANT MATERIAL
SFM STANDARD 12-7A-5

12-7A-5.1 Application. The minimum design, construction 12-7A-5.10 Report. The report shall include a description of
and performance standards set forth herein for ignition-resis- the tested material, whether weathering was conducted, and
tant materials are those deemed necessary to establish confor- the time and description of any degradation including but not
mance to the provisions of these regulations. Materials and limited to: structural failure, flaming drops or particles falling
assemblies that meet the performance criteria of this standard from the material during the test.
are acceptable for use as defined in the California Building 12-7A-5.11 Conditions of Acceptance:
Standards Code.
1. Flame spread. Materials shall exhibit a flame spread
12-7A-5.2 Scope. This standard determines the performance index not exceeding 25 and shall show no evidence of
of ignition-resistant materials when exposed to embers and progressive combustion following the 30-minute test
small flames. period.
12-7A-5.3 Referenced documents. 2. Flame front. Materials shall exhibit a flame front that
1. ASTM E 84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burn- does not progress more than 101/2 feet (3200 mm)
ing Characteristics of Building Materials. beyond the centerline of the burner at any time during
the 30-minute test period.
2. UL 723, Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
3. California Building Code, Chapter 7A.
12-7A-5.4 Definitions.
Ignition-resistant material A type of building material that
resists ignition or sustained flaming combustion sufficiently
so as to reduce losses from wildland-urban interface confla-
grations under worst-case weather and fuel conditions with
wildfire exposure of burning embers and small flames, as pre-
scribed in California Building Standards Code Section 703A.
12-7A-5.5 Equipment. Equipment is to be in accordance
with the tests specified in Section 12-7A-5.9 Conduct of
Tests.
12-7A-5.6 Materials. Materials used are to be in accordance
with the tests specified in Section 12-7A-5.9 Conduct of
Tests.
12-7A-5.7 Test specimen preparation. The test specimen is
to be prepared in accordance with the tests specified in Sec-
tion 12-7A-5.9 Conduct of Tests.
12-7A-5.8 Weathering. Weathering of materials shall be in
accordance with California Building Code Section 703A
Standards of Quality.
12-7A-5.9 Conduct of tests.When weathering is required by
California Building Code Section 703A Standards of Quality,
the materials to be tested shall be weathered in accordance
with Section 12-7A-5.8 prior to testing in accordance with
this Section. All materials shall be tested in accordance with
the test procedures set forth in ASTM E 84 or UL 723 except
that the test shall be continued for an additional 20 minutes
for a total test period of 30 minutes.

48 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 CHAPTER 12-8-1

FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS FOR FIRE PROTECTION

STANDARD 12-8-100

ROOM FIRE TEST FOR WALL AND CEILING MATERIALS

(See Chapter 35, California Building Code.)

STATE FIRE MARSHAL FIRE AND SMOKE MEASUREMENTS

Authority: Sections 13143, 13146.1, Health and Safety Code AND PHOTOGRAPHIC RECORD
Reference: Sections 13108, 13143, 13146.1, Health and Safety Code Sec. 12-8-102.
(a) Significance. This fire test is applicable to a descrip-
SCOPE tion of certain fire performance characteristics in appraising
wall, ceiling and flooring materials, products, or systems
Sec. 12-8-101.
under specified fire exposure conditions in an enclosure. The
(a) Basic. This standard is intended to evaluate, under a test indicates the maximum extent of fire growth in an enclo-
specified fire exposure condition, the contribution to room sure, the rate of heat release, and if they occur, the time to
fire growth provided by wall ceiling and/or floor materials or flashover and the time to flame extension beyond the door-
assemblies. This standard is not intended to evaluate the fire way following flashover. Time to flashover is either the time
endurance or flamespread of material or assemblies. when the radiant flux onto the floor reaches 20 kW/m2 or the
Note: See State Fire Marshal (SFM) 7-1 and Uniform average temperature of the upper air reaches 1100°F. A crum-
Building Code (UBC) Standard 8-1. pled up single sheet of newspaper may be placed on the floor
3 feet out from the center of the front wall.
This standard can be used to evaluate the effectiveness of
thermal barriers in restricting the contribution of combustible The spontaneous ignition of this newspaper will provide a
materials in the wall and floor assemblies to fire growth in a visual indication of flashover. It determines both the extent to
padded safety cell. This standard shall be used in conjunction which the wall and ceiling materials or assemblies may con-
with ASTM E 603-77, “Standard Guide for Room Fire tribute to fire growth in a compartment and the potential for
Experiments,” which covers instrumentation, safety precau- fire spread beyond the compartment under the particular con-
tions and the general effect of various parameters. ditions simulated. It does not measure the contribution of the
furnishing materials.
(b) Tests and listings by approved testing agency. Test
data for wall and/or ceiling materials or assemblies investi- (b) Fire measurements. The potential for the spread of
gated and tested in accordance with the Standard for Safety fire to other objects in the enclosure interior, remote from the
established by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., UL 723C, ignition source, is evaluated by measurements of:
“Investigation for the Classification of Wall and Ceiling Inte- 1. The total heat flux incident at the center of the floor.
rior Finish Materials and Assemblies Using a Room Fire
2. A characteristic upper level gas temperature in the test
Test,” will be acceptable for evaluation against this standard,
compartment.
provided all instrumentation data required by this standard is
incorporated in the test and report. (c) Fire spread potential. The potential for the spread of
fire to objects outside the compartment of origin is evaluated
(c) Test simulation. The test simulates a fire in the comer by the measurement of the total rate of heat release of the fire.
of an 8-foot by 12-foot compartment containing a single open
doorway; this can be used to evaluate the relative perfor- (d) Smoke measurements. Measurements of the rate of
mance of specific wall, ceiling and floor materials or assem- production of carbon monoxide and visible smoke are taken.
blies when they are used together in the same relationship (e) Photographic record. The overall performance of the
within an enclosure, in addition to simulating the manner in test specimen is to be visually documented by full color pho-
which they will be used. tographic records. Videotaping of the complete fire test may
(d) Materials considered. The test may be used for evalu- be done as an alternate to the continuous photographic record.
ating wall, ceiling and flooring finish materials and assem- Such records may show when each area of the test specimen
blies, including panels, tiles, boards, sprayed or brushed becomes involved in the fire.
coatings, etc. (f) Photographic Specification. Photographic equipment
shall be used to continuously record the fire spread in the

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 49

FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS FOR FIRE PROTECTION

room and the fire projection from the door of the room. The 11. The total rate of heat production shall be calculated
location of the camera must avoid interference with the air from the measured oxygen and carbon dioxide and/or
inflow. carbon monoxide concentrations, and the temperature
Note: A window, cut 2-0 above the floor wall facing the and volumetric flow rate of the gas in the duct.
gas burner, fitted with heat-resistant, impact-resistant glaz- 12. The product of the volumetric flow rate of the gas in the
ing provides useful photographic access. Flood lights duct and the carbon monoxide concentration at the speci-
should not raise the ambient temperature in the room fied location in the combustion hood system shall be
above that specified in Section 12-8-110. The interior wall reported as a function of time after the start of the test.
surfaces of the test room, adjacent to the corner in which
13. The product of the volumetric flow rate of the gas in the
the burner is located, shall be clearly marked with a 12-
duct at the duct gas temperature and the optical density
inch grid. A clock shall appear in all photographic records,
per foot at the specified smoke meter location in the
giving the time to the nearest second (or 0.01 minute) from
duct shall be reported as a function of time after the
the start of the test. This clock shall be accurately synchro-
start of the test.
nized with all other measurements, or other provisions
shall be made to correlate the photographic record with Note: If this product is multiplied by 1.55 × 10-3, for
time. Color slides shall also be taken at 15-second inter- English units, it gives the smoke units produced per
vals for the first three minutes of the test and at a mini- second, where a smoke unit is defined as the quantity
mum of 30-second intervals thereafter for the duration of of smoke which, when distributed uniformly over a
the test. cubic meter, would have an optical density of unity
over a path length of 1 meter. (This is the definition
used in the Proposed ASTM Test for Heat and Visible
REPORT Smoke Release Rates for Materials and Products.)
Sec. 12-8-103. The report shall include the following items: 14. A transcription of the visual, photographic, audio and
1. Material description. The name, thickness, density written records of the fire test shall be provided. The
and size of the material shall be listed, along with other records shall indicate the time of ignition of the wall and
identifying characteristics or labels. ceiling finishes, the approximate location of the flame
front most distant from the ignition source, at intervals
2. Materials mounting and conditioning. not exceeding 15 seconds during the fire test, the time of
3. Layout of specimens and attachments in test room. flashover, and the time at which flames extend outside
4. Relative humidity and temperature of the room and the the doorway. In addition, still photographs taken at inter-
test building prior to and during the test. vals not exceeding 15 seconds for the first three minutes,
beginning at the start of the test and at every 30 seconds
5. The fuel gas flow to the ignition burner and its calcu- for the remainder of the test shall be supplied. Photo-
lated rate of gross heat output. graphs showing the extent of the damage of the materials
6. The total incident heat flux at the center of the floor after the test shall also be supplied. The camera settings,
shall be reported for each heat flux gage as a function film speed, and lighting used shall be described.
of time starting one minute prior to the test. 15. A report on the pretest calibration conducted in Section
7. The temperature of gases in the room, the doorway, and 12-8-113.
in the exhaust duct shall be reported for each thermo- 16. Report on the barometric pressure at time of test.
couple as a function of time starting one minute prior to
the test. The temperature recorded by the thermocouple 17. A complete discussion of the criteria. This shall include
in the duct will be used in the required calculation. all calculations and references to other data used to sat-
isfy the criteria presented in Section 12-8-115.
8. The volumetric flow rate of the gas in the duct shall be
calculated from Equation 12 in Appendix 12-8-1A and
reported as a function of time starting one minute prior TEST SAMPLES
to the test.
Sec. 12-8-104. Samples of the test material, both in its origi-
9. The oxygen concentration in the analyzer shall be nal (untested) and post-tested conditions, shall be retained by
reported as a function of time starting one minute prior the testing agency. All samples shall be retained by the test-
to the test. ing agency for a minimum period of three years from the date
10. The carbon dioxide concentration, if measured in the of the test. All samples shall measure 4 inches by 4 inches by
analyzer, shall be reported as a function of time starting the sample thickness. Two samples of the material in its orig-
one minute prior to the test. inal pretest condition shall be retained. These samples shall
Note: Separate reporting of the volumetric flow rate, be taken from the same material lot used for the test samples.
temperature, oxygen and carbon dioxide and/or car- Post-test samples from the test shall include one each, from
bon monoxide concentrations provide diagnostic the geometric center of each wall panel and the ceiling panel,
information on the performance of the exhaust gas and one each from the following locations:
collection system and provide a check on the heat 1. The top, mid-height and bottom of each wall along the
production calculations. vertical centerline of each wall panel.

50 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS FOR FIRE PROTECTION

2. The quarter points of the ceiling, in those cases in COMPARTMENT DIMENSIONS

which the test material was applied to the ceiling. AND CONSTRUCTION
All samples shall be clearly identified as to the material, Sec. 12-8-107.
test date and their location within the room. (a) Compartment geometry and construction. The inte-
rior dimensions of the floor of the fire room when the speci-
mens are in place, shall measure 8 feet ± 1 inch × 12 feet ± 1
SUMMARY OF METHOD AND HEAT SOURCE inch. The finished ceiling shall be 8 feet ± 0.5 inch above the
Sec. 12-8-105. floor. There shall be four walls at right angles defining the
compartment.
(a) Summary of method. The test involves an ignition
source exposure of the wall, ceiling and/or floor lining mate- Note: The experimental choices for the sizes of compart-
rials or assemblies as they would be incorporated in actual ment fire experiments are discussed in Section 5 of ASTM
safety cell installation. E 603. The compartment size defined in this section has
been chosen to make it convenient to utilize standard sized
(b) Heat source. This method uses a gas burner to produce 4-foot by 8-foot building materials or panels.
a diffusion flame in contact with the walls and ceiling in the (b) Doorway. There shall be a 30-inch ± 0.25-inch × 80-
corner of an 8-foot by 12-foot by 8-foot-high compartment. inch ± 0.25-inch doorway in the center of one of the 8-foot by
The burner produces a prescribed gross rate of heat output as 8-foot walls, and no other wall or ceiling openings that will
given in Table 12-8-1A and Figure 12-8-1. allow ventilation.
The contribution of the wall, ceiling and flooring materials (c) Wall construction. The wall containing the door shall
or assemblies to fire growth is measured in terms of the time be of calcium silicate board of 46 pcf density and 0.5 inch
history of the incident heat flux at the center of the floor, the nominal thickness. As an alternative to the calcium silicate
time history of the temperature of the gases in the upper part board, 0.5-inch thick gypsum wallboard may be used. The
of the compartment, the time to flashover and the rate of heat door frame shall be constructed to remain unchanged during
release. The test is conducted with natural ventilation to the the test period to a tolerance of ± 1 percent in height and
test compartment provided through a single doorway 30 width.
inches by 80 inches in width and height. The combustion
products are collected in a hood feeding into a plenum con- (d) Compartment construction. The test compartment
nected to an exhaust duct in which measurements are made of may be a framed structure or a concrete block structure. If
the gas velocity, temperature and concentrations. self-supporting panels are tested, a separate exterior frame or
block compartment may not be required.
(e) Floor materials. The floor of the test compartment
IGNITION SOURCE AND LOCATION shall be noncombustible as defined by ASTM E 136.
Sec. 12-8-106.
(a) Ignition source. The ignition source for the test shall SPECIMEN MOUNTING AND TEST MATERIAL SIZE
be a gas burner with a nominal 12 inches by 12 inches porous Sec. 12-8-108.
top surface of a refractory material.
(a) Specimen mounting. The specimens (e.g., the ceiling
Note: A burner may be constructed with a 1-inch porous and wall materials whose condition is being tested) shall be
ceramic-fiber board over a 6-inch plenum; or alternatively mounted on a framing or support system comparable to that
a minimum 4-inch layer of Ottowa sand can be used to intended for their field use, using backing materials, insula-
provide the horizontal surface through which the gas is tion, or air gaps, as appropriate to the intended application
supplied. The sand burner may be preferable for dripping and representing a typical value of thermal resistance for the
materials. This type of burner is shown in Figure 12-8-7. wall system.
(b) Burner location. The top surface of the burner (b) Test material size. In the test, the ceiling material
through which the gas is supplied shall be located horizon- shall cover the entire ceiling if such an end use application is
tally, 12 inches off the floor, and the burner enclosure shall be anticipated and the wall material shall cover three of the side
in contact with both walls in a corner of the room opposite walls, but not the wall containing the door. The wall and ceil-
from the door. The edge of the diffusion surface shall be ing materials shall be mounted in the same wall-ceiling rela-
within 1 inch of the wall. tionship in which they are intended for use, and it therefore
may be necessary to actually construct a section of a proto-
(c) Gas supply. The gas supply to the burner shall be pro- type padded safety cell.
pane and shall produce a heat source as outlined in Section
12-8-105 (b). The flow rate shall be metered throughout the
test. The burner shall be so designed that it can be set at the FIRE COMPARTMENT ENVIRONMENT
flow rates required to produce the gross rates of heat release
Sec. 12-8-109. The test building in which the fire compart-
as specified in Section 12-8-105 (b).
ment is located shall have vents for the discharge of combus-
(d) Ignition. The burner may be ignited by a pilot burner tion products and have provisions for fresh air intake, so that
or a remote controlled spark igniter. no oxygen deficient air shall be introduced into the fire com-

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 51

FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS FOR FIRE PROTECTION

partment during the test. Prior to initiation of the test the angle, and shall be maintained at a constant tem-
ambient air at the mid-height entrance to the compartment perature, within ± 1.8°F above the dew point by
shall have a velocity in any direction of less than 100 feet per water supplied at a temperature of 120°F to
minute. The building shall be of adequate size so that there 150°F. This will normally require a flow rate of
shall be no smoke accumulation in the building below the at least 0.1 gpm. The full-scale output range shall
level of the top of the fire compartment. be 5 Btu/ft.2/sec. for the floor gage and 10 Btu/
ft.2/sec. for the wall gage.
Note: A suitable Gardon-type heat flux gage,
AMBIENT CONDITIONS IN TEST
manufactured by the Medtherm Corporation
BUILDING AND FIRE COMPARTMENT
in Huntsville, Alabama, is listed under model
Sec. 12-8-110. 64-5-18 for the 5 Btu/ft.2/sec. range and under
(a) Ambient conditions in test building. The ambient model 64-10-18 for the 10 Btu/ft.2/sec. range.
temperature in the test building at any location outside the See R. Gardon, “An Instrument for the Direct
fire compartment shall be above 40°F, and the relative Measurement of Intense Thermal Radiation,”
humidity shall be less than 75 percent for the duration of the Review of Scientific Instruments, Vol. 24, No.
test. 5, May 1953, pp. 36-70, for further informa-
tion.
(b) Ambient conditions in fire compartment. The ambi-
ent temperature in the fire compartment measured by one of 2. Gas temperature thermocouples.
the thermocouples specified in Section 12-8-112, Item 2., D., A. Specification. Twenty-mil-diameter bare chromel-
shall be within the range of 65°F to 75°F for at least 16 hours alumel thermocouple wire within 0.5 inch of the
prior to the test. bead should be run along expected isotherms to
(c) Humidity. The ambient relative humidity in the fire minimize conduction errors. The insulation
compartment for 16 hours prior to the test shall be within the between the chromel and alumel wires must be sta-
range of 50 ± 5 percent. This may require the use of a humid- ble to at least 2000°F or the wires must be sepa-
ifier or dehumidifier. rated.
Note: Metal clad ceramic powder will work
satisfactorily. The commonly used silicone-
SPECIMEN CONDITIONING impregnated glass insulation will break down
Sec. 12-8-111. The specimens shall be conditioned prior to above 1500°F.
mounting at a temperature of 70°F ± 5°F, and at a relative
humidity of 50 ± 5 percent until they reach a rate of weight B. Location for doorway. A thermocouple shall be
change of less than 0.1 percent per day. located in the interior plane of the door opening
on the door centerline, 1 inch down from the top.
Note: See Figure 12-8-3.
INSTRUMENTATION
C. Locations for room. Thermocouples shall be
Sec. 12-8-112. The following are the minimum requirements located 4 inches down from the center of the ceil-
for instrumentation for this test: ing and from the center of each of the four ceiling
Note: Added instrumentation may be desirable for further quadrants, and one shall be directly over the cen-
information. ter of the ignition burner, 4 inches below the ceil-
1. Total heat flux gages. ing. The thermocouples shall be mounted on
supports, with their junctions at least 4 inches
A. Location. Two gages shall be mounted within 5 away from a solid surface. There shall be no
inches of each other and within a distance of 2 attachments to the test specimens.
inches above the floor surface upward in the geo-
metric center of the floor. Note: See Figure 12-8-3.
Note: See Figure 12-8-2. D. Location in canopy hood and duct systems.
One pair of thermocouples shall be placed 11 feet
One additional gage shall be mounted in the downstream to the entrance to the horizontal
wall adjacent to the ignition burner during cali- duct. The pair of thermocouples shall straddle the
bration tests only. center of the duct and be separated by 2 inches
Note: See Section 12-8-113, Item 2. from each other.
It shall be 6 feet above the floor, and 6 inches Note: See Figure 12-8-4.
from the corner where the burner is located, 3. Canopy hood and exhaust duct location and
along the wall opposite the doorway. The front design. A hood shall be installed immediately adja-
surface of the calibration gage shall be flush with cent to the door of the fire room. The bottom of the
the wall surface, within 0.04 inch. hood shall be level with the top surface of the room.
B. Specification. The gages shall be of the Gardon The face dimensions of the hood shall be minimum
type, with a flat black surface and a 180° view 8 feet by 8 feet and the depth shall be 3.5 feet. The

52 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS FOR FIRE PROTECTION

hood shall feed into a plenum having a 3-foot by 3- final value in 30 seconds after introducing a step
foot cross section. change in composition of the gas stream flowing
Note: See Figure 12-8-4. past the inlet to the sampling tube.
The plenum shall have a minimum height of 3 feet. 6. Duct carbon dioxide concentration specification.
The height can be increased up to a maximum of 6 The gas sampling tube defined in Section 12-8-112,
feet to satisfy building constraints. The exhaust duct Item 5, or an alternate tube in the same location,
connected to the plenum shall be16 inches in diame- shall provide a continuous sample for the measure-
ter, horizontal, and shall have a circular aperture of ment of the carbon dioxide concentration with an
12 inches at its entrance. analyzer which has a range of 0 to 20 percent and a
maximum error of 2 percent of full-scale. The total
The hood shall have sufficient draft to collect all system response time between the sampling inlet
the combustion products leaving the room. This and the meter shall be no greater than 30 seconds.
draft should be capable of moving up to 5,000 stan-
7. Duct carbon monoxide concentration specifica-
dard cubic feet per minute (scfm) during the test.
tion. The gas sampling tube defined in Section 12-8-
Provisions shall be made to vary the draft so that it
112, Item 5, or an alternate tube in the same loca-
can operate at either 1,000 or 5,000 scfm. Mixing
tion, shall provide a continuous sample for the mea-
vanes may also be required in the duct if concentra-
surement of the carbon monoxide concentration
tion gradients are found to exist.
with an analyzer which has a range of 0 to 10 per-
An alternate exhaust system design may be used if cent and a maximum error of 2 percent of full-scale.
it has been shown to produce equivalent results.
8. Optical density of smoke in duct specification
Equivalency may be shown by meeting the require-
(supplementary measurement). A meter shall be
ments of Section 12-8-113, Item 5.
installed to measure the optical density of the
4. Duct gas velocity specification. A bidirectional exhaust gases in a vertical path across the width of a
probe or equivalent measuring system shall be used horizontal duct, 1 foot downstream of the duct
to measure gas velocity in the duct. velocity probe. A horizontal path should be used
Note: See B. J. McCaffrey and G. Heskjestad, with a vertical duct.
Combustion and Flame, 26, 125-127 (1976). A suitable design for the meter is as follows:
The probe shown in Figure 12-8-6 consists of a Use as a light source a number 1810 lamp which
short stainless steel cylinder 1.75-inch long and is rated at 6.3 volts, 0.40 amps, and 1.5 candela and
0.975-inch inside diameter with a solid diaphragm in is operated at 5 volts d.c. The lamp is mounted at the
the center. The pressure taps on either side of the focal point of a + 20 diopter and 50 mm diameter
diaphragm support the probe. The axis of the probe double convex collimating lens. At the other side of
shall be along the centerline of the duct 11 feet the duct the collimated beam is intercepted by a + 10
downstream from the entrance. The taps shall be diopter 50 mm diameter plane convex lens and con-
connected to a pressure transducer which shall be centrated onto the cathode of a 1P39 phototube. A
able to resolve pressure differences of 0.0001-inch Corning CS3-132 type 3304 filter (available from
of water. the Swift Glass Company, Box 890, Elmira Heights,
NY 14903) is used in front of the phototube to cor-
Notes:
rect its spectral response to the standard photoptic
1. Capacitance-type transducers have been curve of the human eye.
found to be the most stable for this applica- The lens, filter and phototube are mounted inside
tion. of a light-tight housing which is blackened inside to
2. The bidirectional probe is specified rather minimize internal reflections. The phototube is con-
than the pilot-static tube in order to avoid nected to a linear operational power amplifier with
problems of clogging with soot. an adjustable gain of 106 which in turn is connected
5. Duct oxygen concentration specification. A stain- to a commercially available log ratio amplifier to
less steel gas sampling tube shall be located 13 feet produce an output voltage proportional to the optical
downstream from the entrance to the duct, to obtain density. A smoke meter meeting the above require-
a continuously flowing sample for determining the ments is described in a report by R. W. Bukowski,
oxygen concentration of the exhaust gas as a func- “Smoke Measurements in Large- and Small-scale
tion of time. A suitable filter and cold trap shall be Fire Testing,” NBSIR 78-1502, October 1978.
placed in the line to remove particulates and water. Alternate systems can be used, but the color tem-
The oxygen analyzer shall be of the paramagnetic or perature of the light source must match that of the
polarographic type and shall be capable of measur- 1810 lamp under the specified operating conditions,
ing the reduction in oxygen concentration over the and the light receiver, including the photo detector,
range of 0.21 down to 0.15 with an accuracy of ± 2 must match the standard photoptic curve of the eye.
percent in this concentration range. The signal from The optical density shall be continuously
the oxygen analyzer must be within 5 percent of its recorded over the duration of the test. After comple-

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 53

FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS FOR FIRE PROTECTION

tion of the test, the optical density reading must be flame attachment to the wall, flames out of the door-
less than 0.02 (transmission higher than 95 percent). way, flashover, etc.
6. The ignition burner shall be shut off at 15 minutes after
initiation of the test and the test terminated at that time
CALIBRATION AND DOCUMENTATION OF unless safety considerations dictate an earlier termina-
IGNITION SOURCE AND TEST EQUIPMENT tion.
Sec. 12-8-113. A calibration test shall be performed prior to
7. Photograph and verbally describe the damage after the
and within 30 days of any fire test. The calibration test, to last
test.
for15 minutes, shall use the standard ignition source with
inert wall and ceiling materials (calcium silicate board of 46
pcf density and 0.5-inch thickness. The following quantities FLASHOVER AND SMOKE
shall be reported:
Sec. 12-8-115.
1. Once the burner is activated, the output of all instru-
ments normally used in the test is to be measured and (a) Flashover. The criterion for acceptable performance
data recorded as a function of time. shall be that the compartment never reaches flashover at any
time during the 15-minute period of ignition source burner
2. The time history of the total heat flux at the wall loca- operation. Flashover shall be considered to have occurred if
tion. one or more of the following conditions occur during the test:
3. The maximum extension of the burner flame as 1. The average ceiling gas temperature, as determined by
recorded by still color photographs of 0.1 second expo- averaging the temperature at the center and quarter
sure time taken at a minimum of 30-second intervals, or point thermocouples, reaches or exceeds 1112°F.
more often if it is changing rapidly. These shall be
taken with a camera operating in the “operative mode” 2. The total heat flux at the floor, as determined by either
with the camera set to the standard ASA ratings of the of the total heat flux meters mounted in the geometric
film. center of the floor, reaches or exceeds a value of 1.761
Btu/ft.2/sec.
4. The temperature and velocity profiles across the duct
cross-section at the location of the bidirectional probe if 3. Visible flaming extends from the doorway of the test
one is used. These profiles shall be used to determine compartment.
the factor “k” in Equation 12, Appendix 12-8-1A. (b) Smoke. Materials meeting the acceptance criteria of
this standard shall have a smoke density rating no greater
5. The total rate of heat production is determined both by
than 75 when tested in the thickness intended for use by UBC
the oxygen consumption calculation and by the metered
Standard 26-5, or when tested in accordance with UBC Stan-
gas input. These must agree within 5 percent.
dard 8-1.
Note: The net heat of combustion is 2,283 Btu/ft3
for propane at 68°F and 14.7 psi. This value should
be used in this calculation. MARKINGS
Sec. 12-8-116. All materials shall be provided with a manu-
facturer’s label or other permanent marking clearly identify-
TEST PROCEDURE ing the manufacturer label or other permanent marking
Sec. 12-8-114. The following paragraphs describe the steps in clearly identifying the manufacturer, the product and model
the test procedure: numbers (or brand name). Materials approved and listed by
1. Establish an initial volumetric flow rate of 1,000 cfm the State Fire Marshal shall be marked as required by Section
through the duct if a forced ventilation system is used. 1.58, Title 19, C.A.C.
If a forced ventilation system is used, increase the vol- TABLE 12-8-1A
ume flow rate through the duct to 5,000 cfm when the IGNITION SOURCE RATE OF HEAT RELEASE
PROGRAM FOR TESTS OF SAFETY CELL PADDING MATERIALS
oxygen content falls below18 percent.
BURNER GROSS RATE
2. Turn on all sampling and recording devices and estab- ELAPSED TEST TIME (Min)
OF HEAT RELEASE (KW)
lish steady state baseline readings for at least one min- 0 44
ute.
1 88
3. Ignite the gas burner and start the clock simultaneously.
2 132
Increase gas flow rate in steps as indicated in Section
12-8-106 (c). 3 132
4. Take 35 mm color slides at 15-second intervals during 4 88
the first three minutes and at 30-second intervals there- 5-15 44
after to photographically document the growth of the
fire.
5. Provide a continuous voice or written record of the fire,
which will give times of all significant events such as

54 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS FOR FIRE PROTECTION

FIGURE 12-8-1—TIME—MINUTES

FIGURE 12-8-2—LOCATION OF HEAT FLUX METERS

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 55

FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS FOR FIRE PROTECTION

FIGURE 12-8-3—ROOM THERMOCOUPLE LOCATIONS

Note: Two 0.20 mil. Type K thermocouples at each location.

56 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS FOR FIRE PROTECTION

FIGURE 12-8-4—SECTION VIEW OF ROOM TEST APPARATUS

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 57

FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS FOR FIRE PROTECTION

FIGURE 12-8-5—PLAN VIEW OF CANOPY HOOD

FIGURE 12-8-6—BIDIRECTIONAL PROBE

58 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS FOR FIRE PROTECTION

FIGURE 12-8-7—GAS BURNER

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 59

FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS FOR FIRE PROTECTION

FIGURE 12-8-8—BURNER GAS FLOW CONTROL AND MEASUREMENT

60 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 APPENDIX 12-8-1A

CALCULATION OF THE TOTAL RATE OF HEAT AND CARBON

MONOXIDE OR CARBON DIOXIDE PRODUCTION

The total rate of heat production is given by Equation 3 can be solved for M o 2 ,
• 0 0 0
Q = EφX o 2 V A (1) M o2 [ ( X o2 ⁄ X o2 ) – X o2 ]
M o2 = --------------------------------------------------------
- (5)
where: 1 – X o2 – X co2
E = the heat release per volume of oxygen consumed, which, when substituted into Equation 2, yields
467 Btu/ft.3
0
φ = the fraction of the oxygen consumed X o 2 – X o 2 ⁄ ( 1 – X co 2 )
φ = -----------------------------------------------------------
0
- (6)
X0o2 = the ambient molar concentration of oxygen X o2 [ 1 – X o 2 ⁄ ( 1 – X co2 ) ]
VA = the volume flow rate of air into the system corrected The volumetric flow rate in the exhaust duct is given by
to 36°F (including that which enters the room and
that which passes directly into the exhaust duct). VS = (1 – φ) VA + φVA (7)
The oxygen depletion is given by where:

M o2 – M o2
0 VS = referred to standard conditions 68°F.
φ = -----------------------
0
(2) VA = referred to standard conditions 68°F.
M o2
= the expansion factor, due to chemical reaction, of the
where: air that is depleted of its oxygen.
0
M o 2 =the molar flow rate of oxygen into the system. 0 0
= X N2 + bX o2 = 0.79 + 0.21b (8)
M o 2 =the molar flow rate of oxygen in the exhaust duct.
The concentrations of oxygen and carbon dioxide in the where b is the ratio of the moles of combustion products
analyzers are given by formed to the moles of oxygen consumed. The value of
ranges from 1.000 for carbon to 1.175 for cellulose with the
M o2 plastics having values in between. In order to reduce the error
X o 2 = -----------------------------------------
0
- (3) incurred when unknown products are burning is taken to have
M N 2 + M o 2 + M co2 an intermediate value of 1.084 which is exact for propane, the
burner gas.
M co 2
X co 2 = -----------------------------------------
0
- (4) From Equation 7, the volumetric flow rate of air entering
M N2 + M o 2 + M co2 the system is
where: VA = VS / [1 + (– 1)φ] (9)
0
M N2 = the molar flow rate of nitrogen into the system. Setting: = 1.084
M co 2 = the molar flow rate of carbon dioxide in the exhaust E = 467 Btu/ft3
0
duct. X o2 = 0.21
It is assumed that all the water is trapped out and that the Equation 1 becomes
only gases passing through the analyzers are nitrogen, oxygen
and carbon dioxide. 0
•
EφX o 2 V s 98.1φV s
Q = ----------------------- = -------------------------- Btu/min. (10)
Combining Equations 3 and 4 to get 1 + ( – 1 )φ 1 + 0.084φ
X co2 M o 2 if VS is in cfm referred to 68°F.
M co 2 = ------------------
-
X o2 Setting E = 17.4 MJ/m3
and noting that • 3.65φV s
Q = -------------------------- MW (11)
0 1 + 0.084φ
0 M o2
X o2 = -----------------------------
0 0 where:
M N2 + M o2
VS = in m3/sec, and is determined from the flow measure-
ment in the exhaust duct
φ = the oxygen depletion, which is obtained from Equation 6.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 61

 CALCULATION OF THE TOTAL RATE OF HEAT AND CARBON MONOXIDE OR CARBON DIOXIDE PRODUCTION

When the velocity is measured with a bidirectional probe When CO is present in the sampling line, Equation 5
and the Reynolds number correction is taken into account, the becomes
volumetric flow rate in m3/sec. in the duct under standard 0
conditions is given by 0 ( X o2 ⁄ X o2 ) – X o2
M o2 = M o2 -------------------------------------------------
- (17)
1 – X o 2 – X co 2 – X co
VS = 0.926kA [(2ρ/O) (TO/T)] 1/2 = 20.1kA ρ ⁄ T (12)
where: Equation 14 is obtained by combining equations 15, 16
and 17, letting
0.926 = a suitable calibration factor for air velocities in
0
excess of 3 ft./sec. in a 16-inch duct 1 – X o 2 = 0.79 , and letting
k = the ratio of the average duct gas mass flow per unit
area, as determined by measuring the velocity and Vs
V A = -------------------------
-
temperature profiles across the stack, and the velocity 1 – 0.084φ
and temperature at the center line where the
When CO is not measured, but is removed from the sam-
bidirectional probe is located during the test
ple line and CO is measured, φ and Q• are calculated as fol-
A = the cross-sectional area of the duct in m2 at the lows
location of the probe 0
X o 2 – ( X o 2 ⁄ 1 – X co )
ρ = the differential pressure measured with the probe in φ = --------------------------------------------------
- (18)
0
Pa X o 2 ( X o 2 1 – X co )
o = the density of air in kg/m3 at the reference •
temperature TO in K Q = [φ − ((E′′ − E′)/E′)((1 − φ)/2)(XcoXo22)]
T = the duct gas temperature in K E′X o 2 V A ( MW ) (19)
The volumetric flow rate can be expressed in standard where:
cubic feet per minute (scfm) at 60°F using common engineer-
E′′ = 23.4 MJ/m3
ing units by
E′ = 17.4 MJ/m3
VS = 8.38 × 104kA [ρ/(t + 459)]1/2 scfm (13)
VA = m3/sec.
where: •
referred to a 68°F base. Thus, Q becomes
A = given in ft2 and in. of water •
Q = [φ − 0.345((1 − φ)2)/(Xco /Xo22 )]
ρ = given in ft2 and in. of water
0
t = the duct gas temperature in °F. 17.4X o2 V A ( MW ) (20)
The volume flow rate of CO in m3/sec. through the duct When Equations 18 through 20 are used to calculate the
•
can be found from the formula rate of heat release, Q , the carbon dioxide must be removed
from the sample streams flowing through the oxygen and car-
0.79V s X co
V co = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- (14) bon monoxide analyzers. The removal of carbon dioxide can
( 1 + 0.084φ ) ( 1 – X o 2 – X co 2 – X co ) be accomplished by passing the sample stream through a fil-
ter of either ascarite or an aqueous solution of sodium
where:
hydroxide.
XCO = the concentration of carbon monoxide measured in
the analyzer.
This can be derived as follows
0
V co M co M co M o2 M o2 X co M o
-------- = ----------- - = --------
- = -------- -------- = -----------------2 X 0o (15)
VA M AIR M o2 M o2 M A
0 0 2
X o2 M o2
where:
MCO and MA = the molar flow rates of carbon dioxide in the
duct and of the air into the system including
that flowing into the room and that entering the
exhaust duct directly.
The ratio of the CO and O2 concentration in the duct are
the same as in the analyzer so that
M co X co
--------- = -------
- (16)
M o2 X o2

62 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 APPENDIX 12-8-1B

GUIDE TO MOUNTING TECHNIQUES

FOR WALL AND CEILING INTERIOR FINISH MATERIAL

GENERAL wood furring strips and attached to a gypsum wall board sub-
Sec. 12-8-1B.1. strate to approximately the field installation.
(a) Basic. This guide is intended as an aid in determining (c) Metal runners for mounting are to be attached to the
the method of mounting various building materials in the 0.625-inch gypsum wallboard substrate to approximate the
standard fire test room. These mountings are described for field suspension systems application.
test method uniformity and good laboratory practice; they are
not meant to imply restriction in the specific details of field
installation. They are intended to be used for general material BATT OR BLANKET-TYPE INSULATING
testing where the specific details of the field installation AND OTHER FLEXIBLE MATERIALS
either have not been established or are so broad that any sin- Sec. 12-8-1B.3. Batt or blanket and other flexible materials
gle installation method may not be representative of the full which do not have sufficient rigidity or strength to support
range of installation possibilities. themselves are to be supported by round head machine
screws in combination with wing nuts and flat washers, as
(b) Mounting methods. The suggested mounting methods
specified in Section 12-8-1B.1 (d), which are inserted
are grouped according to building materials to be tested
through the material in such a way as to fasten the material to
which are broadly described either by usage or by form of the
a substrate board.
material. For some building materials, none of the methods
described may be applicable. In such cases, other means of
attachment may have to be devised. Wherever possible, these
BUILDING UNITS
specimens shall be mounted using the same method of attach-
ment as that contemplated in the field installation. Sec. 12-8-1B.4. Materials falling within this category include
organic and/or inorganic materials formed or laminated into
(c) All backing materials, when used, shall be supported blocks, boards, planks, slabs or sheets of various sizes, thick-
on a framed support system. A typical supporting framework nesses or shapes. If building units have sufficient structural
is shown in Figure 12-8-1B-1. integrity to support themselves, no additional mounting to a
(d) Whenever calcium silicate board or gypsum wallboard substrate board support is required. If the building units are of
is specified as a backing substrate in subsequent paragraphs, such construction as to require individual components and are
the material shall be 0.5-inch-thick calcium silicate board not self-supporting, the component is to be fastened to the
supplied in 4 feet by 8 feet sheets with a density of 46 lb/ft3, substrate board as specified in Section 12-8-1B.1 (d).
or 0.625-inch-thick gypsum wallboard “Type X” supplied in
4 feet by 8 feet sheets with a density of 42.2 lb/ft3, and they
shall be uncoated. Where metal screws in combination with COATINGS OR SPRAY APPLIED MATERIALS
washers and wing nuts are specified for fastening, they shall Sec. 12-8-1B.5.
be standard 0.25-inch by 20 TPl round head steel machine
screws, 0.25-inch by 20 TPI steel wing nuts and 2 inch O.D. (a) Coating materials, such as cementitious mixtures, mas-
by 0.044-inch-thick flat steel washers with a 0.281-inch I.D. tic coatings, sprayed fibers, etc., are to be mixed and applied
hole. Fastening screws shall be installed as shown in Figure to the substrate board as specified in the manufacturer’s
12-8-1B-2. The fastening pattern is shown in Figure 12-8-1B- instructions at the thickness, coverage rate or density recom-
3 for rigid wall materials and Figure 12-8-1B-4 for flexible mended by the manufacturer.
wall materials. The fastening pattern for all ceiling materials (b) Materials intended for application to a wood surface
is shown in Figure 12-8-1B-5. are to be applied to a substrate made of 1 inch by 4 inches
nominal “C” and better VG Douglas fir flooring (FSC 70 to
90) or to other species for which the surface burning charac-
ACOUSTICAL MATERIALS teristic is to be measured.
AND OTHER BOARD MATERIALS (c) Coating materials intended for application to particular
Sec. 12-8-1B.2. combustible surfaces, but not wood, are to be applied to the
(a) Depending on the type of field mounting required by specific surface for which they are intended. The coating
the acoustical product, either wood furring strips or metal material and combustible material are to be attached to the
runners are to be used to support acoustical material. substrate board as specified in Section 12-8-1B.1 (d).
(b) Wood furring strips for mounting acoustical materials (d) Coating materials intended only for field applications
and other board materials are to be nominal 1-inch by 2-inch to nonflammable surfaces are to be applied to 0.5 in calcium
silicate board.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 63

GUIDE TO MOUNTING TECHNIQUES FOR WALL AND CEILING INTERIOR FINISH MATERIAL

WALL COVERING MATERIAL

Sec. 12-8-1B.6. Wall coverings such as vinyl coatings, wall-
paper, etc., of various types are to be mounted on 0.625-inch
gypsum wallboard or on the actual substrate to which they are
to be applied, using the adhesive and application technique
specified by the manufacturer.

FIGURE 12-8-1B-1—TYPICAL STEEL FRAME SUPPORT SYSTEM

FIGURE 12-8-1B-2—MATERIAL FASTENING TECHNIQUE

64 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 GUIDE TO MOUNTING TECHNIQUES FOR WALL AND CEILING INTERIOR FINISH MATERIAL

FIGURE 12-8-1B-3—TYPICAL MOUNTING

TECHNIQUE FOR RIGID WALL MATERIALS
Note: When required, additional fasteners may be used to hold up the specimen flush to the wall.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 65

GUIDE TO MOUNTING TECHNIQUES FOR WALL AND CEILING INTERIOR FINISH MATERIAL

FIGURE 12-8-1B-4—TYPICAL MOUNTING

TECHNIQUE FOR FLEXIBLE WALL MATERIALS
Note: When required, additional fasteners may be used to hold up the specimen flush to the wall.

66 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 GUIDE TO MOUNTING TECHNIQUES FOR WALL AND CEILING INTERIOR FINISH MATERIAL

FIGURE 12-8-1B-5—TYPICAL MOUNTING TECHNIQUE FOR CEILING MATERIALS

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 67

68 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE
 CHAPTER 12-10-1

EXITS

POWER-OPERATED EXIT DOORS

STANDARD 12-10-1

STATE FIRE MARSHAL block letters on a contrasting background. Signs shall be

SCOPE located on the header framing.
Sec. 12-10-100. (e) Swinging and sliding doors. Each swing-out leaf of
(a) General. These requirements and methods of test swinging or sliding doors with swinging sections shall be
apply to power operated: swinging doors, and combination provided with durable signs in not less than 1-inch block let-
sliding and swinging doors intended for installation in loca- ters on contrasting background wording, “IN EMERGENCY,
tions where conforming exits are required by Title 24, Cali- PUSH TO OPEN,” or other approved wording. The sign shall
fornia Code of Regulations, Part 2, Chapter 10. be located at the closing edge of the door not less than 36
inches or more than 60 inches above the floor. The sign shall
(b) Power-operated doors described in (a) may be pro- read horizontally and be in two lines.
vided with air, hydraulic or electric operators actuated from a
floor, activating carpet, photoelectric device or other Illuminated exit signs when required by other provisions
approved signaling device. of the basic building regulations shall be installed above the
header. Wiring and circuit arrangement shall conform to the
(c) Alternates. A product employing materials or having provisions of the California Electrical Code.
forms of construction differing from those described in this
procedure may be examined and tested in accordance with (f) Electrical wiring and devices. Electrical wiring, elec-
the intent of these testing procedures and, if found to be sub- trical devices, and controls shall be of a type tested and listed
stantially equivalent, may be recognized for listing. in conformance with the standards established by the Califor-
nia Electrical Code, or shall be tested for conformance with
(d) Application. The minimum design, construction and the testing procedures approved by the State Fire Marshal.
testing procedures set forth herein are those deemed as the
minimum necessary to establish conformance to the regula- (g) Testing. Doors with power operators shall be exam-
tions of the State Fire Marshal contained in Title 24, Califor- ined and tested by a testing laboratory approved by the State
nia Code of Regulations. Fire Marshal, or tests shall be conducted by a qualified inde-
pendent fire protection engineer, acceptable to the State Fire
(e) Fire door assemblies. Power-operated doors intended Marshal.
for installation in openings where listed fire door assemblies
are required, shall in addition to the requirements of this stan- (h) Test report. The test report shall contain engineering
dard, be tested in accordance with the Fire Door Assembly data and drawings; size and weight of door tested; wiring dia-
Tests, SFM 12-7-4. grams of electrical control systems; schematic drawings of
mechanical controls; and operating manuals. The report shall
describe the mechanical operation of the power operator in
GENERAL sequence as the door(s) open and close under normal and
emergency conditions. The report shall set forth the tests per-
Sec. 12-10-101. formed in accordance with the provisions of this standard and
(a) Panic hardware. Power-operated doors intended for the results thereof. The report shall additionally contain an
installation in openings where panic hardware is required analysis comparing each feature of the design against the per-
shall be tested with listed panic hardware on the doors. formance test procedures contained herein.
(b) Glazed doors. Glazing of doors shall conform to Title 24, (i) Simulated installation and test equipment. Doors
California Code of Regulations, Part 2, Chapter 7. with power operators shall be installed in a simulated wall
and door framing assembly in accordance with the manufac-
(c) Opening degree. Where manually operated in the direc- turer’s instructions. The test specimen shall be not less than 3
tion of egress, leaves of swinging doors or swing-out sections feet wide by 7 feet high. A motor-driven or suitable mecha-
of sliding doors shall swing open to not less than 90 degrees nism shall be used to actuate the activating carpet. The rate of
from the closed position. operation or number of cycles shall be 3 to 5 per minutes. On
(d) Locking mechanisms. Locking mechanisms on doors sliding doors with a swing-out section additional operating
intended for locations which do not require panic hardware endurance tests shall be conducted. A motor-driven mecha-
shall be of a type readily identified as locked, and the doors nism or other approved means shall be used to push the
shall be posted with durable, permanent signs reading swinging door section open and pull the swinging section
“THESE DOORS TO REMAIN UNLOCKED WHENEVER closed at a rate of 3 to 5 cycles per minute, so that the latch-
THE PUBLIC IS PRESENT.” Signs shall be 1-inch-high ing mechanism and disconnect switches operate as in service.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 69

EXITS

During the test the door specimen shall have only the lubrica- (f) Activating carpets and safety mats.
tion which is provided by the manufacturer at the factory, or 1. When carpets are used as the activating device, they
as may be recommended by the manufacturer in his installa- shall have a width1 not less than 10 inches less than
tion instructions. the clear width of the door opening with the centerline
(j) Endurance tests. The power operator shall function as of the carpet in the centerline of the door opening.
intended to open and close the door(s) for 100,000 cycles of 2. The length2 of activating carpets shall be not less
operation without failure or excessive wear of parts. The than 42 inches. The length of activating carpets for
release mechanism and disconnect switches of the swinging doors exceeding 42 inches in width shall be not less
section in sliding doors shall function as intended for 250 than 56 inches.
cycles of operation without failure or excessive wear of parts.
The opening and closing forces, and the speed of opening and 3. Doors serving one-way traffic only shall be pro-
closing shall be recorded at the start of the endurance tests, vided with a safety mat3 having a length not less
and shall again be recorded at the end of the endurance tests. than the width of the widest leaf.
Opening and closing forces at the beginning and at the end of 4. Doors serving both egress and ingress shall have a
the endurance test shall not exceed the maximum forces pre- series of joined carpets on the swing side of the door
scribed in these procedures. arranged as follows:
HISTORY: A. One safety carpet or mat nearest to the door at
1. Editorial correction (Register 71, No. 52 errata sheets). least as long as the width of the door leaf;
B. One or more activating carpets to provide a total
SWINGING DOORS carpet length on the swing side of not less than
21/2 times the width of the widest door leaf.
Sec. 12-10-102.
HISTORY:
(a) Each door opening when the door(s) is in the 90-degree 1. Editorial correction (Register 71, No. 52 errata sheets).
open position, shall provide a clear opening width of not less
than 28 inches, with no single leaf less than 24 inches in width.
(b) Doors in pairs. Doors in pairs shall be equipped with a SLIDING DOORS
separate operator for each leaf unless tests with a tandem Sec. 12-10-103.
operator with one leaf jammed in a closed and in a partially (a) General.
open position indicates that the second leaf continues to oper-
ate or is free to swing into the open position without exceed- 1. Sliding leaves of sliding doors shall be provided
ing the maximum permitted manual opening pressures. On with swinging sections arranged to swing in the
doors with mechanical controls, one mechanism shall be sub- direction of egress when pressure is applied at the
jected to fault conditions; during the fault condition the sec- location of normal push plates or on the crossbar of
ond leaf shall be openable manually without exceeding the panic hardware on doors where panic hardware is
maximum permitted opening pressure. required.
(c) Closing mechanism. Normal closing of doors shall be 2. Operation of the swinging section shall disconnect
by spring action, pressure-operated mechanism or electrically the sliding door power operator.
driven mechanism. The closing force measured at the closing 3. Permanent stops shall be provided to prevent double
stile shall not exceed 40 pounds at any point in the closing swing.
arc. The final 10 degrees of closing shall be not less than 11/2 4. Location of the breakway tension adjustment, open-
seconds. ing and closing speed adjustment, opening and clos-
(d) Each possible fault condition that affects the power ing snub speed adjustments, opening and closing
supply shall be introduced into the door and power-operator power pressure adjustments, and similar controls
assembly. Under each fault condition, single doors and each shall be concealed and not readily accessible where
leaf of doors in pairs shall open to the 90-degree position with they may be subject to tampering.
an applied pressure at the normal location at the push plate 5. Doors shall be suspended from overhead track.
not exceeding 40 pounds. Operators, control levers or mechanisms shall be
(e) In-swinging doors. Power-operated in-swinging doors guarded.
are not recognized in determining exit width opening (b) Closing mechanism. The closing force of sliding
required to swing in the direction of egress. doors at 24 inches of opening shall not exceed 30 pounds
with a closing speed not in excess of 1.5 feet per second.

1 Width: Shall be measured between the exposed edges of the carpet tread surface excluding molded edge bevels or aluminum edge trim.
2 Length: Shall be measured from the centerline of the doors pivot to the exposed edge of the carpet tread surface excluding molded edge bevels or
aluminum edge trim.
3 Safety Mat: A safety mat is one that will prevent the door from opening if there is pressure on the safety mat before pressure is applied to the
activating mat, and one that will prevent the door from closing following normal door actuation until pressure on the safety mat is removed.

70 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 EXITS

(c) Opening width. The minimum clear width of the door

opening with the swinging section, or sections in the 90-
degree open position shall be not less than 28 inches with no
single leaf less than 24 inches in width.
(d) Opening forces. The swinging section in sliding doors
shall swing open into the full open position when an opening
force not exceeding 40 pounds is applied at the normal push
plate location or on the crossbar of panic hardware.
(e) Fault condition introduced. Under each possible fault
condition that affects the power supply with the sliding leaf
or leaves retracted one-half the leaf width into its or their
pocket(s) each swinging section shall open to the 90-degree
position with an applied pressure at the normal location of the
push plate not exceeding 40 pounds.
(f) Sliding doors without swing-out section. Power-oper-
ated sliding doors which are not provided with a swing-out
section may be evaluated for conformance to the mechanical
requirements and endurance tests provided in this standard.
Power-operated sliding doors which are not provided with a
swing-out section shall not be listed for use in locations
where required exits are specified in Part 2, Title 24, Califor-
nia Code of Regulations.
(g) Activating carpets, safety mats. Activating carpets
and safety mats shall conform to Section 12-10-102 (f).

MARKING
Sec. 12-10-104. The name of the manufacturer, or trademark
by which the manufacturer can be readily identified, shall be
legibly marked on the operating equipment where it can be
seen after installation. The type, model number or letter des-
ignation identifying the product as a listed device shall be
provided on a label attached in a location as indicated in its
listing.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 71

72 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE
 CHAPTER 12-10-2

EXITS

SINGLE-POINT LATCHING OR LOCKING DEVICES

STANDARD 12-10-2

STATE FIRE MARSHAL DESIGN

SCOPE Sec. 12-10-202.
Sec. 12-10-200. (a) Finish. Builders hardware shall have a smooth finish
(a) Builders hardware, exit doors. These design require- with no sharp or burred edges. Knobs may be knurled or have
ments and testing procedures apply to builders hardware, sin- an abrasive finish for ease of turning or identification as may
gle-point latches and locks, intended for use on required be required. Strikes shall be plain with curved lip. Strike and
means of egress doors in other than Group R and M Occupan- lip extending beyond jamb have rounded corners.
cies with an occupant load of 10 or less. It is the intent that (b) Knob, lever or “T” handle actuated. Single-point
devices designed and tested in accordance with these proce- latch bolts and/or dead bolts shall be retracted from the strike
dures will develop data to enable the State Fire Marshal to to release the door by a knob, lever or “T” handle with not to
determine the suitability of latches and locks on means of exceed 1/4 turn. A thumb piece or thumb turn is not acceptable
egress doors. Alternate designs and materials may be submit- for this purpose.
ted with substantiating test data. If, after evaluation, devices
are found to comply with the intent of these procedures, they (c) Tested design. Builders hardware single-point latching
may also be recognized for approval and listing by the State or locking devices shall be designed to retract the latch bolt
Fire Marshal. and/or dead bolt after application of the horizontal forces and
the endurance tests without exceeding the releasing torque
(b) Fire doors. Builders hardware single-point latches and specified in 12-10-204 (h).
locks intended for use on doors bearing a fire-retardant classi-
fication shall also conform to the construction standards and (d) Knobs. Knobs shall have a minimum diameter of 2
performance tests specified in Fire Door Assembly Tests, inches and a maximum diameter of 23/4 inches.
SFM 12-7-4, Section 12-7-400. (e) “T” handle. “T” handles shall be oval-shaped and
have minimum dimensions of 13/4 inch by 1 inch at center
(c) Listing by approved listing agency. Listing by an
portion with 11/4 inch projection.
approved listing agency shall not be construed as necessarily
indicating compliance in all respects with the requirements of (f) Levers. The lever of lever actuated latches or locks
these design requirements and test procedures for single- shall be curved with a return to within 1/2 inch of the door to
point latching or locking devices. The test report of the prevent catching on the clothing of persons during egress.
approved listing agency may be filed for review and after (g) Self-releasing knob. The inside knob shall be free at
evaluation, if it is found to provide evidence of conformance, all times. Any locking, stopworks, or shut-out mechanism
the single-point latching or locking device may be recognized shall not prevent retracting the latch bolt or dead bolt to
for approval and listing. release the door by turning of the inside knob, or “T” handle,
(d) Definitions. or depressing the inside lever, bar or paddle.
1. Inside knob. Inside knob means the knob, lever, bar (h) Dead bolt operation. Operation of the inside knob
or paddle on the side of the door which must be shall retract both latch bolt and dead bolt simultaneously. The
turned or depressed to unlatch or unlock the door to opening in the strike shall be of such dimensions that when
permit egress. the flat of the latch bolt is forced against the edge of the latch
hole there shall be no pressure against the side of the dead
2. Outside knob. Outside knob means the knob on the bolt.
corridor side of room to corridor doors, or the knob
on the exterior side of a door leading to the exterior. (i) Springs. Retraction of the latch bolt and/or dead bolt
shall not depend on springs.
(j) Backset. Backset shall be not less than 23/4 inches or
INSTRUCTIONS more than 5 inches.
Sec. 12-10-201. Approved installation instructions shall be (k) Throw. Latches shall have a minimum latch throw of
1
provided by the manufacturer. Instructions shall be illustrated /2 inch. Latches intended for use on fire endurance rated
and shall include directions and information adequate to doors shall also conform to the requirements of SFM 12-7-4,
ensure proper and safe installation of the device. Section 12-7-400, Fire Door Assembly Tests.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 73

EXITS

(l) Roller latches. Roller latches intended for use on room ance and performance test procedures. Test reports prepared
to corridor doors shall have a minimum projection of 3/8 inch for other governmental agencies may be utilized to the extent
excluding any coating or sound deadening material. Stops or that the test procedures contained herein have been dupli-
staking shall be provided to provide a minimum projection of cated.
1
/8 inch. Spring design shall be such as will require an open- (c) Test latches or locks.
ing force of 20 pounds when the roller projects 31/6 inch in a
door and frame with 1/8-inch jamb clearance. Adjustment of 1. Samples. Samples of the test latch or lock shall be
the roller projection shall not be possible from the front of selected by the testing agency or fire protection
face plate. engineer at random from the manufacturer’s current
production runs. The types tested shall be consid-
ered to represent, for purposes of approval and list-
CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS ing, all lock types of a series, except that when there
are variations of basic mechanical design and/or
Sec. 12-10-203.
materials for mechanical parts, each variation shall
(a) Cases, interior working parts. Cases, latch or lock be tested for compliance with the minimum perfor-
enclosures, and interior working parts shall be of brass, mance test procedures.
bronze, steel, monel, stainless steel or of materials equivalent
2. Modifications in design or test procedure.
in mechanical strength to brass or bronze. Cases of mortise
Devices involving dead-locking bolts, lever handles,
locks may be of cast iron.
shear pins in the outside know or other variations in
(b) Latch bolts, strikes. Latch bolts and strikes shall be of design may require modifications in the test proce-
brass, bronze, monel, stainless steel or materials equivalent in dure in order to simulate the intended in-service
mechanical strength having corrosion resistance equivalent to conditions. Requests for modifications in the design
brass or bronze. and test procedures shall be filed for evaluation and
(c) Corrosion resistance. Cases, enclosures and internal approval by the State Fire Marshal before proceed-
working parts shall have corrosion resistance equivalent to ing with the test.
cadmium plating not less than 0.00015 inch thick or zinc plat- (d) Test equipment.
ing not less than 0.0004 inch thick, or processed to give equal 1. Static loading. The static loading apparatus used for
corrosion resistance as determined by comparison in salt fog the torque loading, axial load, vertical load and
atmosphere per ASTM Method B-117. releasing torque tests shall consist of frame, test
(d) Nonmetallic materials. Nonmetallic materials may be door and test block as detailed in Figure 12-10-2-1.
used as coatings or for wearing surfaces, rollers, and finishes, Except as shown, materials shall be of steel, welded
and antifriction inserts, or for similar purpose if the material or bolted. The test apparatus may be of alternate
otherwise conforms to these requirements. design and construction having equivalent or greater
rigidity.
(e) Springs. Component springs used in the assembly of a
latch or lock shall be of material having spring properties 2. Endurance test. Apparatus for the endurance test
equivalent to stainless steel conforming to ASTM A 313.67. shall consist of frame and test door as shown in Fig-
ure 12-10-2-2. An alternate design having equiva-
lent or greater rigidity may be utilized. Alternate
ENDURANCE AND PERFORMANCE designs utilizing components of greater dimensions
TEST PROCEDURES or greater rigidity may affect details of the approval
Sec. 12-10-204. and listing.
(a) Testing laboratory. Tests shall be conducted at a test- 3. Test equipment. Torque wrenches, spring scales,
ing laboratory approved by the State Fire Marshal, or tests hydraulic or pneumatic pressure scales, or other
shall be conducted by a qualified independent fire protection instruments shall be calibrated in an approved man-
engineer, acceptable to the State Fire Marshal, in testing ner.
facilities acceptable to the State Fire Marshal. (e) Torque loading test. Each latch or lock shall be
(b) Report. The test report shall include a detailed installed in a 13/4-inch thick test block in accordance with the
description of the latch or lock and its intended function; manufacturer’s installation instructions. The test block shall
engineering data, shop drawings and photographs; identifica- be installed in the static loading test fixture. The torque load
tion of materials as to source, composition, strength and cor- shall be applied to the inside door knob or lever. The knob or
rosion resistance; the physical or chemical tests including lever shall be turned or depressed to fully retract the latch bolt
dimensions of parts before and after the endurance tests or dead bolt before application of the torque load. The applied
establishing conformance of materials. The report shall torque load shall be 300 inch-pounds. After removal of the
include the manufacturer’s installation instructions. The torque load the latch shall automatically return to its latch
report shall be verified by the laboratory or fire protection position, the dead bolt shall be extended to its locked posi-
engineer responsible for the conduct of the test. The test tion.
report and evidence of listing by an approved listing agency Subsequent hand turning of the knob or depressing the
may be provided for the applicable portions of these endur- lever shall retract the latch or dead bolt. Three representative

74 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 EXITS

latches and/or locks shall be tested and there shall be no fail- cessfully at the end of the test or the torque of any four
ures. latches exceeds two times the initial average torque, an addi-
tional five latches or locks shall be subjected to the endurance
(f) Axial load. Each latch or lock shall be installed as
test and the torque of any seven latches shall not exceed two
described in Section 12-10-204 (e). A hydraulic loading
times the initial average torque.
device or load dynamometer shall be applied first to the out-
side knob and then to the inside knob or lever so that the force (j) Roller latches.
applied to the knob or lever is in line with the axis of the spin- 1. Fire test. Roller latches shall be installed in a com-
dle. The axial load applied alternately to the outside knob and posite test fire door in accordance with the manufac-
inside knob or lever shall be 500 pounds. Neither knob nor turer’s installation instructions and subjected to the
lever shall pull off under the axial load. Three representative fire test as described in SFM 12-7-4, for a period of
latches and/or locks shall be tested and there shall be no fail- 30 minutes. The latch shall be adjusted to an open-
ures. ing pressure of 20 pounds applied to the closing
(g) Vertical load test. Each latch or lock shall be installed edge immediately above the latch. Throughout the
as described in Section 12-10-204 (e). Each latch or lock shall test the latch shall require an applied pressure of 20
be subjected to a vertical downward force applied perpendic- pounds to open the door.
ular to the spindle axis through a sling which shall conform to 2. Endurance test. Five samples of the roller latch
the knob shape. A vertical downward force of 350 pounds shall be subjected to the endurance test as described
shall be applied first to the outside knob and then to the inside in Section 12-10-204 (i). The latch shall continue to
knob or lever. Neither knob nor lever shall break off under extend the roller throughout the test without any
the downward force. Three latches or locks shall be tested failure. The opening pressure at the end of the test
and there shall be no failures. shall not be less than 15 pounds.
(h) Releasing torque test. A latch or lock set shall be 3. Installation. Doors utilizing roller latches shall be
installed as described in Section 12-10-204 (e). A hydraulic or installed in doors hung in steel frames only. Frame
pneumatic loading device shall be used to apply a horizontal jambs shall be anchored to the floor to prevent
force of 50 pounds against the latching edge of the test block 3 spreading of the jambs. In other than concrete fill
inches above and in the vertical center of the latch or lock spin- floors the jambs shall be anchored to a steel sill or
dle in such a direction that the flat of the latch bolt is forced steel floor plate extending between the jambs to pre-
against the edge of the latch hole in the strike. After not less vent spreading of the frame. Horizontal bracing shall
than 25 unlatchings under the above-prescribed load not more be provided in the wall in back of the strike.
than 30 inch-pounds of torque on the inside knob in either
direction or 15 pounds of downward pressure on an inside
lever shall be required to retract the latch bolt. After 100,000 THICKNESS OF COATINGS TESTS
cycles of the endurance test as described in Section 12-10-204
(i), the torque or downward pressure necessary to retract the Sec. 12-10-205. The thickness of cadmium, zinc or bronze
latch bolt shall not exceed the above-prescribed limits. plated coatings applied for corrosion resistance may be deter-
mined by either of the following methods:
(i) Endurance test. Five latches or locks shall be sub-
jected to an accelerated endurance test as provided in this 1. Cross sections of coated samples cut at 90 exposed
subsection. The locks shall be installed in the door of the edges polished and thickness measured with a suitable
endurance testing apparatus in accordance with the manufac- microscope and scale.
turer’s installation instructions. The latch or lock shall be 2. Dropping test of a suitable reagent at a definite rate
operated to retract the latch, open the door, and close the door until coating is penetrated. The thickness is calculated
at a rate of approximately 10 cycles per minute. A cycle shall from the known characteristics of the reagent at the
consist of the following: observed temperature and time required for the end
1. Turn the inside knob to retract the latch bolt. point to appear.
2. Open the door after the latch bolt is restricted to Thickness testing shall not apply to other processes having
clear the strike. equal corrosion resistance; acceptance shall be determined by
comparison in salt fog atmosphere per ASTM Method B-117.
3. Release the knob allowing the latch bolt to return to
its extended position by action of its own spring.
After insertion of the latches or locks in the test door the MARKING
torque in inch-pounds necessary to fully retract the latch bolts Sec. 12-10-206. The name of the manufacturer, or trademark
shall be recorded. The torque shall be the average recorded by which the manufacturer can be readily identified, shall be
for the five latches or locks. Each sample shall be subjected to legibly marked on the latch or lock where it can be seen after
800,000 operating cycles as described above. Each latch shall installation. When the manufacturer produces similar
continue to extend itself per cycle 3 above throughout the devices, the type, model number or letter designation identi-
test. At the end of the endurance test the torque to retract the fying the listed product shall be legibly marked on the latch
latch bolts of any four latch bolts shall not exceed two times or case. Such identification may be an approved marking or
the initial average torque. If two latches fail to operate suc- label on the case.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 75

EXITS

76 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 EXITS

FIGURE 12-10-2-2—ENDURANCE LIFE TESTING APPARATUS

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 77

78 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE
 CHAPTER 12-10-3

EXITS

EMERGENCY EXIT AND PANIC HARDWARE

STANDARD 12-10-3

STATE FIRE MARSHAL (d) Cross bar. The ends of the cross-bar shall be curved,
SCOPE guarded or otherwise designed to prevent catching on the
Sec. 12-10-300. clothing of persons during egress.
(a) Exit door hardware. These requirements and methods (e) Springs. The release mechanism shall not depend on
of test apply to releasing devices actuated by a crossbar for springs to release or retract the door latch or latches, locking
outward-opening doors intended for use on exit doors. mechanism, dead bolt or vertical rods.
(b) Fire-exit hardware. Releasing devices intended for (f) Dogging devices. Exit panic hardware mechanisms
use on doors bearing a fire-retardant classification shall also shall not be equipped with any locking or dogging device, set
conform to the construction standards and performance tests screw or other arrangement which can be used to prevent
specified in Fire Door Assembly Tests, SFM 12-7-4, Section release of the door latch or latches, locking device or dead
12-7-400. locking bolt when pressure is applied to the cross-bar.
(c) Listing by approved listing agency. Listing by an
approved listing agency shall not be construed as necessarily CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
indicating compliance in all respects with the requirements of
Sec. 12-10-303.
these Construction Standards and Performance Tests for
Emergency Exit and Panic Hardware. The test report of the (a) Strength. The materials used in the assembly of a
listing agency may be filed for review and after evaluation, if releasing mechanism shall have mechanical strength equiva-
it is found to provide evidence of conformance, the releasing lent to brass or bronze to perform their intended function.
device assembly may be recognized for approval and listing. (b) Springs. Component springs used in the assembly of a
releasing mechanism shall be of material having spring prop-
erties equivalent to stainless steel conforming to ASTM A
INSTRUCTIONS 313-67.
Sec. 12-10-301. Approved installation instructions shall be (c) Corrosion resistance of moving parts. Moving parts
provided by the manufacturer. Instructions shall be illustrated in the releasing mechanism assembly shall have corrosion
and shall include directions and information adequate for resistance equivalent to 300 series stainless steel, or shall
obtaining proper and safe installation of the equipment. show no visual signs of corrosion after being subjected to a
salt fog atmosphere per ASTM B 117 for a period of 120
hours.
DESIGN
Sec. 12-10-302. (d) Nonmoving parts. Nonmoving parts, cases and simi-
lar parts shall be of materials, or shall be coated to provide
(a) Releasing pressure. Exit panic hardware mechanisms corrosion protection equivalent to 0.0005-inch-thick cad-
shall be designed to release the door latch or latches when mium coated steel as determined by comparison in salt fog
pressure not to exceed 15 pounds is applied at any point along atmosphere per ASTM B 117 for a period of not less than 16
the cross-bar perpendicular to the door in the direction of exit hours.
travel. The cross-bar shall extend across not less than one-
half the width of the door. (e) Galvanic action. Coated or uncoated metals used in
the assembly of releasing mechanisms shall not be used in
(b) Locking device. A locking device employed as part of combination such as to cause detrimental galvanic action
the mechanism shall not prevent release of the door latch or which may adversely affect the function of any part of the
latches when pressure of not to exceed 15 pounds is applied assembly.
to the cross-bar in the direction of exit travel.
(f) Nonmetallic materials. Nonmetallic materials may be
(c) Dead locking bolt. A dead locking bolt shall not be used as coatings for wearing surfaces, rollers, finishes or for
provided as a part of the mechanism unless it is released and similar purposes if the materials otherwise conform to these
retracted, and does not prevent release of the door latch or requirements.
latches, or release of the door to swing outward when pres-
sure not to exceed 15 pounds is applied to the cross-bar in the
direction of exit travel.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 79

EXITS

ENDURANCE AND PERFORMANCE TESTS EMERGENCY OPERATION TEST

Sec. 12-10-304. Sec. 12-10-305.

(a) Testing laboratory. Tests shall be conducted at a test- (a) Releasing pressure. The release mechanism shall be
ing laboratory approved by the State Fire Marshal, or tests so designed that a horizontal force of 50 pounds or less will
shall be conducted by a qualified independent fire protection actuate the release bar and latches or dead-locking bolt when
engineer, acceptable to the State Fire Marshal in test facilities the latched or locked door is subjected to outward pressure as
acceptable to the State Fire Marshal. described in Sections 12-10-305 (c) and (d). The horizontal
force shall be applied at any point along the cross-bar perpen-
(b) Report. The test report shall include a detailed dicular to the door in the direction of swing.
description of the releasing mechanism and its intended func-
(b) Test specimen. The test specimen for the emergency
tion; engineering data, shop drawings and photographs; iden-
operation test shall be the sample which has been previously
tification of materials as to source, composition, strength and
subjected to the cycle test specified in Section 12-10-304.
corrosion resistance; the physical or chemical tests including
dimension of parts before and after the endurance tests estab- (c) Testing instrument. The horizontal force applied to
lishing conformance of materials. The report shall include the cross-bar shall be measured with a calibrated spring scale
copies of the manufacturer’s installation instructions. The or other approved means.
report shall be verified by the laboratory or fire protection
engineer responsible for the conduct of the test. The test (d) Outward pressure, single door. A hydraulic loading
report and evidence of listing by an approved listing agency device or load dynamometer shall be used to apply a horizon-
may be provided for the applicable portions of these endur- tal force of 250 pounds against the latching edge in the direc-
ance and performance tests. tion in which the door opens. The thrust load shall be applied
to the stile immediately above the latching mechanism.
(c) Test equipment. The releasing mechanism shall be (e) Outward pressure, double doors. A hydraulic load-
applied on a suitable door hung on heavy duty ball bearing ing device or load dynamometer shall be used to apply a hori-
butts or pivots installed in a suitable metal frame in accor- zontal force of 250 pounds against the lock stile of each door
dance with the manufacturer’s instructions. A motor-driven of doors in pairs 2 inches in from the edge at midpoint
mechanism shall be used to actuate the cross-bar so as to between top and bottom of each door leaf in the direction of
release the latches or dead-locking bolts, push the door open door swing.
and jerk the door shut so that the latches or dead-locking bolts
operate as in service. The rate of operation or number of (f) Release bar deformation. The cross-bar on a 36-inch
cycles shall be approximately ten per minute. For the test the wide door shall not be permanently set or deformed in excess
assembly is to have only the lubrication which is provided at of 1/4 inch, by the test; a spacing of at least 1 inch is to be pro-
the factory or as recommended by the manufacturer in his vided and maintained between the cross-bar and the face of
installation instructions. the door when the horizontal force is applied against the
cross-bar.
Note: Mechanisms involving dead-locking bolts may
require modification in the test procedure in order to simu-
late the intended in-service condition. Modifications in the MARKING
test procedure shall be filed for evaluation and approval
before proceeding with the test. Sec. 12-10-306. The listee’s name (or approved symbol), type
or model designation shall be plainly marked on the releasing
(d) Releasing pressure. The motor-driven mechanism assembly. Devices and assemblies which are not listed by an
shall be arranged to apply not to exceed 15 pounds pressure approved listing agency for the intended purpose shall bear a
against the cross-bar to release the door latch(es) or dead- label or other identifying markings as approved by the State
locking bolts before the door is pushed open. Fire Marshal.
(e) Cycle test. The release mechanism and latches or
dead-locking bolts shall function as intended for 100,000
cycles of operation without failure or excessive wear of the
parts.

80 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 CHAPTERS 12-11A AND 12-11B

BUILDING AND FACILITY ACCESS SPECIFICATIONS

Detectable warning products and directional surfaces manufacturers of the specified products, to cover the cost of
installed after January 1, 2001, shall be evaluated by an inde- detectable warning products and directional surfaces.
pendent entity, selected by the Department of General Ser-
vices, Division of the State Architect-Access Compliance, for
all occupancies, including transportation and other outdoor DISABILITY ACCESS ACCOUNT
environments, except that when products and surfaces are for Sections 12-11A.208 and 12-11B.208. The fees received
use in residential housing evaluation shall be in consultation from manufacturers will be placed in the Disability Access
with the Department of Housing and Community Develop- Account.
ment. See Government Code Section 4460.

DETECTABLE WARNING PRODUCTS

PRODUCT APPROVAL FOR AND DIRECTIONAL SURFACES
DETECTABLE WARNING PRODUCTS Sections 12-11A.209 and 12-11B.209. Detectable Warning
AND DIRECTIONAL SURFACES Products and Directional Surfaces must ensure consistency
and uniformity:
SCOPE (a) Shape,
Sections 12-11A.202 and 12-11B.202. These requirements (b) Color fastness,
and test methods apply to detectable warning products and (c) Conformation,
directional surfaces.
(d) Sound-on-cane acoustic quality,
(e) Resilience, and
DETECTABLE WARNING PRODUCTS (f) Attachment will not degrade significantly for at least
Sections 12-11A.203 and 12-11B.203. Must comply with the five years.
California Code of Regulations, Title 24.

SIGNIFICANT DEGRADATION
DIRECTIONAL SURFACES Sections 12-11A.210 and 12-11B.210. Significant degrada-
Sections 12-11A.204 and 12-11B.204. Must comply with the tion means that the product maintains at least 90 percent of its
California Code of Regulations, Title 24. approved design characteristics.

INDEPENDENT ENTITY SELECTION OF INDEPENDENT ENTITY

Sections 12-11A.205 and 12-11B.205. Evaluation by an Sections 12-11A.211 and 12-11B.211. The independent
independent entity to confirm the prescriptive and perfor- entity selected by the Division of the State Architect-Access
mance standard of detectable warning products or direction Compliance shall be recognized as having appropriate exper-
surfaces installed after January 1, 2001. An independent tise in determining whether products comply with the Cali-
entity is a not-for-profit product safety testing and certifica- fornia Code of Regulations, Title 24.
tion organization, dedicated to testing for public safety. An Authority: Government Code Sections 4450, 4460 and Health & Safety
independent entity would operate for the testing, certification Code Section 18949.1.
and quality assessment of products, systems and services. Reference: Government Code Section 4460.

TWO-YEAR APPROVAL
Sections 12-11A.206 and 12-11B.206. Detectable warning
products and directional surfaces are to be recertified every
two years without exception or waiver.

FEE
Sections 12-11A.207 and 12-11B.207. The Division of the
State Architect-Access Compliance may impose a fee on

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 81

82 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE
 CHAPTER 12-12

RESERVED >

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 83

84 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE
 CHAPTER 12-13

STANDARDS FOR INSULATING MATERIAL

(See Part 6, Title 24, C.C.R.)

DEPARTMENT OF CONSUMER AFFAIRS DEFINITIONS

Bureau of Home Furnishings and Sec. 12-13-1552. For purposes of this article, the following
Thermal Insulation definitions shall apply:
Article 3. Standards for Insulating Material (a) “Approved laboratory” means any testing facility
including a facility owned or operated by a manufacturer
APPLICATION AND SCOPE which has been approved pursuant to Section 1554 of this
article.
Sec. 12-13-1551.
(b) “ANSI” means the American National Standards Insti-
(a) This article establishes standards governing the quality tute.
of insulation sold within the state after September 22, 1981,
including those properties which affect the safety and thermal (c) “ASTM” means ASTM International.
performance of insulation during application and in the use (d) “Building materials” means materials used in walls,
intended. ceilings, roofs and floors of buildings.
(b) The provisions of this article shall apply only to the (e) “Exposed application” means any interior application
following types of insulating material: of the product in which it is not used in a construction assem-
1. Aluminum foil (reflective foil); bly imposing a material which meets the requirements of
Chapter 8 of the California Building Code in substantial con-
2. Cellular glass (board form); tact with the facing or membrane surface.
3. Cellulose fiber (loose fill and spray applied); (f) “Installed design density” means the proven density
4. Mineral aggregate (board form); for loose fill insulation other than cellulose which has been
5. Mineral fiber (blankets, board form, loose fill); determined by the manufacturer to constitute the density
whereby settlement of no more than 2 percent shall occur
6. Perlite (loose fill); over the first three years, or no more than 4 percent over the
7. Polystyrene (board form, molded and extruded); first 15 years of installation.
8. Polyurethane (board form and field applied); (g) “Insulating material” or “insulation” means any
material listed in Section 1551 (b) of this article and placed
9. Polyisocyanurate (board form and field applied); within or contiguous to a wall, ceiling, roof or floor of a room
10. Urea formaldehyde foam (field applied); or building, or contiguous to the surface of any appliance or
11. Vermiculite (loose fill). its intake or outtake mechanism, for the purpose of reducing
heat transfer or reducing adverse temperature fluctuations of
(c) The provisions of this article shall apply to the sale of the building room or appliance.
insulating material within the state. The provisions of this
article shall not apply to insulating material manufactured in (h) “Manufacturer” means any person who either:
California, but sold outside the state, nor to insulating mate- 1. Produces insulating material in the final composi-
rial manufactured outside California and sold wholesale in tion either for use in the form sold or to be further
California for final retail sale outside the state. For the pur- dimensionally modified; or
pose of this article, the sale of a building or an appliance
which contains installed insulating material is not considered 2. In the case of polyurethane, polyisocyanurate and
the sale of the insulating material. urea formaldehyde foam formed at the installation
site, produces the primary components of the mate-
(d) Any type of insulating material not listed in subsection rial.
(b) may be sold within California notwithstanding any other
provision of this article. “Manufacturer” shall not include any building contractor
or any other person whose sole activity is to install insulation
Authority: Sections 25920 and 25922, Public Resources Code. at the installation site.
Reference: Sections 25910, 25920, 25921 and 25922, Public Resources Code.
HISTORY:
(i) “Quality assurance program.” (Reserved)
1. Repealer of Article 3 (Sections 1551-1561) filed 8-11-78; effective (j) “Recommended wall density” means the density used
thirtieth day thereafter (Register 78, No. 32). For prior history, see for pressure fill retrofit wall applications to prevent settling.
Registers 76, No. 16; 78, Nos. 2 and 26.
2. New Article 3 (Sections 1551-1565) filed 1-16-79; effective thirtieth
(k) “Representative sample” means a sample of insulat-
day thereafter (Register 79, No. 3). ing material with the same characteristics (other than thick-
3. Amendment filed 8-10-81; designated effective 9-22-81 (Register 81, ness) and using the same facing imposed on the insulating
No. 33). material manufactured for final use.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 85

STANDARDS FOR INSULATING MATERIAL

(l) “Representative thickness” means a thickness of insu- average testing temperature shall be 75° ± 2°F with
lating material at which the change in thermal performance at least a 40°F temperature difference.
per inch will vary no more than plus or minus 2 percent with
5. Aluminum foil insulation shall be tested according
increases in thickness.
to ANSI/ASTM C 236-66 to determine the thermal
(m) “TAPPI” means Technical Association of Pulp and performance in horizontal, upward and downward
Paper Industry. directions. The tested thermal performance in the
(n) “Thermal performance” means the tested thermal con- heat-flow direction or directions of the intended
ductivity, thermal conductance or thermal resistance (R-value), application shall be labeled on the material. The
as appropriate, of an insulating material. manufacturer shall test once in each direction of
intended application, except that for products
(o) “Urea formaldehyde foam” means a cellular plastic labeled with only one heat-flow direction, the man-
insulation material generated in a continuous stream by mix- ufacturer shall test two samples in that direction.
ing the components which are a urea formaldehyde resin, air
and a foaming agent. 6. Insulation (other than aluminum foil insulation
materials) for which additional value is claimed for
Authority: Sections 25920 and 25922, Public Resources Code.
facings and air spaces shall be tested for thermal
Reference: Sections 25915 (a), 25920, 25921 and 25922, Public Resources
Code.
performance as a material without the air space
HISTORY:
pursuant to this article. The manufacturer may
elect to report additional thermal performance val-
1. Amendment filed 8-10-81; designated effective 9-22-81 (Register 81,
No. 33). ues of a given construction tested according to
ANSI/ASTM C 236-66 for that construction as
long as full details of that construction are also dis-
QUALITY STANDARDS closed in the certification statement and pursuant
to Section 1557 (c) of this article. If a manufacturer
Sec. 12-13-1553. The manufacturer shall cause the testing of
elects to report a thermal performance value for a
samples of insulating material for conformity with the quality
material plus an air space (as supplemental infor-
standards described in this section.
mation to the required material thermal perfor-
(a) General testing provisions. In testing any material mance), but not necessarily for a full construction,
pursuant to this section, the following general procedures the manufacturer must also disclose the conditions
shall be used. of the test and the limitations to the attainment of
1. All tests with the exception of the ANSI/ASTM E that result.
84-79 test shall be conducted using representative 7. Except as provided in Items 5 and 6, the thermal
samples at the representative thickness of the insu- performance test results certified under Section
lation, except that when the final use of an insulat- 1555 of this article shall be the average of the val-
ing material entails a thickness less than the ues obtained from at least three tests.
representative thickness, then the insulating mate-
rial will be tested at the lesser thickness. 8. The average measured thermal performance of the
tests required by Items 5, 6 and 7 shall not be more
2. Where uniformity of product ensures consistency than 5 percent below the value specified on the
of test results across a product grouping, test product. In addition, all insulation material sold
results for one may be used for certification of within the state after September 22, 1981, shall
other products within that product group. The man- have a measured thermal performance not more
ufacturer shall provide sufficient documentation to than 10 percent below the value specified on the
establish a valid basis for applying a particular test product.
result to other products within the group.
9. All numbered test descriptions shall be contained
The Executive Director shall determine whether in the document “Test Descriptions for Insulating
a valid basis exists for grouping products for test- Material” dated February 27, 1981.
ing pursuant to this subsection. If it is determined
that a valid basis does not exist, individual tests 10. Facings on representative samples may be
shall be required. A manufacturer may appeal the removed or modified by slitting for the ANSI/
Executive Director’s determination to the full ASTM C 177-76 and ANSI/ASTM C 518-76 tests.
Commission. 11. All thermal performance testing equipment used
3. Thermal performance of building insulations shall for testing insulating materials shall be calibrated
be stated in R value. Other insulations shall use with samples referenced to the United States
thermal conductivity, conductance, or R value as National Bureau of Standards.
appropriate. 12. Manufacturers of loose fill insulations for which
4. All thermal performance tests shall be conducted no settled density test is required by this section
on materials which have been conditioned at 73.4° shall be required to include the installed design
± 3.6°F and a relative humidity of 50 ± 5 percent density in the identifying information described in
for 24 hours immediately preceding the tests. The Section 1557. The manufacturer shall provide suf-

86 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 STANDARDS FOR INSULATING MATERIAL

ficient documentation to establish a valid basis for in a vertical position and heated to a temperature of
the determination of installed design density. 180°F ± 5°F for at least five hours. At the end of
heating period, examine the reflective surfaces to
The Executive Director shall determine whether
determine whether the adhesive has bled or extruded
a valid basis exists for the installed design density
through the surface, or delamination has occurred.
claimed by the manufacturer. If it is determined
that a valid basis does not exist, the director may 2. Thermal performance. Thermal performance shall
assign an appropriate installed design density or be determined according to ANSI/ASTM C 236-66.
may require an appropriate test to determine the The test panel shall consist of a panel utilizing a
installed design density. The manufacturer may wooden frame of 2 by 6 inches construction covered
appeal the Executive Director’s determination to with 3/4-inch plywood on both sides. The resultant
the full Commission. thermal performance shall be based on the insulation
only.
13. Within 180 days after the availability of appropri-
ate representative thickness calibration samples 3. Size. Layers of insulation composed of unsupported
from the National Bureau of Standards, all insulat- foil that is exposed shall have a minimum thickness
ing materials thicker than 1 inch, which have not of 0.0004 inch. Unsupported foil that is sandwiched
previously been tested at the representative thick- in a multilayer sheet shall have a minimum thick-
ness of a representative sample, shall be tested at ness of 0.00035 inch. Foil bonded to kraft paper
representative thickness and recertified. Test shall have a minimum thickness of 0.00025 inch.
results and a revised certification statement will be Minimum space between layers of a multilayer sheet
submitted to the Executive Director. The Execu- shall conform with the United States General Ser-
tive Director shall determine if and when an appro- vices Administration insulation standard HH-I-
priate representative thickness calibration sample 1252B dated August 18, 1976.
is available from the National Bureau of Standards 4. Resistance to combustion. Surface-burning charac-
and shall publish a list of available representative teristics shall be determined according to the ANSI/
thickness calibration samples. The manufacturer ASTM E 84-79, and shall not exceed the following
may appeal the Executive Director’s determination values:
to the full Commission.
Flame spread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
14. All products which may be used for pressure fill Smoke developed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
retrofit wall application shall be separately tested
5. Pliability. Foil shall be folded and the folded edge
for thermal performance using a sample prepared
smoothed using a light finger pressure. The finished
at the manufacturer’s recommended wall density
insulation shall not crack when folded to 180° bend
for such applications.
at a temperature of 70° ± 2°F and a relative humidity
15. All water heater insulation kits and nonpreformed of 50 ± 5 percent.
pipe insulation shall be tested for thermal perfor-
(c) Cellular glass in board form.
mance at the installed compressed thickness of a
typical application. Installed compressed thick- 1. Composition. The material shall consist of a glass
ness shall be determined according to Test composition which has been foamed or cellulated
Description Number 6. All nonpreformed duct under molten conditions, annealed and set to form a
insulation shall be labeled, in accordance with Sec- rigid material with hermetically sealed cells.
tion 1557(c), with an installed R-value equal to the 2. Thermal performance. Determination of the ther-
R-value of the uncompressed insulation times 0.75. mal performance shall be based on a representative
(b) Aluminum foil. sample and shall be in accordance with ANSI/
ASTM C 177-76, ANSI/ASTM C 236-66, or ANSI/
1. Composition. The insulation shall have uniform flat ASTM C 518-76 at the manufacturer’s option.
surfaces and shall not be crumpled, torn or punc-
tured. Aluminum foil shall contain not less than 99 3. Resistance to combustion. Surface-burning charac-
percent aluminum. Kraft paper and flangeboard teristics shall be determined according to ANSI/
shall meet the requirements of ANSI/TAPPI T400 ASTM E 84-79, and shall not exceed the following
0S75. Flangeboard used for more than two insula- values:
tion layers shall be of 28 point grade minimum, if Flame spread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
single sheet flangeboard is used or 14 point grade Smoke developed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
minimum if double sheet flangeboard is used.
(d) Cellulose fiber in loose fill form.
Adhesive used in bonding shall be waterproof and
1. Composition. The basic material shall consist of
shall show no sign of bleeding when tested in accor-
virgin or recycled wood-based cellulosic fiber and
dance with the following test procedure. Bleeding at
may be made from related paper or paperboard
cut edges may be disregarded.
stock, excluding contaminated materials and extra-
Specimens for tests shall consist of pieces of insu- neous foreign materials such as metals and glass
lation cut to approximately 3 by 6 inches, suspended which may reasonably be expected to be retained in

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 87

STANDARDS FOR INSULATING MATERIAL

the finished product. Suitable chemicals may be sity to prevent settling and separately marked with the tested
introduced to improve flame resistance, processing thermal performance for such applications.
and handling characteristics. The particles shall not (e) Cellulose fiber spray applied.
be so fine as to create a dust hazard, and the added
chemicals shall not create a health hazard. The mate- 1. Composition. The basic material shall consist of
rials used must be capable of proper adhesion to the virgin or recycled wood-based cellulosic fiber and
additive chemicals. may be made from related paper or paperboard
stock, excluding contaminated materials and extra-
2. Thermal performance. Determination of the ther- neous foreign materials such as metals and glass
mal performance shall be in accordance with ANSI/ which may reasonably be expected to be retained
ASTM C 177-76, ANSI/ASTM C 236-66, or ANSI/ in the finished product. Suitable chemicals may be
ASTM C 518-76 at the manufacturer’s option. introduced to improve flame resistance, process-
3. Density. The density shall be determined according ing, adhesive and cohesive qualities, and handling
to the United States General Services Administra- characteristics. The added chemicals shall not cre-
tion insulation standard HH-I-515D dated June 15, ate a health hazard.
1978, or as amended October 11, 1979, at the manu- The basic material shall be processed into a form
facturer’s option. Cellulose insulation made from suitable for installation by pneumatic conveying
newsprint may use a 13 percent settling percentage equipment and simultaneous mixing with water
along with the drop box procedure in place of the and/or adhesive at the spray nozzle.
humidity cycling procedure described in HH-I-515D
2. Thermal performance. Determination of the ther-
dated June 15, 1978. All other tests for loose fill cel-
mal performance shall be in accordance with
lulose fiber insulation prescribed by this section
ANSI/ASTM C 177-76, ANSI/ASTM C 236-66 or
shall be conducted at the settled density as deter-
ANSI/ASTM C 518-76 at the manufacturer’s
mined herein.
option.
4. Resistance to combustion. Flammability character- 3. Resistance to combustion. Flammability charac-
istics shall comply with the standard for flammabil- teristics shall comply with the standard for flam-
ity and smoldering combustion in 44 Fed. Reg. mability and smoldering combustion in 44 Fed.
pages 39966-39973. Reg. pages 39966-39973.
5. Resistance to fungi. Resistance to fungi shall be 4. Corrosiveness. The product shall comply with the
determined according to Method 508 of the March standard for corrosiveness set forth in 44 Fed. Reg.
10, 1975, edition of the Military Standard for Envi- pages 39966-39973.
ronmental Test Methods known as MIL-STD-810C,
except the spore suspensions shall be prepared using 5. Bond strength. The bond strength shall be deter-
distilled water. The core of gypsum wall board shall mined by Test Description Number 3 and the bond
be used as the control. After the test exposure, the shall support a force five times the weight of the
test samples shall show no more fungal growth than sample for one minute.
the control material when examined at 40 times 6. Bond deflection. The bond deflection shall be
magnification. determined by Test Description Number 4 and
shall be greater than 1/60th of the length of the sam-
6. Corrosiveness. The product shall comply with the
ple.
standard for corrosiveness set forth in 44 Fed. Reg.
pages 39966-39973. 7. Air erosion. The air erosion shall be determined
by Test Description Number 5 and shall withstand
7. Odor emission. Odor emission shall be determined an air velocity of 800 ft/min.
according to Test Description Number 3. A detect-
able odor of objectionable nature observed by two or 8. Odor emission. Odor emissions shall be deter-
more of the panel members shall be cause for rejec- mined by Test Description Number 1. A detectable
tion. odor of objectionable nature observed by two or
more panel members shall be cause for rejection.
8. Identification. Each insulation container shall be
marked with the type (pouring or pneumatic), net 9. Fungi resistance. Resistance to fungi shall be
weight and the manufacturer’s recommendations for determined according to Method 508 of the March
installation including minimum thickness, maxi- 10, 1975, edition of the Military Standard for Envi-
mum coverage and settled density to provide the ronmental Test Methods known as MIL-STD-
levels of thermal performance shown. Manufac- 810C, except the spore suspensions shall be pre-
turer’s installation recommendations shall include pared using distilled water, and observations shall
precautions according to the California Electrical be made at seven-day intervals during the 28-day
Code Section 410-66. cycle to determine the minimum length of time
required for fungal growth to appear. Viability of
Insulation which may be used for pressure fill retrofit wall the spore organisms shall be determined by inject-
application shall be marked with the recommended wall den- ing or inoculating a separate bottle of culture

88 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 STANDARDS FOR INSULATING MATERIAL

medium with the spore preparation for each organ- 4. Resistance to combustion. Surface-burning charac-
ism and observing for growth and individual via- teristics of materials with facings and membranes
bility. The back side of 1/2-inch standard intended for exposed applications shall be deter-
commercial grade gypsum wall board grayback mined according to ANSI/ASTM E 84-79 and shall
paper surface shall be used as the control. After the not exceed the following values:
test exposure, the test samples shall be examined at Flame spread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
40 times magnification for evidence of fungal Smoke developed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
growth. The material shall show no more fungal
growth than the control material. Facings and membranes of materials intended for
exposed applications shall be exposed to the flame
10. Test procedures described in Items 5, 6 and 7 are during the ANSI/ASTM E 84-79 test.
not required of products which are installed in such
a manner that physical restrictions imposed by the Insulation blankets not intended for exposed appli-
construction elements preclude any possibility of cations shall comply with the United States General
subsequent delamination, erosion, or dusting and Services Administration insulation standard HH-I-
the product is identified only for such installations. 521F dated September 4, 1980, for flammability and
smoldering combustion testing.
(f) Mineral aggregate in board form.
1. Composition. The basic material shall be mineral in 5. Corrosiveness. Corrosiveness shall be determined
nature, crushed, dried, and graded to the proper par- according to Test Description Number 2. The steel
ticle size and expanded by the application of heat to test plate in contact with the insulation shall show no
form a spherical, cellular type of aggregate. It shall greater corrosion than a steel plate in contact with
be composed of spherical cellular beads of expanded sterile cotton.
aggregate and fibers formed into rigid, flat, rectan- 6. Resistance to fungi. Resistance to fungi shall be
gular units and shall have an integral water proofing determined according to Method 508 of the March
treatment. It shall be clean, dry and free of extrane- 10, 1975, edition of the Military Standard for Envi-
ous material. Fibers shall be evenly distributed and ronmental Test Methods known as MIL-STD-810C
insulation and facings shall be sufficiently coherent except the spore suspensions shall be prepared using
to be unaffected by handling and installation. distilled water. The core of gypsum wall board shall
2. Thermal performance. Determination of the ther- be used as the control. After the test exposure, the
mal performance shall be in accordance with ANSI/ test samples shall show no more fungal growth than
ASTM C 177-76, ANSI/ASTM C 236-66 or ANSI/ the control material when examined at 40 times
ASTM C 518-76 at the manufacturer’s option. magnification.
3. Resistance to combustion. Surface-burning charac- 7. Odor emission. Odor emission shall be determined
teristics of materials with facings and membranes according to Test Description Number 1. A detect-
intended for exposed applications shall be deter- able odor of objectionable nature observed by two or
mined according to ANSI/ASTM E 84-79 and shall more of the panel members shall be cause for rejec-
not exceed the following values: tion.
Flame spread. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 (h) Mineral fiber in board form.
Smoke developed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 1. Composition. The basic material shall be made
Facings and membranes of materials intended for from mineral substances such as rock, slag or glass
exposed applications shall be exposed to the flame processed from a molten state into a fibrous form.
during the ANSI/ASTM E 84-79 test. Insulation shall be composed of mineral fibers with
water resistant binder added and formed into flat,
Insulation boards exclusive of facings and mem-
rectangular units. Insulation boards shall be uniform
branes shall not exceed the following values:
in quality, free from defects, such as broken edges,
Flame spread. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 splits or loose materials which would impair its
Smoke developed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 intended use.
(g) Mineral fiber in blanket form. Roof insulation boards shall have either integral
1. Composition. The basic material shall be fibers waterproofing treatment or a waterproof coating on
made from mineral substances such as rock, slag or one surface. The coating shall be flush with the
glass processes from a molten state into fibrous edges of the sides and may be flush with or extend
form. over both ends.
2. Thermal performance. Determination of the ther- 2. Thermal performance. Determination of the ther-
mal performance shall be in accordance with ANSI/ mal performance shall be in accordance with ANSI/
ASTM C 177-76, ANSI/ASTM C 236-66 or ANSI/ ASTM C 177-76, ANSI/ASTM C 236-66 or ANSI/
ASTM C 518-76 at the manufacturer’s option. ASTM C 518-76 at the manufacturer’s option.
3. Size. The thickness shall be determined according to 3. Resistance to combustion. Surface-burning charac-
ANSI/ASTM C 167-64. teristics of materials with facings and membranes

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 89

STANDARDS FOR INSULATING MATERIAL

intended for exposed applications shall be deter- vide the levels of thermal performance shown.
mined according to ANSI/ASTM E 84-79 and shall Manufacturer’s installation recommendations shall
not exceed the following values: include precautions according to the California
Flame spread. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Electrical Code Section 410-66.
Smoke developed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 Products which may be used for pressure fill retrofit wall
Facings and membranes of materials intended for application shall be marked with the recommended wall den-
exposed applications shall be exposed to the flame sity to prevent settling and separately marked with the tested
during the ANSI/ASTM E 84-79 test. thermal performance for such applications.
Insulation boards exclusive of facings and mem- (j) Perlite in loose fill form.
branes shall not exceed the following values: 1. Composition. Expanded perlite loose fill insulation
Flame spread. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 shall be produced by the expanding of natural perlite
Smoke developed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 or by heating.
(i) Mineral fiber in loose fill form. 2. Thermal performance. Determination of the ther-
1. Composition. Mineral fiber insulation shall be mal performance shall be in accordance with ANSI/
made from mineral substances such as rock, slag or ASTM C 177-76, ANSI/ASTM C 236-66 or ANSI/
glass processed from a molten state into fibrous ASTM C 518-76 at the manufacturer’s option.
form. The insulation shall be mechanically pro- 3. Density. Density shall be determined according to
cessed to produce a mineral fiber suitable for pneu- installed design density. All tests except the ANSI/
matic or poured application. ASTM E 84-79 test shall be conducted at the
2. Thermal performance. Determination of the ther- installed design density.
mal performance shall be in accordance with ANSI/ 4. Resistance to combustion. Resistance to combus-
ASTM C 177-76, ANSI/ASTM C 236-66 or ANSI/ tion shall be determined by the use of the Attic Floor
ASTM C 518-76 at the manufacturer’s option. Radiant Panel Test, as described in the United States
3. Density. The density shall be determined according General Services Administration insulation standard
to installed design density. All tests shall be con- HH-I-515D Section 3.1.9 as amended October 11,
ducted at the installed design density. 1979.
4. Resistance to combustion. Loose fill insulation 5. Identification. Each insulation container shall be
shall comply with the United States General Ser- marked with the type (pouring or pneumatic), the net
vices Administration insulation standard HH-I- weight and the manufacturer’s recommendations for
1030B dated August 12, 1980, for flammability and installation including minimum thickness, maxi-
smoldering combustion testing. mum coverage and installed design density to pro-
vide the levels of thermal performance shown.
5. Corrosiveness. Corrosiveness shall be determined Manufacturer’s installation recommendations shall
according to Test Description Number 2. The steel include precautions according to the 1993 National
plate in contact with the insulation shall show no Electrical Code Section 410-66.
greater corrosion than a steel plate in contact with
sterile cotton. Products which may be used for pressure fill retrofit wall
application shall be marked with the recommended wall den-
6. Resistance to fungi. Resistance to fungi shall be
sity to prevent settling and separately marked with the tested
determined according to Method 508 of the March
thermal performance for such applications.
10, 1975, edition of the Military Standard for Envi-
ronmental Test Methods known as MIL-STD-810C, (k) Polystyrene in board form.
except the spore suspensions shall be prepared using 1. Composition. Insulation board shall be formed by
distilled water. The core of gypsum wall board shall the expansion of polystyrene resin beads or granules
be used as the control. After the test exposure, the in a mold or the insulation board shall be formed by
test samples shall show no more fungal growth than the expansion of polystyrene base resin in an extru-
the control material when examined at 40 times sion process. The insulation shall be uniformly
magnification. fused, homogeneous, and essentially unicellular.
7. Odor emission. Odor emission shall be determined Insulation board shall be uniform in physical proper-
according to Test Description Number 1. A detect- ties and reasonably free of voids or accumulations of
able odor of objectionable nature observed by two or unexpanded material, foreign inclusions, broken
more of the panel members shall be cause for rejec- corners and broken edges.
tion. 2. Thermal performance. Determination of the ther-
8. Identification. Each insulation container shall be mal performance shall be in accordance with ANSI/
marked with the type (pouring or pneumatic), the net ASTM C 177-76, ANSI/ASTM C 236-66 or ANSI/
weight and the manufacturer’s recommendations for ASTM C 518-76 at the manufacturer’s option. All
installation including minimum thickness, maxi- foam insulation materials using materials other than
mum coverage and installed design density to pro- air or pentane as an expanding agent shall either sep-

90 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 STANDARDS FOR INSULATING MATERIAL

arately condition samples at 73.4° ± 3.6°F and a rel- percent or (2) warping or cupping exceeds 1/4 inch
ative humidity of 50 ± 5 percent, and at 140°F dry when checked by a straight edge across raised diag-
heat and test at 30-, 60- and 90-day intervals or shall onal corners.
test samples certified by an approved testing labora- (l) Polyurethane and polyisocyanurate in board form
tory to have been aged while exposed to free air in a and field applied.
well ventilated room for at least two years at 70° ±
10°F, provided, however, that until 21/2 years after 1. Composition. The manufacture of the insulation
the adoption of these quality standards by the Com- shall be based mainly on the reaction of an organic
mission, test samples may be aged for six months for polyisocyanate with a polyol resin.
certification of the material. Board shall be of uniform texture, reasonably free
Notwithstanding any other provision of this article, from accumulation of unexpanded material and for-
this thermal performance standard shall not take eign inclusions, and reasonably free of broken edges
effect until 250 days after adoption. If the certifica- and corners. It shall be reasonably free from holes,
tion statement submitted pursuant to Section 1555 of voids, depressions and objectionable odor. Lami-
this article does not include test results for thermal nated composite boards shall be included in this
performance, the manufacturer shall submit a new quality standard. The faces of laminated boards shall
certification statement which includes such test adhere firmly throughout to the foam, and shall
results prior to 250 days after adoption. If the latest show no excessive amounts of slits, voids or depres-
certification statement is based on the six-month sions.
aging test, a new statement, based upon the two-year 2. Thermal performance. Determination of the ther-
aging test or the accelerated aging test shall be sub- mal performance shall be in accordance with ANSI/
mitted by 21/2 years after the adoption date. ASTM C 177-76, ANSI/ASTM C 236-66 or ANSI/
3. A. Resistance to combustion. The material shall be ASTM C 518-76 at the manufacturer’s option. All
tested to meet the requirements of Sections foam insulation materials using materials other than
2602.1-2602.6 of the 1994 Uniform Building air or pentane as an expanding agent shall either sep-
Code, with the additional provision that the sur- arately condition samples at 73.4° ± 3.6°F and a rel-
face-burning characteristics shall be determined ative humidity of 50 ± 5 percent, and at 140°F dry
according to ANSI/ASTM E 84-79 and shall not heat and test at 30-, 60- and 90-day intervals or shall
exceed the following values: test samples certified by an approved testing labora-
tory to have been aged while exposed to free air in a
Flame spread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 well ventilated room for at least two years at 70° ±
Smoke developed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 10°F, provided, however, that until 21/2 years after
B. This subsection shall not apply to any product the adoption of these quality standards by the Com-
recognized by the International Conference of mission, test samples may be aged for six months for
Building Officials, as of the date of adoption of certification of the material.
these regulations, as complying with Sections Notwithstanding any other provision of this article,
2602.1-2602.6 of the 1994 Uniform Building this thermal performance standard shall not take
Code based solely upon diversified testing. The effect until 250 days after adoption. If the certifica-
manufacturer of any product which is recognized tion statement submitted pursuant to Section 1555 of
by the International Conference of Building Offi- these regulations does not include test results for
cials, subsequent to the date of approval of these thermal performance, the manufacturer shall submit
regulations, as complying with Sections 2602.1- a new certification statement which includes such
2602.6 of the 1994 Uniform Building Code based test results prior to 250 days after adoption. If the
solely upon diversified testing, may petition the latest certification statement is based on the six-
Commission for an exemption of that product month aging test, a new statement, based upon the
from the provisions of this subsection. two-year aging test or the accelerated aging test
4. Dimensional stability. All foamed polystyrene shall be submitted by 21/2 years after the adoption
insulation materials which are factory formed shall date.
be tested for dimensional stability in accordance 3. Dimensional stability. All foamed polyurethane
with Procedures E and G of ASTM D 2126-75 with and polyisocyanurate insulation materials which are
the following exceptions: (a) sample size shall be 12 factory formed shall be tested for dimensional sta-
inches by 12 inches ± 1 inch, and (b) samples shall bility in accordance with Procedures E and G of
be tested as manufactured with or without facers. ASTM D 2126-75 with the following exceptions: (a)
The average percent change in length or width sample size shall be 12 inches by 12 inches ± 1 inch
shall not exceed ± 2 percent in 24 hours or ± 4 per- and (b) samples shall be tested as manufactured with
cent in seven days. The average percent change in or without facers.
thickness shall not exceed ± 10 percent in seven The average percent change in length or width
days. Samples shall be regarded as failing if: (1) shall not exceed ± 2 percent in 24 hours or ± 4 per-
delamination area of “faced” samples exceeds 25 cent in seven days. The average percent change in

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 91

STANDARDS FOR INSULATING MATERIAL

thickness shall not exceed ± 10 percent in seven the ANSI/ASTM E 84-79 and shall not exceed
days. Samples shall be regarded as failing if: (1) the following values:
delamination area of “faced” samples exceeds 25 Flame spread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
percent or (2) warping or cupping exceeds 1/4 inch Smoke developed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
when checked by a straight edge across raised diag-
onal corners. Test specimens shall be aged for 45 days at 70°F
± 5°F and 35 to 40 percent relative humidity
4. Resistance to combustion. before testing.
A. The material shall be tested to meet the require- D. Free formaldehyde content of dry foam. The
ments of Sections 2602.1-2602.6 of the 1994 free formaldehyde content of the dry foam shall
Uniform Building Code, with the additional pro- be less than 0.01 percent formaldehyde by weight
vision that the surface-burning characteristics when tested as specified in paragraph (f) (8), pub-
shall be determined according to ANSI/ASTM E lished in 45 Fed. Reg. page 63801, except that the
84-79 and shall not exceed the following values: specimens to be tested shall also be aged for 56
Flame spread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 days at 24 ± 5°C (75 ± 10°F) and 50 ± 10 percent
Smoke developed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 relative humidity in an uncovered beaker.
B. This subsection shall not apply to any product E. Corrosiveness. The material shall be tested and
recognized by the International Conference of shall meet the criteria for corrosiveness as speci-
Building Officials, as of the date of adoption of fied in 45 Fed. Reg. pages 63786-63810.
this article, as complying with Sections 2602.1- F. Density. The material shall be tested and shall
2602.6 of the 1994 Uniform Building Code based meet the criteria for density as specified in 45
solely upon diversified testing. The manufacturer Fed. Reg. pages 63786-63810.
of any product which is recognized by the Inter- G. Shrinkage. The material shall be tested and meet
national Conference of Building Officials, subse- the criteria for shrinkage as specified in 45 Fed.
quent to the date of approval of these regulations, Reg. pages 63786-63810, except that the material
as complying with Sections 2602.1-2602.6 of the shall not shrink more than 2.0 percent in any
1994 Uniform Building Code based solely upon direction.
diversified testing, may petition the Commission
for an exemption of that product from the provi- H. Volume resistivity. The material shall be tested
sions of this subsection. and meet the criteria for volume resistivity as
specified in 45 Fed. Reg. pages 63786-63810.
5. Identification. Foam containers shall state the con-
ditions of proper storage. I. Identification. Resin and foaming agent contain-
ers shall be marked with conditions of proper stor-
(m) Urea formaldehyde foam field applied. age and the derated R-value and shrinkage of the
1. Limitation on sale. Urea formaldehyde foam is prepared foam as certified by the manufacturer.
unsafe for use as insulation. Sale within the State of J. Safety information. Installers of urea formalde-
California of urea formaldehyde foam insulation is hyde foam insulation shall present the following
prohibited. safety notice to the purchasers of the foam prior
2. Exemption. Notwithstanding any other provision of to the signing of the contract for installation. The
this article, a manufacturer of the primary compo- notice shall be printed in a minimum of 8-point
nents of urea formaldehyde foam insulation may type size. One copy of the notice signed by the
apply for certification as provided in Section 1555 purchaser shall be immediately given to the pur-
of this article. Such certification statement shall chaser, one copy shall be retained by the installer
indicate compliance with the following standards: and one copy shall be mailed by the installer to
the Executive Director of the Energy Commis-
A. Composition. The material shall consist of cellu- sion within 48 hours after installation of the insu-
lar plastic generated in a continuous stream by lation is completed.
mixing the components which are a urea formal-
dehyde resin, air and a foaming agent. The mate- Manufacturers shall make all sales of urea foam insulation
rial shall be suitable for filling closed cavities components expressly subject to the application restrictions
through small holes and suitable also for filling listed in the notice described below.
open cavities by trowelling during foaming prior
to enclosure.
UREA FORMALDEHYDE FOAM
B. Thermal performance. The effective thermal INSULATION SAFETY NOTICE
performance, incorporating a derating value, The Federal Panel on Formaldehyde has concluded that form-
shall be determined according to the method aldehyde should be presumed to pose a carcinogenic (cancer)
described in 42 Fed. Reg. pages 55143-55148. risk for humans. Formaldehyde gas may also cause eye, nose,
C. Resistance to combustion. Surface-burning and throat irritation, coughing, shortness of breath, skin irrita-
characteristics shall be determined according to tion, nausea, headaches, and dizziness. People with respira-

92 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 STANDARDS FOR INSULATING MATERIAL

tory problems or allergies may suffer more serious reactions, Application of this product is restricted to exterior side-
especially people allergic to formaldehyde. Women who are walls in both residential and commercial/industrial buildings.
pregnant or planning to become pregnant should not be A 4-mil thickness plastic polyethylene vapor barrier, or
exposed to this product. equivalent plastic sheeting vapor barrier, shall be installed
The symptoms may appear immediately or not until between the urea formaldehyde foam insulation and the inte-
months after installation. rior space of the home or building in all applications.
This product may release formaldehyde gas into your If you have health concerns, call your doctor. Also, call
home or building over a long period of time. In some the installer or manufacturer of the material.
instances the formaldehyde gas cannot be controlled by venti-
lation or other means.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 93

STANDARDS FOR INSULATING MATERIAL

3. Severability of provisions. If any provision of Sec- APPROVAL OF TESTING LABORATORIES

tion 1553 (m) (1) or (2), or the application thereof to Sec. 12-13-1554.
any person or circumstances, is held invalid, the
remaining provisions, or the application of such pro- (a) Except as provided in subsection (b), laboratories shall
visions to other persons or circumstances, shall not be approved using the procedures described in the Criteria for
be affected thereby. the Approval of Testing Laboratories, dated October 27, 1978.
The Executive Director shall approve any laboratory that meets
(n) Vermiculite in loose fill form. the standards described in the Criteria for the Approval of Test-
1. Composition. Vermiculite loose fill insulation shall ing Laboratories, dated October 27, 1978. A testing laboratory
be produced by the expanding or exfoliating of natu- shall have the right to appeal to the full Commission any denial
ral vermiculate or by grading and heating. of approval by the Executive Director.
2. Thermal performance. Determination of the ther- (b) Up to and including September 30, 1982, laboratories
mal performance shall be in accordance with ANSI/ shall be approved either upon accreditation by the United
ASTM C 177-76, ANSI/ASTM C 236-66 or ANSI/ States Department of Commerce National Voluntary Labora-
ASTM C 615-76 at the manufacturer’s option. tory Accreditation Program or as stated in the preceding para-
3. Density. Density shall be determined according to graph, at the manufacturer’s option. After September 30,
installed design density. All tests except the ANSI/ 1982, laboratories shall only be approved upon accreditation
ASTM E 84-79 test shall be conducted at the by the United States Department of Commerce National Vol-
installed design density. untary Laboratory Accreditation Program.
Authority: Section 25218(e), Public Resources Code.
4. Resistance to combustion. Resistance to combus-
Reference: Sections 25915(a) and 25921, Public Resources Code.
tion shall be determined by the use of the Attic Floor
HISTORY:
Radiant Panel Test, as described in the United States
1. Amendment filed 8-10-81, designated effective 9-22-81 (Register 81,
General Services Administration insulation standard No. 33).
HH-I-515D as amended October 11, 1979.
5. Identification. Containers of vermiculite shall be
marked with the type (pouring or pneumatic), the net CERTIFICATION
weight and the manufacturer’s recommendations for Sec. 12-13-1555.
installation including minimum thickness, maxi-
(a) No insulating material shall be sold or installed in Cal-
mum coverage and installed design density to pro-
ifornia on or after September 22, 1981, unless the manufac-
vide the levels of thermal performance shown.
turer has certified that the material complies with the
Manufacturer’s installation recommendations shall
provisions of this article.
include precautions according to the California
Electric Code Section 410-66. (b) The manufacturer shall submit a certification statement
to the Executive Director for each type of insulating material.
Products which may be used for pressure fill retrofit wall
Such statement shall contain the following information:
application shall be marked with the recommended wall den-
sity to prevent settling and separately marked with the tested 1. Name of the manufacturer.
thermal performance for such applications. 2. A description of the type of insulating material
Authority: Sections 25402(a) and 25920, Public Resources Code. being certified in sufficient detail to permit its iden-
Reference: Sections 25920-25922, Public Resources Code. tification. The description may include information
HISTORY: sheets, brochures, a sample label for the product or
1. Amendment of subsection (a) (9) filed 4-2-79; effective thirtieth day similar information.
thereafter (Register 79, No. 14).
3. Test results from an approved laboratory.
2. Editorial correction of subsection designations with subsection (l) (4)
(Register 79, No. 17). 4. A description of the basis for ensuring that all the
3. Amendment filed 8-10-81; designated effective 9-22-81 (Register 81, insulating material of the type being certified com-
No. 33). plies with the requirements of this article. Such
4. New subsection (m) (2) (J) filed 9-11-81; effective thirtieth day there- description shall include, but not be limited to a
after (Register 81, No. 37). description of the frequency of testing of the mate-
5. Editorial correction of subsection (k) (3) (B) filed 1-13-82 (Register rial, the quality assurance program, and any third-
82, No. 3).
party inspections or testing used by the manufac-
6. Amendment of subsections (a) (5) and (a) (8) filed 5-5-82; effective
thirtieth day thereafter (Register 82, No. 19).
turer.
7. Editorial correction of subsection (m) printing error (Register 82, No. 5. A declaration that the insulating material complies
44). with the requirements of this article.
6. The wording of the certification seal, if such seal
consists of a statement pursuant to Section 1557 (b)
(2) of this article.
(c) Every certification statement shall be dated and signed
by the manufacturer attesting to its truth and accuracy. Where

94 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 STANDARDS FOR INSULATING MATERIAL

the manufacturer is either a corporation or a business associa- (c) Any representation of thermal performance which
tion, the certification statement shall be dated, signed and appear on any label, literature, advertising or any other writ-
attested to by a responsible official thereof. ing intended for the public shall be consistent with the certifi-
(d) Within 45 days after receipt of a certification state- cation testing results and derating required by this article.
ment, the Executive Director shall forward, to the manufac- (d) Any insulation with facings and membranes for which
turer, an acknowledgment that the statement has been the flame spread exceeds 25 when tested with facings and
received and that it is complete and accurate on its face. membranes exposed to the flame during the ANSI/ASTM E
(e) Certification of the insulation material shall be deemed 84-79 test must be clearly labeled with a statement that the
to occur upon forwarding of the acknowledgement by the product may be highly combustible if used in an exposed
Executive Director. If acknowledgment is not forwarded in a application. This subsection shall not apply to any product
timely manner, certification shall be deemed to occur on the meeting the requirements of Sections 2602.1-2602.6 of the
45th day after receipt of the certification statement. 1994 Uniform Building Code.
Authority: Section 25218(e), Public Resources Code.
(f) The statement of test results required in the certification
may be based upon tests conducted prior to the adoptive date Reference: Section 25921, Public Resources Code.
of this article if: (1) the same test was conducted within two HISTORY:
years of the date of adoption, (2) the laboratory at which the 1. Amendment of subsections (a) and (c) filed 8-10-81; designated
effective 9-22-81 (Register 81, No. 33).
tests were conducted has been approved for those tests as of
the date of the certification statement, and (3) the laboratory
certifies that the test and product are the same as the test and INSPECTIONS
product referred to in the statement of test results. Sec. 12-13-1558.
Authority: Section 25218(e), Public Resources Code. After September 22, 1981, the Commission may, upon the con-
Reference: Sections 25921 and 25921.1, Public Resources Code. sent of the owner or lessee, or upon securing a search warrant,
HISTORY: have access, during normal working hours, to the premises of
1. Amendment of subsections (a), (b) (4), (b) (6) and (f) filed 8-10-81; manufacturers, distributors and retailers of insulating material
designated effective 9-22-81 (Register 81, No. 33).
sold for installation within the state for the purpose of deter-
mining compliance with the standards promulgated pursuant to
QUALITY ASSURANCE (Reserved) Chapter 10.5 of the California Public Resources Code. Such
Sec. 12-13-1556. access shall be for the purposes of obtaining representative
Authority: Section 25218 (e), Public Resources Code. samples of subject insulation and inspecting records and docu-
Reference: Section 25921.1, Public Resources Code. ments pertaining to tests by approved testing labs.
HISTORY: Authority: Section 25218 (e), Public Resources Code.
1. Repealer filed 8-10-81; designated effective 9-22-81 (Register 81, Reference: Section 25926, Public Resources Code.
No. 33).
HISTORY:
1. Amendment filed 8-10-81; designated effective 9-22-81 (Register 81,
IDENTIFICATION No. 33).
Sec. 12-13-1557.
(a) Except as specified in subsection (b), Item 3, of this PERFORMANCE TESTS
section, no insulation shall be sold in California on or after Sec. 12-13-1559.
September 22, 1981, unless the insulating material, container,
The Commission may conduct, or may contract with others to
bundle or similar packaging material bears a visible Commis-
conduct, independent performance tests of representative
sion approved statement certifying that a representative sam-
samples of insulation sold in the state to determine compli-
ple of the insulation material has been tested and approved by
ance with standards adopted pursuant to Chapter 10.5 of the
an approved laboratory and complies with the requirements
California Public Resources Code. Such tests shall form the
of this article.
basis for instituting enforcement proceedings.
(b) The Commission-approved statement shall consist of Authority: Section 25218 (e), Public Resources Code.
either:
Reference: Section 25926, Public Resources Code.
1. A design or statement approved by the Executive HISTORY:
Director, or 1. Amendment filed 8-10-81; designated effective 9-22-81 (Register 81,
2. An identification of the manufacturer and any state- No. 33).
ment that the material meets the quality standards of
the State of California. COSTS OF INSPECTION AND TESTING (Reserved)
3. A statement that the material meets the quality stan- Sec. 12-13-1560.
dards of the State of California included in the bill of Authority: Section 25218 (e), Public Resources Code.
lading shall meet the requirements of this section only Reference: Section 25926, Public Resources Code.
if the product is being shipped in bulk, or the container HISTORY:
or product is not otherwise labeled by the manufac- 1. Repealer filed 8-10-81; designated effective 9-22-81 (Register 81,
turer and the product is being sold to its ultimate user. No. 33).

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 95

STANDARDS FOR INSULATING MATERIAL

ENFORCEMENT (Reserved) installed design density per square foot at the manufacturer’s
Sec. 12-13-1561. labeled R-value.
Authority: Section 25218 (e), Public Resources Code. (b) Water heater insulation kits. No water heater insula-
Reference: Section 25931, Public Resources Code.
tion kit shall be sold, on or after March 25, 1982, unless it has
a thermal resistance of at least R-6 and is so identified.
HISTORY:
1. Repealer filed 6-26-79; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 79, Each water heater insulation kit sold shall include instruc-
No. 26). tions which are equivalent to the Department of Energy stan-
dard practice for the installation of insulation on gas-fired,
oil-firedand electric resistance water heaters, 44 Fed. Reg.
RELEASE OF INFORMATION pages 64703-64705.
Sec. 12-13-1562. Authority: Section 25922, Public Resources Code.
Reference: Section 25922, Public Resources Code.
Persons submitting information to the Commission who wish
HISTORY:
information to be kept confidential shall comply with the pro-
1. Amendment filed 8-10-81; designated effective 9-22-81 (Register 81,
visions of Sections 2501-2511 of the Public Resources Code. No. 33).
Authority: Section 25218(e), Public Resources Code. 2. Editorial correction of subsection (a) filed 1-13-82 (Register 82, No. 2).
Reference: Sections 25223 and 25921.1, Public Resources Code.
HISTORY:
INTERPRETATION
1. Amendment filed 8-10-81; designated effective 9-22-81 (Register 81,
No. 33). Sec. 12-13-1565.
The General Counsel of the Commission shall make a deter-
mination as to the application or interpretation of any provi-
LIABILITY sion of this article to any person requesting such a
Sec. 12-13-1563. determination. Any such request shall be submitted in writing
Nothing in this article shall be construed as imposing respon- to the Commission. The Commission shall make written
sibility on manufacturers for misuse of properly labeled insu- replies to such inquiries and shall widely publish interpreta-
lation. tions that have broad application or interest.
Authority: Section 25218 (e), Public Resources Code.
Authority: Section 25218(e), Public Resources Code.
Reference: Sections 25920 and 25922, Public Resources Code.
Reference: Sections 25926 and 25931, Public Resources Code.
HISTORY:
HISTORY: 1. Amendment filed 8-10-81; designated effective 9-22-81 (Register 81,
1. Amendment filed 8-10-81; designated effective 9-22-81 (Register 81, No. 33).
No. 33).

INSULATING EXISTING BUILDINGS

Sec. 12-13-1564.
(a) On or after March 25, 1982, if insulating material is
installed in an existing building, in any of the applications
specified in California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 6,
Section 118, the installing contractor shall certify that the
amount of insulation installed meets or exceeds the require-
ments of Part 6, Section 118 for that application. Such certifi-
cation shall be made on completion of the installation by
posting in a conspicuous location a certificate signed under
penalty of perjury. The certificate shall state the manufac-
turer’s name and material identification, the thermal resis-
tance (R-value) of the newly installed insulation, the
estimated R-value of the original insulation, the total R-value,
and (in application of loose fill insulation) the minimum con-
tractor installed weight per square foot. This installed weight
per square foot shall conform with the manufacturer’s

96 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 CHAPTER 12-16-1

ENGINEERING REGULATIONS—QUALITY AND

DESIGN OF THE MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION

STANDARD 12-16-1
CALIFORNIA STANDARD FOR EARTHQUAKE-ACTUATED AUTOMATIC GAS SHUTOFF SYSTEMS
(See CCR Title 24, Part 2, Chapters 16 and 16A, and CCR Title 24, Part 5, Chapter 12)

DIVISION OF THE STATE ARCHITECT

Authority: Sections 19180-19183, Health and Safety Code.
Reference: Section 19182, Health and Safety Code.

Division 1—CONSTRUCTION
SCOPE
Sec. 12-16-101. The American Society of Civil Engineers
requirements for “Earthquake-Actuated Automatic Gas Shut-
off Devices,” ANSI/ASCE/SEI 25-06 (copyright 2008 by
ASCE), shall be the applicable standard used by the Division
of the State Architect for the certification of these devices.
Sec. 12-16-101.1. Each installation of a customer-owned
device that satisfies this standard must be done in accordance
with the California Plumbing Code (CCR Title 24, Part 5).

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 97

98 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE
 CHAPTER 12-16-2

ENGINEERING REGULATIONS—QUALITY AND

DESIGN OF THE MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION

STANDARD 12-16-2
CALIFORNIA STANDARD FOR RESIDENTIAL EXCESS
FLOW ACTUATED AUTOMATIC GAS SHUTOFF VALVES
(See CCR Title 24, Part 5, Chapter 12)

DIVISION OF THE STATE ARCHITECT

Authority: Sections 19200-19204, Health and Safety Code.
Reference: Sections 19201.5 and 19202, Health and Safety Code.

Division 1—CONSTRUCTION
SCOPE
Sec. 12-16-201. The American Society for Testing and Mate-
rials (ASTM) F2138-12 Standard Specification for Excess
Flow Valves for Natural Gas Service, and the American
National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z21.93-13/CSA 6.30-13
Excess Flow Valves for Natural and LP Gas with Pressure up
to 5 psig, shall be the applicable standards used by the Divi-
sion of the State Architect for certification of these devices.
Sec. 12-16-201.1. Each installation of a customer-owned
device that satisfies this standard must be done in accordance
with the California Plumbing Code (CCR Title 24, Part 5).

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 99

100 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE
 CHAPTER 12-31C

RADIATION SHIELDING STANDARDS

STANDARD 12-31C-1

DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

Authority: Sections 102, 208 and 25811.
Reference: Sections 102, 208 and 436.5.

ALL HEALING ARTS X-RAY INSTALLATIONS

Sec. 12-31C-101. All radiation shielding barriers in rooms
and enclosures housing radiation machines shall comply with
the mandatory standards and appendices in Report No. 35,
“DentalX-RAY Protection”; Report 49, “Structural Shielding
Design and Evaluation for Medical use of X-rays and Gamma
Rays of Energies up to 10 MeV”; and Report No. 51, “Radia-
tion Protection Design Guidelines for 0.1-100 MeV Particle
Accelerator Facilities.” Published by the National Council on
Radiation Protection and Measurements, 7910 Woodmont
Avenue, Bethesda, Maryland 20814.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 101

102 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE
 CHAPTER 12-71

AIR FILTERS

AIR FILTERS
STANDARD 12-71-1

STATE FIRE MARSHAL 3. The differences between these readings and the
readings taken before the test are plotted against
time (the scale being 40 μA and 40 seconds to the
DESCRIPTION OF TEST APPARATUS, inch) with the resulting area under the curve being
METHOD AND CLASSIFICATION measured by use of a planimeter or calculated math-
REQUIREMENTS FOR AIR FILTERS ematically. This area is a measure of the smoke den-
Sec. 12-71-100. sity produced during the test.
(a) Test apparatus. (c) Classification. As a result of the tests, air filter units
are classified as Class 1 or 2 as indicated below:
1. The test duct, made of M.S. gage galvanized sheet
metal reinforced with angle irons, is 21 inches 1. Class 1 air filter units are those which, when clean,
square and 131/2 feet long. do not produce flames or sparks when attacked by
flame and which develop areas under the smoke
2. One end of the duct is tapered to the discharge of a density curves that are less than 1.5 square inches.
variable-speed blower and the other end is open to
discharge. A metal filter frame is provided near the 2. Class 2 air filter units are those which, when clean,
middle of the length of the duct to receive one 20 by burn moderately when attacked by flame or emit
20 inches (nominal) filter unit. Two tightfitting moderate amounts of smoke or both. These units,
doors, located to permit access to the filter frame, although they may be consumed to some extent, do
are each provided with a mica window to permit not project flames or extensive sparks that would
observation of both faces of the filter and conditions ignite adjacent combustible materials beyond the
in the duct downstream from the filter. discharge end of the duct during the test and do not
develop areas under the smoke density curves that
3. Two 1-inch pipe elbows, about 18 inches from the are more than 6.0 square inches.
base of the test filter, form gas burner outlets
adjusted to provide yellow, wavering flames. The (d) Adhesive coatings. Liquid-adhesive coatings used on
burners consume approximately 4 cubic feet filters shall have a flash point of 325°F Cleveland open cup
(approximately 1,000 Btu/cubic feet) of gas per min- tester, or higher.
ute.
4. With the filter in place the air velocity is adjusted to
approximately 200 linear feet per minute as mea-
sured at the discharge end of the duct by an Alnor
Velometer Anemometer.
(b) Test method.
1. Filters are tested clean, that is, unused. The flames
are applied for three minutes during which time
observations are made of both faces of the filter as to
the downstream travel of flame or sparks and the
density, duration and character of the products of
combustion.
2. Smoke density is measured as the drop in light
intensity on a microammeter by means of photoelec-
tric cell mounted a few inches below and about 12
inches inside the discharge end of the duct. The light
source, stabilized for light intensity, is mounted 1
inch above the duct directly above the photoelectric
cell. The microammeter readings are recorded every
five seconds for the first minute and every 10 sec-
onds for the next two minutes.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 103

104 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE
 CHAPTER 12-72-1

PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS, STANDARD TEST PROCEDURES

STANDARD 12-72-1

STATE FIRE MARSHAL (b) Listed devices. Electrical wiring, material, devices,
SCOPE combination of devices, fittings, appliances and equipment
Sec. 12-72-100. which have been tested and listed by an approved listing
agency for the intended purpose and use need not be individ-
(a) Basic. This standard represents the minimum basic ually retested.
requirements for the construction and performance of the pro-
tective signaling systems to be listed under this classification. The report shall include the catalog number or other read-
The minimum design, construction and performance stan- ily identifiable marking, the name of the approved listing
dards set forth herein are those deemed as minimum neces- agency, the laboratory test report number and date. Such indi-
sary to establish conformance to the regulations of the State vidually tested and listed component parts and devices when
Fire Marshal as set forth in the California Electrical Code, installed in combination with other devices in a control unit
and when applicable shall be reported on in their entirety by or in a circuit extended from such control unit shall be sub-
the approved testing laboratory. jected to the performance standard tests to determine its suit-
ability for use in combination with other component parts,
(b) Systems. This standard covers electrically operated devices, circuits or equipment.
devices and control units designed to transmit and sound
alarms, supervisory and trouble signals to be employed in (c) Listed control units. Control units which by their
ordinary indoor locations in accordance with the Standards of design are intended to fully comply with the Standard for the
the National Fire Protection Association for the Installation, Installation, Maintenance and Use of Proprietary, Auxiliary,
Maintenance and Use of Proprietary, Auxiliary and Local Remote Station and Local Protective Association may be
Protective Signaling Systems, Remote Station, Nos. 72A, investigated and tested in accordance with the Standards for
72B, 72C and 72D, and the California Electrical Code. This Safety established by Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc., U.L.
includes combination protective signaling systems employing 864, provided such investigation, test and report incorporates
nonsupervised sounding circuits; combination fire alarm- the provisions of the California Electrical Code.
communication, -program and -clock systems (hereinafter
(d) Rejection for cause. Compliance with these standards
referred to as combination signaling systems); and audible
will not necessarily mean approval and listing, if, when
devices used for both alarm and program or communication
examined and tested, it is found to have other features which
purposes.
may impair the result intended by these regulations. Unusual
(c) Control unit. A control unit covered by this standard constructions may require application of additional perfor-
consists of a unit assembly of electrical parts having provisions mance tests. The State Fire Marshal may refuse to approve
for the connection of power-supply circuits routed through the any item for cause.
control unit equipment by a prescribed scheme of circuitry; sig-
nal initiating circuits extended to separate devices by which the (e) Systems only. The standard applies to protective sig-
operating parts of the control unit are actuated for signals, and naling systems as defined in the California Electrical Code,
to incorporated or separate devices by which the signals are and systems or systems components for which application for
transmitted or indicated to form a coordinated combination approval and listing has been filed under the provisions of the
system for definite signaling service. California Electrical Code.
This standard does not cover manual stations, automatic
detectors, automatic transmitters or other actuating devices;
TEST REPORTS nor does it cover separately listed bells, registers or other
Sec. 12-72-101. indicating devices which are not provided as a part of the
control unit or matched against the output of sound-reproduc-
(a) Test report contents. The report shall include engi-
ing equipment.
neering data, and an analysis comparing the design against
Section 12-72-102 (a) through (u); it shall include wiring, (f) Differing constructions. A control unit having materi-
diagrams, operating manuals and photographs as set forth in als or forms of construction differing from this standard may
Section 12-72-102 (a), Items 5 and 6; it shall set forth the be investigated and tested according to the intent of this stan-
tests performed in accordance with Sections 12-72-103 (a) dard, and if found to be substantially equivalent may be given
through (g) and the results thereof; and shall verify the cor- recognition for approval and listing. The office of the State
rectness of the electrical rating required by Section 12-72- Fire Marshal shall be consulted for general requirements and
107. performance standards.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 105

PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

GENERAL devices which are not necessary for the transmission

Sec. 12-72-102. of a fire alarm signal.

(a) Investigation—Report. (b) Marking.

1. Control units and combination signaling systems
1. A control unit or combination signaling system shall
shall be plainly and permanently marked with a
be so designed and constructed as to be practical,
nameplate bearing the manufacturer’s name, model
reliable and sufficiently durable for its intended
number and electrical rating. Enclosures and cast-
installation and use. It shall be suitable for use with
ings shall have die stamped or cast identifying num-
acceptable actuating and indicating devices which
bers or other readily identifiable markings.
have been found by investigation to be suitable for
Component parts shall be fully described or identi-
use with the control unit or combination signaling
fied by manufacturer’s name and model number.
system. It shall permit its application in conformity
with the regulations set forth in the California Elec- 2. A wiring diagram of the control unit or combination
trical Code. signaling system shall be attached inside the control
cabinet or metalware enclosure.
2. The scheme of electrical or electronic circuiting of a
control unit or combination signaling system shall 3. An audible alarm silencing switch when provided,
provide for the degree of electrical supervision shall be marked to indicate its normal position
required by the California Electrical Code, and unless it is of the automatically restoring type. A
when required, shall ensure emergency operation in permanently attached metal or equivalent sign shall
the presence of a fault condition. bear the following words, “Do not operate the audi-
ble alarm silencing switch until the fire department
3. Attachment plugs, bells, circuit-breakers, cords, has been notified.” The trouble signal silencing
fuse-holders, fuses, lampholders, receptacles, trans- switch, unless of the automatically restoring type,
formers, switches, wires, etc., provided as a part of a shall be marked to indicate its normal on position.
control unit or combination signaling system shall
be investigated and judged under the requirements 4. Terminal connections for the power supply shall be
established by the California Electrical Code, for marked or identified as required by the California
such devices and also with respect to their suitability Electrical Code.
for the particular application. 5. Installation wiring terminals or leads shall be
4. Amplifiers used in the fire-protective signaling cir- marked or otherwise plainly evident.
cuits of combination systems shall be tested in 6. A control unit designed for use with automatic
accordance with UL, Inc. Standard 813 (Second detectors shall be marked for use with nonrestoring
Edition 1954, amended 1966 and 1967), Sound types of detectors only, unless the control unit pro-
Recording and Reproducing Equipment. vides signal lock-in performance required by Sec-
The exchange or replacement of amplifiers from tion 12-72-103 (b), Item 14.
those originally tested with a combination system 7. A control unit designed for use with limited-energy
shall be tested in accordance with UL, Inc. Standard circuits shall be marked to identify the particular cir-
813 and evaluated in accordance with this standard cuits in which the energy is limited.
to determine their suitability for use with the combi-
nation system. 8. The maximum impedance of each actuating circuit
shall be marked when the value for successful oper-
5. The report of investigation shall include schematic ation is less than 100 ohms.
wiring diagrams tracing the electrical or electronic
circuits in their normally supervised and operating 9. A control unit designed to limit the duration of an
condition. Contacts of operating devices shall be alarm signal by means of a time-limit cutout shall be
shown in the normally supervised position with marked to indicate the time for which it is to be
operating and supervisory power supplied to the adjusted; nonadjustable time-limit cutouts shall be
equipment. marked to indicate time at which it will operate. [See
Sections 12-72-103 (l), Items 1 and 2.]
6. The report of investigation shall include photo-
graphs of the equipment with markings identifying 10. Equipment required to be mounted in a definite
the component parts. Operating and maintenance position in order to function properly shall be
manuals shall be included with each control unit or marked to indicate correct mounting position.
combination signaling system and shall be attached (c) Frame, enclosure and metalware.
to the test report and certification.
1. Control units and combination signaling systems
7. The report of investigation shall include an itemized shall be installed in locked substantial cabinets or
list of optional equipment that has, by test, been metalware enclosures and shall be of a type
determined as not required to provide a fire alarm expressly designed for the service for which they are
signal transmission. The report of investigation shall used. Control unit cabinets and combination signal-
include routing of circuits for any equipment or ing system metalware enclosures enclosing alarm

106 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

signaling circuits shall be provided with integral key battery is being charged at the highest rate permitted
locks. by the means incorporated in the unit.
2. Control unit cabinets and combination signaling sys- 12. The interior of the storage battery compartment shall
tem metalware enclosures shall be so formed and be protected against detrimental action by the elec-
assembled that they will have the strength and rigid- trolyte. The compartment shall be so located or
ity necessary to resist the abuses to which they are enclosed that the equipment of the signaling system
liable to be subjected, without adversely affecting will not be adversely affected by battery gases.
their performance, and without increasing fire haz- 13. Ventilating openings shall be screened with wire
ard due to total or partial collapse with resulting screening having wires of not less than No. 16
reduction of spacings, loosening or displacement of AWG, expanded metal mesh or perforated metal of
parts, or other serious defects. not less than 0.042 inch in thickness. No opening in
3. Electrical parts of a control unit or combination sig- wire screening, metal mesh or perforated metal shall
naling system shall be so located or enclosed that exceed 1/2 square inch in area.
suitable protection against accidental contact with 14. A compartment enclosing electrical parts shall not
uninsulated hazardous live parts will be provided. be open to the floor or other support on which the
4. Operating parts, such as gear mechanisms, relays equipment rests.
and similar devices, shall be protected against foul- (d) Protection against corrosion. Iron and steel parts
ing by dust, insects, or by other material which shall be protected against corrosion by enameling, galvaniz-
might impair their operation, by means of individual ing, plating or other equivalent means. This includes all parts
protection or dust-tight cabinets. upon which proper mechanical operation may depend. It does
5. The thickness of cast metal for an enclosure shall be not apply to bolts, screws, washers or similar parts, if corro-
as indicated in Table 12-72-1A; except that cast sion will not impair operation of the equipment. Stainless
metal of lesser thickness may be used if upon inves- steel, polished or treated, does not require additional protec-
tigation it is shown that it has the equivalent tion. Bearings shall be of such design and material to ensure
mechanical strength. against binding due to corrosion.
6. Sheet metal enclosures for a control unit or combi- (e) Insulating materials.
nation signaling system shall be investigated and 1. Base for support of live-metal parts shall be of non-
listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory combustible, moisture-resistant, insulating material
for its intended purpose or use, or shall be not less commonly recognized as suitable for support of
than indicated in Table 12-72-1B. live-metal parts. A base shall withstand the most
severe conditions liable to be met in service.
7. An enclosure shall have suitable means for mount-
ing, accessible without disassembling any operating 2. Bases mounted on metal surfaces shall be provided
part except removal of a completely assembled with an insulating barrier from the mounting sur-
panel such as a relay panel. faces unless all live-metal parts are staked, upset,
sealed or otherwise prevented from loosening to pre-
8. An enclosure cover shall be hinged if it gives access vent parts and ends of terminal screws from coming
to fuses or any other overload-protective device, the in contact with the supporting surface.
normal functioning of which requires renewal, or if
it is necessary to open the cover in connection with 3. Countersunk, sealed parts of control units shall be
the normal operation of the control unit or combina- covered to a depth of not less than 1/8 inch with a
tion signaling system. waterproof insulating compound which will not melt
at a temperature 15°C higher than the normal operat-
9. Enclosure covers accessible for service only may be ing temperature of the assembly. In no case shall
unhinged if, upon investigation, they are found to be such insulating compound melt at less than 65°C.
suitable for the purpose. Unhinged covers shall be
securely held in place by screws or equivalent fas- (f) Mounting parts.
tening devices requiring the use of a tool for its 1. All parts of control equipment shall be securely
removal. mounted in position to prevent loosening or turning
10. Cabinets or compartments for housing of primary if such motion may adversely affect normal opera-
batteries shall be key locked with provisions for pro- tion of the control equipment. A switch, lampholder,
tection against moisture or movement. Metal cabi- attachment-plug receptacle or plug connector shall
nets shall be of approved design constructed of sheet be mounted securely and, except as noted in Item 3,
iron or steel not less than No. 14 manufacturer’s shall be prevented from turning. See Item 4.
standard gage. 2. The requirement that a switch be prevented from
11. Compartments for storage batteries shall have a total turning may be waived if all four of the following
volume not less than twice the volume occupied by conditions are met:
the batteries. Ventilating openings shall be provided, A. The switch is to be of a plunger or other type that
and so located to permit dispersion of gas while the does not tend to rotate when operated (a toggle

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 107

PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

switch is considered to be subject to forces that 2. Except for grounded signaling wheels, bearings,
tend to turn the switch during normal operation of hinges, etc., shall not be used for carrying current
the switch). between interrelated fixed and moving parts.
B. The means of mounting the switch is to make it (j) Supply connections. Control units and combination
unlikely that operation of the switch will loosen signaling systems shall be provided with wiring terminals for
the switch. the connection of conductors of at least the size required by
C. The spacings are not to be reduced below the the California Electrical Code, for the electrical rating of the
minimum acceptable values if the switch does equipment.
rotate. (k) Terminal connections.
D. Normal operation of the switch is to be by 1. Wiring terminals shall ensure thorough connections
mechanical means rather than by direct contact under hard usage. Terminals shall be a suitable pres-
by persons. sure wire connector, firmly bolted or held by a
3. A lampholder of a type in which the lamp cannot be screw, except that for No. 8 AWG and smaller
replaced (such as a neon pilot or indicator light in wires, a wire binding screw having upturned lugs or
which the lamp is sealed in by a nonremovable the equivalent may be used. Alternate: Binding
jewel) need not be prevented from turning if rotation screws without upturned lugs may be recognized
cannot reduce spacings below the minimum accept- when conductors are fitted with mechanically and
able values. electrical secure ring connectors.
4. The means for preventing the turning mentioned in 2. Wire-binding screws not less than 8-32 may be used
Section 12-72-103 (f) is to consist of more than fric- at terminal strips, except that a 6-32 screw may be
tion between surfaces—e.g., a suitable lockwasher, used for No. 14 AWG and smaller wires. Terminal
properly applied, is acceptable as the means for pre- plates shall be not less than 0.050 inch in thickness
venting a small stem-mounted switch or other to provide not less than two full threads in the metal.
device having a single-hole mounting means from Terminal plates of less thickness may be recognized
turning. when the resistance to stripping of the threads is
5. Uninsulated live-metal parts, including terminals, equal to or greater than two full threads in 0.050-
shall be secured by methods other than friction inch-thick terminal plates.
between surfaces, to prevent turning or shifting that (l) Raceways and power-supply cord.
may result in reduction of any required spacings. 1. Control units shall have provisions for connection of
Contact assemblies shall be so secured that align- armored cable or conduit. Combination signaling
ment of contacts will be ensured. systems may be provided with a flexible cord and
(g) Grounding. Cabinets, metalware enclosures and non- attachment cap. The power-supply cord serving the
current carrying metal parts shall be grounded as required by fire alarm signal generator or tone oscillator shall be
the California Electrical Code. Equipment grounded by a Type SJ or equivalent. Strain relief shall be provided
multiple-conductor cord shall have a fixed contacting mem- so that mechanical stress on a flexible cord will not
ber in the attachment plug for connection of the grounding be transmitted to terminals, splices or interior wir-
conductor. The grounding conductor shall be green-identified ing. Power-supply for the signal generator or tone
and shall not be used as a circuit conductor. ascillator provided by a cord shall have an attach-
(h) Operating mechanisms. ment cap with a device to prevent its easy removal
from the receptacle.
1. Parts and motors shall be suitable for the particular
applications and shall be of sufficient mechanical 2. Power-supply for clock, communication or program
strength and capacity to withstand the stresses to systems shall not be supplied from the fire alarm
which they will be subjected in operation without control unit.
introducing any hazard. (m) Internal wiring.
2. Cams, signaling wheels and similar parts shall be 1. Internal wiring of a control unit or combination sig-
fastened to prevent loosening or independent turn- naling system shall consist of suitably insulated con-
ing. Adjustable parts and adjusting screws shall have ductors for the voltage and temperature attained, and
provisions to prevent loosening under conditions of of adequate current-carrying capacity for the ser-
use. vice.
3. Electromagnetic devices shall be designed to pro- 2. All conductors in an enclosure or raceway shall be
vide positive electrical and mechanical performance insulated for the maximum voltage of any conductor
under all conditions of use. in the enclosure or raceway.
(i) Current-carrying parts. 3. Wireways shall be smooth and free from sharp
1. Current-carrying parts shall be of nonferrous metal edges, burrs, fins and moving parts. Holes in sheet
recognized as suitable and of sufficient mechanical metal partitions shall be provided with smooth bush-
strength for the particular application. ings or shall have smooth well-rounded surfaces.

108 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

4. All joints and connections shall be mechanically 2. Transformers connected across a power-supply cir-
secure and shall provide a reliable electrical contact cuit shall be individually housed in noncombustible
without strain on connections and terminals. material.
Stranded conductors clamped under wiring-binding
3. Transformers shall be of the two-coil or insulated
screws or similar parts shall have the individual
type except that an autotransformer may be
strands soldered together or equivalent arrangement
employed provided the terminal common to both
to ensure reliable connections.
input and output circuits is connected to the
5. Wire shall be neatly arranged and routed, and shall grounded supply terminal.
be held in place with clamps, string ties or equiva- (q) Overcurrent protection.
lent unless of sufficient rigidity to retain a shaped
form, placed in spaces affording protection against 1. Storage batteries provided as part of a control unit,
damage during servicing. other than primary batteries, shall be protected by
overcurrent devices having a rating of not less than
(n) Interconnection of units. 150 percent and not more than 200 percent of the
1. Control units and combination signaling systems maximum operating load on the battery.
shall be interconnected by metallic raceway enclo- 2. System control units and combination signaling sys-
sures or armored cable suitable for the purpose. tem control units shall be protected on the current
2. Cords and wires used to interconnect units within supply side by overcurrent devices having a rating
the overall enclosure shall be securely fastened to not more than 150 percent of the maximum normal
the enclosure walls by means of clamps or shall be operating current.
cabled assemblies with strain relief. 3. Transformers shall be protected on either the pri-
mary or secondary side by overcurrent devices hav-
3. In combination signaling systems, the control unit
ing a rating not greater than the continuous duty
audible alarm circuit shall form the alarm signal
rating of the transformer unless the current is limited
interconnection. The audible alarm circuit shall be
to the same value by other acceptable means.
continuous to the terminals of the relay approved for
alarm signaling service for the control unit, except (r) Rectifiers.
that contacts of a combination signaling system
power-supply supervisory relay may be included in 1. Rectifiers used direct shall be approved for the pur-
the circuit. pose and of adequate capacity to maintain voltage
regulation between 100 percent of rated voltage at
4. The alarm signal relay shall be firmly attached to the maximum load and 130 percent of rated voltage at
enclosure and shall be a component part of the com- no load.
bination signaling system unit.
2. A control unit incorporating a battery-charging rec-
5. The interconnection between control units having tifier shall be provided with meters as part of the
nonsupervised audible alarm circuits and the combi- assembly or with readily accessible terminal con-
nation signaling system shall be in duplicate, con- nections for portable meters for determination of
nected alternately to two or more signal relays wired battery voltage and charging current.
in parallel to the oscillator or tone signal relays. (s) Storage batteries.
6. Portions of alarm circuits in combination signaling 1. Storage batteries provided as part of a control unit
system control panels which are not supervised from shall have sealed cells with spray-trap vents. Normal
the contacts of the audible alarm signal relay to the charging shall be by a trickle-charge rectifier. The
oscillator or tone signal alarm relays shall not mounting arrangement shall prevent terminals from
exceed 24 inches in length. They shall be of 600V contacting terminals of adjacent cells or parts of the
insulated wire held in place by clamps or equivalent battery enclosure. The cells shall permit ready
and so located that they will not be subject to han- access for checking the specific gravity of the elec-
dling during use or servicing. trolyte.
(o) Capacitors. Capacitors shall be of materials suitable 2. The conditioning charge shall be so limited that with
for their intended use. A paper capacitor shall be impregnated the maximum charge which can be obtained, the bat-
or suitably enclosed to exclude moisture. It shall not be injuri- tery gases will not adversely affect the control unit.
ously affected by the temperature attained under the most
severe conditions of use. The removal of a capacitor of the (t) Spacings.
plug-in type shall require the use of a tool. 1. A control unit or combination signaling system shall
(p) Coil windings—transformers. provide reliably maintained spacings between unin-
sulated live-metal parts, and between uninsulated
1. The insulation of coil windings of relays, transform- live-metal parts and dead-metal or noncurrent carry-
ers, etc., shall be impregnated or otherwise designed ing metal parts not less than those indicated in Table
to exclude moisture. 12-72-1C and Section 12-72-102 (t), Items 3 and 4.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 109

PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

2. The spaces within devices or assemblies which have (b) Normal operation.
been individually or as assemblies tested and listed
by a nationally recognized testing agency for the 1. A control unit or combination signaling system shall
intended use need not comply with the provisions of operate reliably and uniformly for all conditions of
Table 12-72-1C and Section 12-72-102 (t), Items 3 its intended performance when employed in con-
and 4. The report shall note such devices and assem- junction with actuating devices, indicating devices,
blies by reference to the test report. and power supplies to form a combination type indi-
cated by the wiring diagram and supplementary
3. If a short circuit between uninsulated live-metal information supplied with it.
parts of the same polarity would prevent the normal
signaling operation of the control unit without 2. To determine compliance, actuating devices, indi-
simultaneously producing a trouble signal, the spac- cating devices optional equipment not necessary for
ings between such parts shall be not less than those transmission of a fire alarm signal, and power sup-
indicated for “other parts” in Table 12-72-1C except plies are to be connected to the control unit to form a
in the case of the special devices mentioned in Foot- typical combination, and the control unit operated
note 2 to the table, the spacing between uninsulated for each condition of its intended performance.
live-metal parts of the same polarity, for any poten- 3. A combination signaling system shall be connected
tial of 0-300 volts, shall be not less than 1/32 inch to the intended signal initiating control units and
through air, and the spacing over surface shall be not devices, optional equipment or devices not neces-
less than 1/16 inch unless the smaller over-surface sary for the transmission of a fire alarm signal, sig-
spacings permitted in Footnotes 3 and 4 of Table 12- nal indicating devices (in sound-reproducing
72-1C. equipment the output impedance and matching load
4. Spacings may be reduced provided a barrier or liner combination which produced the maximum input in
of suitable moisture-resistant insulating material of the power- input test is to be used), and power sup-
sufficient mechanical strength to withstand opera- plies, and the equipment operated for each condition
tion of equipment and arcing is used, and is reliably of its intended performance.
held in place.
4. Actuating and indicating devices used for testing are
(u) Speakers—sound equipment. Speakers shall be of an to be those specified by the wiring diagram of the
approved type and designed with current capabilities for the equipment, except that substitute devices may be
intended function and purposes. used if the actuating switching contacts produce
equivalent actuation, and if the indicating devices
produce equivalent signal indication and circuit
PERFORMANCE loading. Acceptable substitute load devices are those
Sec. 12-72-103. found by investigation to produce the same load
(a) General. conditions as the devices intended to be used with
the equipment.
1. The performance of a control unit or combination
signaling system shall be investigated by subjecting 5. The control unit or combination signaling system
a representative sample in commercial form to tests shall be in the normal circuit supervisory condition
described in Sections 12-72-103 (b) through (q). prepared for normal signaling operation by being
Insofar as possible tests are to be made in the order connected to the devices and circuits indicated in
indicated by the following test headings. Sections 12-72-103 (b), Items 1 through 3.
2. A control unit shall be tested in the position in which 6. The operation of any actuating device shall cause
it is designed to be installed for proper function. the equipment to operate the related indicating
3. A combination signaling system console or rack is devices to produce a clearly defined signal of the
to be placed in a position simulating an actual instal- type for which the combination is designed.
lation against a vertical wood wall unless by its 7. A coded fire alarm signal shall consist of not less
design, it is obviously intended for installation in the than three complete rounds of the number transmit-
open. If ventilation openings are provided on the ted.
rear surfaces, it is to be spaced out 1 inch from the
wall. 8. Fire alarm signals in schools emitted by devices not
distinctive in tone or used for other purposes shall be
4. Tests shall be made at rated frequency and voltage. intermittent or continuous sounding signals. The sig-
The rated voltage for test purposes is considered to nal, herein referred to as the California Uniform
be 120 volts for units marked 110–125 volts, or 240 Fire Code Signal, shall be given for a period of ten
volts if marked 220–250 volts. full seconds followed by a silence of five full sec-
5. Control units intended to be energized by trickle- onds before the signal is repeated. The signal shall
charged batteries shall be tested at the rated trickle - be given for a period of not less than one minute.
charge of the battery except for over-and under-volt- Conformance requires signal duration in excess of
age tests. one minute.

110 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

9. Control units or combination signaling systems shall 17. A switch and circuit provided for silencing alarm
have provisions to disconnect time and program sig- sounding devices shall conform to the following:
nal circuits upon initiation of an alarm signal. Resto- A. Switching to the off-normal position shall auto-
ration of time, recall or program circuits shall matically transfer the alarm signal to visual warn-
require manual operation of a resetting device in the ing signal lights which shall not be extinguished
control unit or combination signaling system con- until the system is manually restored to normal.
sole. The resetting device shall be located inside the
locked control panel or console, or shall be key- B. With the system in normal supervisory condition,
operated. A metal sign having the following words switching to the off-normal position shall result
shall be attached adjacent to the switch “Reset in an audible trouble signal.
switch shall not be operated until building has been C. Restoration of the alarm initiating circuit to nor-
determined safe from fire.” The wiring diagram mal supervisory condition shall result in a trouble
required by Section 12-72-103 (b), Item 2, shall signal, unless the silencing switch and its related
include the circuit arrangement. control circuit is of the automatically restoring
10. Combination signaling systems designed for use type.
with a coded fire alarm control unit (control unit of D. The switch shall be located inside of the locked
type other than continuous ringing) shall be pro- control unit enclosure.
vided with an audible alarm signal relay of the lock-
18. Circuits and all related devices of a combination
in type. This may be a latching-type relay or an elec-
system may have their output regulated providing
trical holding circuit.
the minimum setting will allow satisfactory compli-
11. Combination signaling systems designed for use ance to the California Electrical Code, for the total
with a continuous ringing fire alarm control unit number of sound reproducers that may be served by
shall be provided with a California Fire Code Signal the system.
coding device actuated by the audible alarm signal
(c) Power input-sound reproducing equipment.
relay.
12. Combination signaling system using sound-repro- 1. The current or wattage consumption of a combina-
ducing equipment designed to provide an alarm sig- tion signaling system utilizing sound reproducing
nal of distinctive tone used for no other purpose is equipment shall not exceed the marked input rating
not required to provide a coding device. To be con- by more than 5 percent when the equipment is oper-
sidered as distinctive in tone, the frequency should ated under normal conditions while connected to a
be not less than 300 cycles higher or lower than any supply circuit of rated frequency and voltage corre-
other signal (such as a classroom or program signal) sponding to the mean of the marked primary voltage
and shall be an undulating tone swinging not less rating.
than approximately 100 cycles each side of the mean 2. For the test specified in Section 12-72-103 (c), Item
frequency with a pulse rate of not less than 30 per 1, the audio-input connections of each amplifier of
minute. the system are to be connected to an oscillator
13. Combination signaling systems which are so adjusted to supply a 1,000-cycle signal. All volume
designed that they may have the power supply cir- and tone controls are to be at their maximum set-
cuit disconnected or alarm signal output discontin- tings, and normal operating condition is considered
ued without a trouble signal shall have provisions to to be operational with the audio-input-signal poten-
instantly and automatically restore power supply, tial adjusted to produce audio-output rating of the
signal generation and signal output upon actuation amplifier. The tests are to be conducted throughout
of a fire alarm initiating device. the range of impedance taps with load impedance of
the amplifier.
14. The signal indicating resulting from the operation of
a noncode fire alarm control unit by automatic (d) Fire alarm signal precedence.
detectors having self-restoring contacts shall be 1. Control units designed to serve more than one type
maintained automatically by the control unit until a of alarm-initiating device or to utilize the audible
resetting device in the control unit is manually oper- alarm devices for more than one type of signaling
ated. service shall provide priority for manual box signals,
15. Combination signaling systems designed to have the and for fire alarm signals in combination signaling
audible alarm circuit routed through a clock- cross- systems.
connect or pin board shall not, on removal or reloca- 2. A coded system control unit shall be actuated by one
tion of any pin, cause interruption of interference or more initiating devices other than a manual box
with the fire alarm signal. The circuit arrangement and by a manual box simultaneously. The manual
shall be shown on the wiring diagram required by box signal shall take precedence over other signals.
Section 12-72-103 (b), Item 2. 3. Combination signaling system shall be actuated to
16. Normal operation of fire alarm signaling equipment transmit a program or sound signal. A fire alarm ini-
shall not depend upon a ground connection. tiating device shall be actuated while the program or

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 111

PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

sound signal is being transmitted. The fire alarm sig- ductors are installed in a metallic raceway or
nal shall take priority without any interference or equivalent to prevent mechanical injury or tam-
garbling of the alarm signal. Each separate type of pering.
program, or sound signal, including all-call or indi- 2. Electrical supervision of the main source of operat-
vidual room signals shall be actuated without inter- ing power. Supervision of a control unit using a rec-
fering with the fire alarm signal. tifier for battery charging shall include supervision
4. Fault conditions shall be introduced in each piece of of the power supply to the rectifier and the fuse in
optional equipment or device and during such fault the load circuit of the battery.
conditions a fire alarm initiating device shall be 3. Electrical supervision of the power supply to the
actuated. The fire alarm signal shall be transmitted oscillator or tone generator of a combination signal-
without interference or garbling of the alarm signal. ing system when the signal and its related amplifiers
(e) Electrical supervision. are used for normal room signaling service. The
1. Unless otherwise provided, the circuits formed by supervisory circuit may be so arranged as to sound
conductors extended from the terminals of the con- the fire alarm control unit trouble signal.
trol unit or combination signaling system shall be so 4. Electrical supervision of the signal output of a com-
electrically supervised that a trouble signal will be bination signaling system when the alarm signal
promptly indicated upon the occurrence of a signal oscillator or tone generator and its related amplifica-
break or ground fault condition of its circuits which tion devices and circuits are not used for normal sig-
would prevent normal operation of the combination, naling.
control unit, actuating devices and indicating
5. A single break or ground fault in an alarm initiating
devices. Electrical supervision of the main operating
or indicating circuit, or failure and restoration of the
power, power supply to the oscillator or tone genera-
power supply to the control unit, shall not cause
tor shall be provided under the conditions set forth
transmission of an alarm signal.
in Sections 12-72-103 (e), Items 2 through 4. The
above requirements do not apply to the following 6. To determine conformance of a control unit or com-
type of circuits: bination signaling system with the performance and
A. The audible alarm signaling circuits of combina- tests requirements of Items 1 through 5, the investi-
tion signaling system of the clock-bell program gation is to start with the representative system com-
or sound reproducing type, provided all portions bination in the normal supervisory condition
of the circuits are used for normal program or sig- indicated in Section 12-72-103 (b), Item 5; each type
naling purposes not less than once each hour. of fault to be detected shall be separately introduced
in each circuit conductor.
B. Local system circuits intended for use only with
sprinkler waterflow alarm or sprinkler-supervi- 7. If the off-normal position of any normally preset
sory circuits. mechanism or any similar part of the control unit or
control equipment requires manual restoration to
C. Current and circuits for trouble signals. normal position for proper signaling operation of the
D. Current for alternate operation when source of control equipment, such off-normal position shall be
main power supply is interrupted. indicated by a trouble signal. Compliance is to be
determined by observation during the normal opera-
E. Current supply and circuits for supplementary tion test.
signal devices, or optional equipment not neces-
sary for the transmission of a fire alarm signal, 8. While the control unit or control equipment is in the
provided that a break or ground fault will not supervisory condition, any operation of any manual-
affect operation of the system for required fire switching part that may interfere with normal opera-
alarm signals. tion of the equipment of transmission of an alarm
signal shall be indicated by a trouble signal. The
F. Circuit for register or indicating device provided control unit or equipment shall be operated for trans-
as a part of the control unit. mission of signals in each position of the manual-
G. Audible alarm circuits, provided there are suit- switching parts.
able terminal facilities for the connection of (f) Trouble signals. Trouble signals shall be distinctive
either multiple circuits, so that a break or ground from alarm signals, or other communication or warning sig-
fault prevents operation of only one of the cir- nals. They shall be indicated by the continuous sound of an
cuits; or a return loop circuit so that a break or audible trouble signaling device or appliance. The audible
ground fault does not prevent operation of any signal sounding device or appliance may be common to more
alarm signal sounding device or appliance with than one supervised circuit. Trouble signal sounding circuits
means provided for testing the continuity of the may be provided with time limit cut-off devices to provide
circuit conductors. for intermittent operation of the trouble signal device or
H. Circuit for an alarm-indicating device in the same appliance. The time limit device or appliance shall provide
room as the control unit, provided the circuit con- for the continuous sounding of the trouble signal sounding

112 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

device or appliance for a period of not less than ten minutes 3. A combination signaling system shall be set up rep-
followed by a period of silence not to exceed five minutes. resentative of normal service conditions against a
wood panel wall as specified in Section 12-72-103
(g) Trouble signal silencing switch. A trouble signal
(a), Item 3, connected to a supply circuit as indicated
silencing switch shall be provided. Upon operation of the
in Section 12-72-103 (c), Item 1, and operated under
trouble signal silencing switch, the trouble indication shall be
representative normal conditions liable to produce
transferred to a trouble lamp or other approved visual indica-
the highest temperatures.
tor located adjacent to the silencing switch. Operation of the
trouble signal silencing switch shall also remove the time 4. In control units equipped with time-limit cutouts
limit cutout from the circuit. The visual indicator shall remain which are not intended to limit the time of alarm-
in operation until the silencing switch is restored to its normal signal operation, the time-limit cutout shall be
position unless the audible trouble signal will be obtained shunted out of the circuit for the duration of the test.
when a fault occurs without restoring the switch to normal 5. A control unit or combination signaling system
position. The silencing switch and its related control circuit intended to provide impulse signals shall be oper-
may be of the automatically restoring type. ated by a testing device to provide one impulse per
(h) Control unit input and output current and voltage. second, except that if the signal impulses are nor-
mally produced by a device which is a part of the
1. The input or output current of each circuit of a con- control unit or equipment assembly, the test
trol unit shall not exceed the marked rating of the impulses are to be at the rate of normal operation of
control unit by more than 10 percent when the unit is the device.
operated under conditions of normal use.
6. Circuits shall be loaded representative of maximum
2. A limited-energy detector circuit shall conform to load under normal service conditions. Resistors shall
the following: be adjusted for maximum wattage dissipation possi-
A. The open-circuit voltage between any two wiring ble under conditions of normal service.
terminals and between any terminal and a 7. Except for coils, temperature readings are to be pref-
grounded circuit part or noncurrent carrying erably obtained by means of thermocouples. Tem-
metal part shall not exceed 50 volts when the peratures are to be considered as constant when
control unit is connected to a power supply three successive readings taken at intervals of 10
source of rated voltage and frequency. percent of the previously elapsed duration of the
B. Overcurrent protection not in excess of 2 amperes test, but not less than five minute intervals, indicate
shall be provided in such manner that each lim- no change. Temperature rise on coils may be deter-
ited-energy circuit is protected. Current-limiting mined by the resistance method or mercury ther-
transformers may be substituted,provided that mometers.
under condition of short circuit, current flow at 8. Horizontal screened or ventilation openings subject
the terminals will not exceed 2 amperes. to accumulation of dust and lint shall be covered
(i) Jarring. The control unit or control equipment with loose cotton.
installed or supported in the position of its normal use con- 9. Materials of construction and fire hazard to build-
nected to a power supply and in supervisory condition shall ings shall be considered to be adversely affected if
withstand jarring from impact or vibration such as may be the temperature rise exceeds the limits shown in the
experienced in service by striking the enclosure. Striking the following, based on an assumed ambient tempera-
enclosure shall not cause signaling operation of any part nor ture of 25°C:
adversely affect any subsequent normal operation.
A. 65°C on wood panels or other combustible
(j) Temperature. material or surfaces adjacent to or upon which a
1. Materials employed in the construction of a control control unit may be mounted in service.
unit or combination signaling system which have B. 35°C on rubber or thermoplastic insulation.
not been investigated and reported on by a nation-
C. 60°C on varnished cloth insulation.
ally recognized testing laboratory as an assembly in
the form intended for use shall be investigated and D. 65°C on surface of coil winding of impregnated
tested to determine temperature rises that may organic insulation.
adversely affect the materials of construction, nor- E. 125°C on phenolic insulation.
mal signaling operation of the equipment and fire
hazard to building materials. F. 65°C on a transformer enclosure.
2. A control unit shall be mounted on a wood panel G. 65°C on fiber insulation.
representative of its manner of installation in ser- H. 30°C at any point on a copper-oxide rectifier.
vice. It shall be connected to a power supply as indi-
cated in Section 12-72-103 (a), Item 4, and operated I. 50°C at any point on a selenium rectifier.
under representative normal conditions liable to pro- J. 15°C less than melting point of a sealing com-
duce the highest temperatures. pound.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 113

PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

K. Rated temperature limit of a capacitor. intended for schools not less than one full minute of
L. 65°C on fuses. signal transmission as specified in Section 12-72-
103 (b), Item 8, before operation of the time limit
M. 350°C on embedded resistor. cutout.
10. The test-operating condition shall be continued for a 2. Except as specified in Item 1, a bell circuit time-
period of not less than: limit- cutout shall operate in not less than three min-
A. Operation under a normal supervisory condition utes nor more than ten minutes when energized con-
until constant temperatures are attained. tinuously at the maximum rated current value of the
circuit to which it is connected, tested at an ambient
B. Operation for one hour during normal signaling temperature of 25°C ± 2°C.
condition of local system control equipment
designed for actuation by automatic devices. (m) Overload.
Includes control units producing a continuous 1. Under the conditions specified in Items 2 through 4,
signal until actuating device is restored to normal a current-interrupting device provided as part of, or
or until a circuit-resetting device is manually intended for use with, a signaling system control
operated. unit or equipment shall perform in an acceptable
C. Operation for 15 minutes during normal signaling manner during an overload test consisting of not less
condition of a local system control unit intended than 50 make and break operations. There shall be
to be actuated by coded manual fire alarm boxes. no electrical or mechanical failure of the device, nor
D. Operation of a rectifier at its maximum rated out- shall there be any undue arcing, burning, pitting or
put until constant temperatures are attained. welding of contacts.
(k) Over- and under-voltage operation. 2. A control unit or equipment normally supplied from
a grounded circuit shall be tested with all normally
1. The design of a signaling system shall provide that grounded parts and the enclosure connected through
the system will perform its intended function at 85 a 15 ampere fuse to the grounded conductor of the
percent and at 110 percent of rated voltage. The supply circuit.
operating parts of control equipment shall withstand
110 percent of its rated voltage continuously without 3. Current-interrupting devices controlling devices on
injury during the normal supervisory condition. the load side of control equipment power supply ter-
minals shall be tested at 115 percent of rated voltage
2. To determine compliance with the higher voltage with a test load equivalent to that which the device is
specified in Item 1, the signaling system is to be sub- intended to control.
jected to the increased voltage while in its normal
supervisory condition until a constant temperature 4. Overcurrent devices in control equipment which
of all of its parts attained but in no case less than includes motor-driven devices or intended to include
three hours and then tested for all signaling condi- motors on any of its circuits shall be tested under
tions. The unit shall not fail to transmit any required stalled rotor conditions of the motor.
signal. (n) Endurance. An operating device included as part of a
3. To determine compliance with the under-voltage control unit or combination signaling system shall perform
specified in Item 1, the signaling system is to be acceptably when tested at the rate and for the number of
operated in the normal supervisory condition until cycles specified in Table 12-72-1D. When the device controls
constant temperatures of all its parts are attained and an electrical load the contacts shall make and break the nor-
then immediately tested for all signaling conditions mal current the device is intended to control for the number
at the reduced voltage. Reduced voltage is to be of cycles specified. There shall not be any electrical or
achieved by a means that maintains a stable poten- mechanical failure of the device, nor shall there by any undue
tial of the required value under the most severe con- arcing, burning, pitting, or welding of the contacts. The
ditions of normal loading. device shall be tested in conjunction with its related compo-
nents in the assembly by operating the primary actuating
4. Circuits extended from the control unit in which the device to produce the signals.
maximum impedance for successful operation is less
than 100 ohms shall have the maximum impedance (o) Dielectric tests.
connected to its circuits during the under-voltage 1. Except for motors rated at 1/2 hp or less, and 250
test. volts or less, signaling system control units or equip-
(l) Time limit cutout. ment shall withstand, without breakdown, the appli-
cation of a 60-cycle alternating potential of twice
1. A time limit cutout arranged to control the duration
rated voltage plus 1,000 volts for a period of one full
of a continuous alarm signal shall operate within the
minute. The test potential shall be applied to the fol-
range of the time marked for the control unit when
lowing parts:
tested at an ambient temperature of 25°C ± 2°C. A
common coded signal shall complete not less than A. Between all normally ungrounded current-carry-
three complete rounds and a system control unit ing parts and the enclosure.

114 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

B. Between all metal current-carrying parts and ing indicated by the markings on the control unit.
exposed noncurrent-carrying parts. All openings in the enclosure of the control equip-
C. Between all current-carrying metal parts of cir- ment shall be covered with surgical cotton, and the
cuits, including transformer windings, operating enclosure is to be connected to ground through a
at different frequencies of potentials. fuse of the same rating as the protective fuse men-
tioned above.
2. Motors rated less than 1/2 hp and 250 volts shall
withstand for one minute without breakdown, the 6. The open circuit voltage of the test circuit is to be
application of a 60-cycle a.c. potential of 900 volts within 5 percent of the rated voltage; see Sections
between the frame and winding. 12-72-103 (a), Item 4, and 12-72-103 (c), Item 1, of
the control equipment circuit in which the device is
(p) Abnormal operation. installed, except that a higher voltage may be used if
1. A control unit shall be capable of operating under agreeable to those concerned. The source of current
abnormal conditions without emission of flame, and the test circuit should have sufficient capacity to
molten metal or other manifestation of a fire hazard. deliver 1,000 amperes when the system is short-cir-
Excessive temperatures or burnout is indicative of cuited at the testing terminals.
failure. 7. Ignition of the cotton, or of insulation on circuit con-
2. A control unit connected to a supply circuit of rated ductors, emission of flame or molten metal from the
voltage shall have its alarm initiating and audible enclosure, blowing of the fuse in the grounding con-
alarm circuits short-circuited until a constant tem- ductor, damage to other parts of the control equip-
perature is attained, or burnout occurs, unless the ment, or any evidence of a fire hazard is to be
fault results in operation of an overcurrent device deemed as failure. Burnout of pigtail leads or a ther-
which is an integral component part of the unit. mal element, or welding of contacts, is not to be
considered as a failure.
(q) Burnout tests.
1. A continuous-duty resistor shall not burn out or be
adversely affected while carrying the maximum nor- PRINTED WIRING BOARDS
mal load continuously. An intermittent duty resistor Sec. 12-72-104.
shall carry its maximum rated current on any step
for the maximum length of time permitted by limit- (a) General.
ing devices of the unit. 1. These requirements cover printed wiring boards that
2. A transformer operated continuously, at the rated are intended for use in fire protective signaling
voltage and frequency specified by Section 12-72- equipment. The acceptability of the combination of
103 (a), Item 4, with the enclosure grounded and the printed wiring board and the electric equipment
having a load of three times maximum normal load is to be determined by the State Fire Marshal.
current connected to its output terminals shall not be 2. Printed wiring boards conforming to ASTM Grade
adversely affected by injury to the enclosure, nor FR-5 when tested in accordance with ASTM Desig-
shall any emission of flame or molten metal occur. nation D-1867, may be used in protective signaling
3. The testing circuit shall be protected by overcurrent equipment.
devices having a rating of at least ten times the pri- 3. Throughout these requirements, the term “printed
mary current rating of the transformer. Output termi- wiring” is used to designate a pattern of conductive
nals of the transformer shall be short-circuited, if material formed in a predetermined design on the
such a condition results in less than three times the surface or surfaces of a common insulating base, and
maximum normal load current being drawn from the intended primarily to provide point to point electri-
secondary. Tests shall be continued until constant cal connections, shielding or to form inductors. The
temperatures are attained or a burnout occurs. Blow- term “printed wiring board” is used to designate the
ing of the fuse on the primary side of the transformer combination of a printed writing pattern and the
is not considered to be a failure. common insulating base completely processed as far
4. If the circuit designs of a control unit or combination as the printed portion is concerned. The term
signaling system incorporate a time limit cutout or a “printed wiring assembly” is used to designate a
mercury tube switch wired into the system circuit in printed wiring board on which separate components
such a manner that a short circuit or a ground fault have been added.
causes the device to carry current in excess of its 4. Printed wiring boards which do not conform to Item
maximum normal load, it shall withstand the test 3, shall be tested in accordance with the procedures
specified in Items 5 through 7, without introducing a set forth in Sections 12-72-104 (b) through (d).
fire hazard. (b) Insulating material. Insulating material on which
5. The device is to be tested in the control equipment printed wiring is applied shall be suitable for the sole support
as it is intended to be normally used and in series of uninsulated live parts and for the temperature involved,
with a protective fuse of the marked maximum rat- and shall have suitable mechanical strength.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 115

PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

(c) Conductors. allowed to cool to room temperature and then sub-

1. Current-carrying parts of printed wiring shall be of jected to the test described in Item 5 and the average
copper, copper-alloy, aluminum, silver or other strength of the bond determined for each sample.
material having similar corrosion-resisting proper- 8. The use of coatings over printed wiring will be
ties. given special consideration with respect to their
2. Conductor surfaces shall be substantially free of effect on the strength of the bond between the
wrinkles, pits, blisters, corrosion or other imperfec- printed wiring and the insulating material.
tions before and after being subjected to the condi- (d) Dielectric strength.
tions described in Item 6.
1. The average dielectric breakdown potential for six
3. Printed wiring shall be so applied to the insulating samples of printed wiring boards that have been
material that the average strength of the bond conditioned in an air oven for 1,344 hours at the
between the printed wiring and the insulating base temperature determined by the formula in Section
for each individual strip of conductor will not be less 12-72-104 (c), Item 6, shall be not less than 80 per-
than 1 pound per inch of width of the printed wiring cent of the average dielectric breakdown potential
when samples are tested under the conditions for six samples of printed wiring boards that have
described in Items 4 through 7. not been subjected to such conditioning.
4. The samples of printed wiring boards are to be with- 2. The 12 samples may be provided without compo-
out components (capacitors, resistors, etc.) and, nents (capacitors, sockets, resistors, etc.) but are to
except at points where connections are to be made, be samples that have been subjected to the complete
the conductors are to be free from solder. If the nor- production soldering process. The test potential is to
mal production soldering operation results in a coat- be obtained from a suitable transformer, the output
ing of solder on the conductors, the samples are to voltage of which can be regulated. The potential is
be subjected to a simulated soldering operation, to be increased gradually from zero, at the rate, of
using a material other than solder, at the normal sol- approximate 75 volts per second, until dielectric
dering temperature, or an equivalent arrangement, in breakdown occurs. Three different locations on each
order to obtain the same thermal effect on the con- sample, with different spacings between conductors,
ductors. if possible, are to be tested. The locations selected
5. A uniform width of the printed wiring is to be peeled are to be the same for all samples. The average
from the insulating material for a distance of 1/4 inch dielectric breakdown potentials for each group of six
at a uniform rate of approximately 12 inches per samples for each location is to be determined. The
minute, with the angle between the printed conduc- average value for each location for the samples that
tor and the insulating material at not less than 85 have been conditioned is to be not less than 80 per-
degrees, and the force required to separate the con- cent of the average value for the corresponding loca-
ductor from the insulating material measured. Three tion for the samples that have not been conditioned.
determinations are to be made on each of six sam-
ples, and the average strength of the bond for each
individual strip or conductor determined. RELAYS FOR PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SERVICE
6. Following the test described in the preceding para- Sec. 12-72-105.
graph, three of the samples are to be placed in an air
oven maintained at the temperature determined by (a) Test conditions. Relays which have not been qualified
the following expression for 1,344 consecutive as approved for use with protective signaling systems by
hours: investigation and report from an approved listing agency
shall have its suitability for use in a protective signaling sys-
T = 1.02 (R + 15 + 273) – 273, where tem evidenced by an investigation and report by an approved
T = oven temperature in °C. testing laboratory which shall include certification that the
relay conforms to the minimum requirements of the Califor-
R = temperature in °C for which the printed nia Electrical Code. The test report shall include, but is not
material is to be recognized (75°, 90°, 105° or limited to:
125°C).
1. Over- and under-voltage operation per the Califor-
The remaining three samples are to be placed first in nia Electrical Code.
the air oven for 168 hours and then in a moist air
chamber having a relative humidity of 83.5–86.5 2. The insulation of coil windings of relays shall be
percent at a temperature of 30.5°–33.5°C, for 168 such as to resist the absorption of moisture.
hours, and the cycle repeated for a total of 1,344 3. Temperature readings on the coil and insulation
hours (four 168-hour periods in the air oven alternat- under normal operation at a constant temperature
ing with four 168-hour periods in the moist air). (temperature may be considered constant when three
7. After 1,344 hours under the conditions described in succeeding readings at not less than five minute
the preceding paragraph, the six samples are to be intervals indicate no change in temperature).

116 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

4. Overload test consisting of 50 operations at 115 per- switched on and off on a random basis for 500
cent of rated voltage with a test load being that cycles.
which the relay is to handle.
4. Acceptance criteria. There shall be no adverse
5. Endurance test consisting of 40,000 cycles of coded effects on the system combination and the unit shall
or noncoded signal impulses at rated load and volt- operate as intended.
age.
(c) Temperature. A semiconductor shall be operated so
6. Dielectric strength test without breakdown by appli- as to obtain not more than 75 percent of its rated operating
cation of 60 cycle a.c. at twice rated voltage plus temperature during the normal supervisory condition indi-
1,000 volts for a period not less than one minute. cated in Section 12-72-103 (b), Item 5. The rated operating
(b) Acceptance criteria. There shall be no electrical or temperature of a semiconductor shall not be exceeded under
mechanical failure, nor any undue pitting, burning or welding any condition of operation of the complete unit which pro-
of contact during any test. duces the maximum temperature dissipation of its compo-
nents, including the over-voltage test described in Section 12-
72-103 (k), Items 1 and 2, and the variable ambient tempera-
SEMICONDUCTOR TESTS ture test described in Section 12-72-106 (b), Item 1.
Sec. 12-72-106.
(a) General. Semiconductors shall be investigated to ELECTRICAL RATING
determine their suitability for application under all the envi-
ronmental conditions to which they will be exposed in ser- Sec. 12-72-107. The electrical rating of a control unit or com-
vice. bination signaling system shall be marked as provided in Sec-
tion 12-72-102 (b). The following ratings shall be marked on
The performance tests of the complete device are intended the nameplate or may be marked on supplemental labels at
to show the effects of these conditions. The prescribed tests the terminal strips:
may be supplemented where conditions exceeding those rep-
resented by the tests indicated herein may be encountered. (a) Each power supply circuit—the voltage, frequency and
(b) Test procedure. maximum input in amperes or watts.
1. Temperature. The system combination is to be con- (b) Each alarm initiating circuit—maximum current output
nected as in the normal operation test and operated and maximum open-circuit voltage if different than the power
in an oven at 85°C. It is then to be operated in a supply circuit.
refrigerator at 0°C. After temperature equilibrium (c) Each control unit audible alarm or indicating circuit—
has been maintained in both cases, the unit shall maximum current output and the maximum open-circuit volt-
operate as in the normal operation test. age if different than the power supply circuit.
2. Humidity. The system combination is to be con- (d) Each combination signaling system sound reproducing
nected as in the normal operation test, and placed in control audible alarm circuit-output rating in watts.
a humidity cabinet maintained at 85 percent humid-
ity, 32°C, for a period of 48 hours. At the end of this (e) Supplementary—device circuit—maximum current
time, the unit shall operate as in the normal opera- load that may be connected, and the voltage and frequency of
tion test. supply power other than that of the control unit.
3. Transient voltage. The system combination shall be (f) Fuses—maximum ampere rating of the fuse that may
subjected to the transient voltages caused by the col- be installed in each fuseholder provided as part of the control
lapse of the field of a 2-kilovolt-ampere transformer unit or combination signaling system.

TABLE 12-72-1A—CAST-METAL ENCLOSURES

MINIMUM THICKNESS IN INCHES
DIMENSION OF AREA
Die-cast metal Castings other than die-cast
5 1
24 square inches or less, no dimension greater than 6 inches /64* /2
3 1
More than 24 square inches or any dimension exceeding 6 inches /32 /2
1 1
Threaded conduit opening /4 /4
1 1
Unthreaded conduit opening /8 /9
* Suitable reinforcing ribs may subdivide larger areas.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 117

PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

TABLE 12-72-1B—SHEET-METAL ENCLOSURES

MINIMUM THICKNESS IN INCHES*
MAXIMUM DIMENSIONS
Steel
Surface area in Copper, brass
Linear dimension square inches Zinc coated Uncoated or aluminum
0.057 0.054 0.075
24 360
(16) (16) (12)
0.071 0.067 0.095
48 1,200
(14) (14) (10)
0.098 0.095 0.122
60 1,500
(12) (12) (8)
0.127 0.124 0.153
Over 60 Over 1,500
(10) (10) (6)
Note: Numbers in parentheses are the galvanized sheet gage for zinc-coated steel, manufacturer’s standard gage for uncoated steel, American wire gage for
nonferrous metal.
* At areas where armored cable or conduit is to be attached, sheet metal shall be of such thickness or so formed or reinforced that it will have the stiffness
equivalent to uncoated flat sheet steel 0.054 inch thickness; when a supporting frame or equivalent reinforcing by forming or flanging is provided, thicknesses
may be reduced by two gage numbers.

TABLE 12-72-1C—MINIMUM ACCEPTABLE SPACINGS IN INCHES1, 2

AT INSTALLATION-WIRING TERMINALS AT OTHER PARTS
POTENTIAL INVOLVED IN
VOLTS Over the surface of Over the surface of
Through the air Through the air
insulating material insulating material
1 3 1 3 1 4 1 4
0-150 4 / /
4 /
8 /4

1 3, 5 1 3 1 4 3 4
151-300 /
8 /
8 /
4 /8

1 3
4 /
1. Measurements are to be made while wire with adequate capacity for the applied load is connected to each terminal as it would be in actual installation. In no
case is the wire to be smaller than No. 14 AWG.
2. At fixed parts of rigidly clamped special assemblies of live parts and insulating separators (such as contact springs on relays or cam switches) that are wired at
the factory, the spacings may be less than those indicated, but not less than 1/16 inch for 0-150 volts, and not less than 3/32 inch for 151-300 volts, through air
and over surface, except as noted in the following footnotes.
3. Nor less than 3/64 inch through air and over surface for 250 volts or less if the equipment which the component part controls does not consume more than 375
volt-amperes or more than 5 amperes.
4. Not less than 1/32 inch through air and over surface for a circuit involving a potential or not more than 30 volts and supplied by a primary battery or by a
standard Class 2 transformer or by a suitable combination of transformer and fixed impedance having output characteristics in compliance with what is
required for a Class 2 transformer.
5. The spacing through air at installation-wiring terminals may be less than 1/4 inch but not less than 1/8 inch if the terminals are recessed in insulating material or
have insulating barriers so as to confine loose strands of conductors sufficiently to make it unlikely that the terminals will be grounded or short-circuited.

TABLE 12-72-1D—ENDURANCE TEST

TOTAL NUMBER OF CYCLES CYCLES PER
NORMAL SIGNALING PERFORMANCE OF DEVICE
DEVICE TO BE TESTED MINUTE

Continuous noncode signal for each operation of alarm signal initiating device 6,000 6

A number of coded or noncode impulses for each operation of alarm signal initiating device 40,000 60

40,000 —
Preliminary coded or noncode signal impulses followed by continuous signal impulses after resetting of device after 60
each operation of alarm signal initiating device
each group of 40 impulses

Relays 40,000 60

118 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 CHAPTER 12-72-2

PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

SINGLE- AND MULTIPLE-STATION FIRE ALARM DEVICES MECHANICALLY OPERATED TYPE

STANDARD 12-72-2

STATE FIRE MARSHAL nished with the sample submitted for investigation to be used
SCOPE as a guide in the examination and test of the unit and for this
Sec. 12-72-200. purpose they need not be in final printed form.
(a) Basic. This standard represents the minimum basic The instructions and drawings shall include such direc-
requirements for the construction and performance of single- tions and information as deemed by the manufacturer to be
and multiple-station fire alarm devices intended for indoor adequate for attaining proper and safe installation, operation
installation, and to be listed under this classification. The and maintenance.
minimum design, construction and performance standards set (c) Rejection for cause. Compliance with these standards
forth herein are those deemed as minimum necessary to will not necessarily mean approval and listing, if, when
establish conformance to the regulations of the State Fire examined and tested, it is found to have other features which
Marshal. may impair the result intended by these regulations. Unusual
(b) Definitions. For the purpose of this standard, the fol- constructions may require application of additional perfor-
lowing definitions shall apply: mance tests. The State Fire Marshal may refuse to approve
any item for cause. (See the California Electrical Code.)
1. Fire alarm device, multiple station. Two or more
gas-operated single station units interconnected by (d) Devices covered. This standard does not cover electri-
metal tubing to one or more remote alarm-sounding cally operated single- or multiple-station fire alarm devices
devices. actuated by heat, smoke or combustion products.
2. Fire alarm device, single station. A self-contained (e) Temperature classification. The temperature sensi-
fire alarm system comprising a heat detector, an tive elements of single- and multiple-station fire alarm
alarm- sounding device and a stored energy source devices are to be identified as to their temperature of opera-
incorporated in one integral package. The basic types tion as follows:
are gas- operated units and spring-wound units. MAXIMUM CEILING
TEMPERATURE RATING RANGE, TEMPERATURE,
3. Gas-operated type. A device having a temperature- CLASSIFICATION °F (°C) °F (°C)
sensitive eutectic element; compressed gas, usually
in a liquid state in a cylinder; and a sounding means, Ordinary 135-174 (57-79) 100 (38)
such as a horn or whistle. When the eutectic element
melts, the compressed gas is released in a gaseous Intermediate 175-225 (79-107) 150 (66)
state through the alarm-sounding device.
4. Spring-wound type. A device having a tempera- The maximum rating of a fire alarm device is to be not
ture-sensitive bimetal or eutectic element and a more than 225°F (107°C).
spring-wound type mechanism with clapper
mounted within a bell housing. The snap action of (f) Differing constructions. A control unit having materi-
the bimetal or melting of the eutectic element als or forms of construction differing from this standard may
releases the spring mechanism resulting in a bell- be investigated and tested according to the intent of this stan-
type sound. dard, and if found to be substantially equivalent may be given
recognition for approval and listing. The office of the State
Fire Marshal shall be consulted for general requirements and
TEST REPORTS performance standards.
Sec. 12-72-201.
(a) Test Report contents. The report shall include engi- GENERAL
neering data, and an analysis comparing the design against
Sections 12-72-201(b) through 12-72-202(g); it shall include Sec. 12-72-202.
operating manuals and photographs. The report shall set forth (a) Construction.
the tests performed in accordance with this standard and the 1. Unless otherwise indicated, the term “fire alarm
results thereof. device” as used in this standard refers to single- and
(b) Instructions and drawings. A copy of the operating and multiple-station mechanically operated type fire
installation instructions and any related drawings is to be fur- alarm devices.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 119

PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

2. A fire alarm device shall be so constructed that it (f) Mechanical assembly.

will be reliable and durable for the intended installa-
1. Any servicing or restoration operations intended to
tion and use.
be made by the user shall be simple and capable of
(b) Mounting. being accomplished with ordinary tools.
1. A fire alarm device shall be provided with a means 2. A device shall be so constructed that parts will not
for mounting either to a ceiling or wall. become displaced during or after installation.
2. The means for mounting shall not result in any dis- 3. An obstruction means, such as a wire mesh screen,
tortion of the fire alarm device so as to alter its oper- shall be provided to prevent the entry of foreign
ating characteristics. bodies or materials into sounding devices which
(c) Calibration. could prevent their operation.
1. Any means for calibration or adjustment shall be (g) Power supervisory feature. A means shall be pro-
guarded or sealed to prevent manipulation by hand vided on a unit to automatically indicate that operating power
or ordinary tools. A thermal responsive element is not available. The indication may be in the form of a flag,
adjustment, if provided as part of a unit, shall not be target, sight glass, change in mounting position of the fire
capable of being readjusted after shipment from the alarm device or equivalent. A fire alarm device shall be capa-
factory. ble of producing an alarm signal for not less than four min-
2. A calibration means considered to be not accessible utes at the point where the loss of operating power is
or apparent is one not exposed to manipulation by indicated initially. See Section 12-72-203 (l).
tools, or one not readily replaceable. The complete (h) Operating gas.
concealment of tool-engagement means in a screw,
such as a slot, recessed head, etc., by the use of sol- 1. The operating gas employed in a fire alarm device
der or brazing material is considered adequate for shall be noncombustible and shall be of a degree of
the purpose of preventing manipulation or replace- toxicity that will not produce death or serious injury
ment. to guinea pigs during a two hour exposure to the gas
at a concentration of 21/2 percent by volume of air.
(d) Materials.
2. Refrigerants 12 and 22 are commonly used gases
1. A part shall be constructed of materials that are which comply with this requirement.
acceptable for the intended application and shall be
of adequate mechanical strength.
2. Diaphragms and spring parts shall be made of non- PERFORMANCE
ferrous material, such as phosphor bronze, nickel, Sec. 12-72-203.
silver, etc., or of ferrous materials. If ferrous materi-
als are employed, they shall be hermetically sealed (a) General.
or plated so as not to be affected adversely by corro- 1. Representative samples of units in commercial form
sion. shall be subjected to the following applicable tests.
3. A eutectic element, if used as the operating member
2. If a device(s) is required to be mounted in a definite
of a fire alarm device, shall be constructed so as not
position in order to function properly, it shall be
to be affected adversely by conditions to which it is
tested in that position.
likely to be exposed in service, as represented by the
tests described in Section 12-72-203. 3. If a device is normally intended to be connected to
4. All exposed parts likely to be affected adversely by tubing to function, it shall be connected to the maxi-
corrosion shall be protected by enameling, galvaniz- mum length of tubing specified by the manufacturer
ing, sherardizing, plating or equivalent means. unless the length of tubing would not have a bearing
on its operation.
(e) Operating mechanisms.
(b) Determination of spacings.
1. The moving parts of a fire alarm device shall have
sufficient play at bearing surfaces to prevent bind- 1. The sensitivity of a fire alarm device is to be
ing. expressed in terms of spacing limitations. Spacing
limitations refer to the maximum distance permitted
2. The manually operated parts of a fire alarm device between devices mounted on smooth ceilings.
shall have sufficient strength to withstand the
stresses to which they will be subjected in service. 2. Installation spacing limitations of a fire alarm device
are developed by an oven test (15-foot spacing only)
3. A gear train driving spring shall be reliably
or by a fire test. See Sections 12-72-203 (c) and (d).
anchored at each end. The spring winding means
shall be provided with a positive stop to limit the 3. Determination of spacings is obtained by the testing
winding or shall withstand the maximum force of ordinary degree ratings. Devices shall be suffi-
likely to be applied without affecting the operation ciently sensitive to qualify for at least a 15-foot
of the mechanism adversely. spacing limitation.

120 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

4. An ordinary-degree rating, with a spacing of 15 feet, feet, in line with the sprinkler and fire test plan. See
may be tested for sensitivity by being subjected to Figure 12-72-2-2 for layout.
the oven test. See Section 12-72-203 (c), Item 1. If
3. This test is to be conducted in a room having a
the device does not operate within two minutes, a
smooth ceiling with no physical obstructions
fire test shall be conducted.
between the fire source and devices under test and
5. A fire alarm device is not acceptable if it fails to with minimum air movement. The room is to be pro-
qualify for at least a 15-foot spacing, i.e., does not vided for maintaining the room temperature ambi-
operate within two minutes in the oven test, and ent, if necessary. The heaters are to be shut off
does not operate when subjected to the fire test. during a test trial.
(c) Oven test. 4. The room shall be of sufficient cross-sectional area
so that the devices under test are located in accor-
1. A fire alarm device shall operate in a normal and
dance with the spacing layout illustrated by Figure
uniform manner when tested to the time-temperature
12-72-2-2. The reflection of heated air is to be pre-
curve illustrated in Figure 12-72-2-1. A sample shall
vented from returning to the devices under test from
be uniform in operation when mounted in the same
adjacent wall surfaces during the course of the fire
position inside the oven. Operation is considered
test. The room height shall be such that the vertical
uniform if the device operates within a tolerance of
distance from the base of the fire to the ceiling is
15°F (8.3°C) for an ordinary rated unit and 20°F
approximately 12 feet.
(11°C) for an intermediate rated unit. A fire alarm
device which operates within two minutes or less is 5. Fire tests are to be produced by burning denatured
suitable for a 15-foot spacing allocation. alcohol consisting of 190 proof ethanol to which 5
percent methanol has been added as a denaturant, in
2. The test apparatus consists of a full draft circulating
steel pans of a size necessary to produce a tempera-
air oven capable of producing the time-temperature
ture rise sufficient to operate the automatic sprin-
curve illustrated in Figure 12-72-2-1. Air is to be
klers in two minutes, ± 10 seconds, when installed
moved past the sample at a velocity of 230 to 245
on a 10-by-10-foot spacing schedule. Since tempera-
feet per minute. The temperature in the oven is
ture conditions in the test room may vary throughout
recorded by means of a thermocouple and calibrated
the year, it is necessary to utilize different pan sizes
potentiometer.
in order to obtain the proper temperature-rise condi-
3. The device under test is to be installed in the test tion. This test condition develops a time-temperature
oven with its temperature-sensitive element located curve similar to that shown in Figure 12-72-2-1.
in the air streams and positioned so that there is no
6. The fire tests are to be conducted to compare the
obstruction of the moving air to the sensing element.
operating time of the fire alarm devices when
4. After installation in the oven, the device is to be sub- installed at their recommended spacing schedule as
jected to the time-temperature conditions illustrated compared with the operating time of automatic
by Figure 12-72-2-1. The time of actuation is to be sprinklers installed on the standard 10-by-10-foot
recorded at the instant the unit goes into alarm. spacing schedule. Operation of the devices prior to
the sprinkler will qualify the device for a spacing on
5. To determine that the performance of a fire alarm
which it is installed. Since automatic sprinklers vary
device is uniform, five samples are to be tested,
in their sensitivity, the particular sprinkler utilized in
using a different sample for each test, but each of the
these tests is to be one which has average operating
five samples is to be installed inside the chamber in
response under uniform temperature-rise conditions.
the same position.
7. Four units shall be subjected simultaneously to the
(d) Fire test.
fire test condition and all four units are required to
1. A fire alarm device, installed at the intended spac- respond prior to the sprinkler.
ing, shall operate prior to the 160°F (71.1°C) rated
8. For units which may be mounted on a side wall, the
sprinklers installed on a 10-foot spacing schedule
device under test shall be mounted in a vertical posi-
when both are simultaneously exposed to a control
tion so that the distance between the top of the unit
fire condition.
and the ceiling is 6 inches. The front of the units
2. The test room is to be equipped with automatic shall face the fire source and any surfaces on which
sprinkler piping arranged to receive automatic sprin- the units are mounted shall be of a configuration to
klers on a 10-by-10-foot spacing schedule. Sprin- prevent reflection of heat onto the detector element.
klers of the standard upright spray type are to be
9. If a fire alarm device is intended to be mounted on
installed with the deflectors approximately 7 inches
the ceiling, the unit shall be so installed for this test.
below the ceiling, which is normal for sprinkler pip-
ing installation. For each test, new automatic sprin- 10. If a device is intended to be employed with an enclo-
klers of the same make and ratings are to be installed sure, such as used in mounting, it shall be subjected
in the sprinkler piping. The devices under test are to to the fire test using the enclosure representative of
be installed at their designated spacing, minimum 15 normal installation.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 121

PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

(e) High-temperature exposure test. temperature for at least 24 hours and then subjected
to the oven test.
1. A fire alarm device shall not operate when subjected
for 30 days to the test ambient temperature indicated 6. This test is to be conducted only on devices of the
in Table 12-72-2A. Following the exposure the ordinary degree rating unless there is reason to
response of the units shall not show a variation of anticipate different behavior of other ratings.
more than 10 percent from the value obtained in the (g) Operating temperature test.
Oven Test on as-received samples. There shall be no
change in the sound intensity when tested following 1. A fire alarm device shall operate in a normal manner
the exposure. There shall be no evidence of eutectic and within the operating temperature limits and tol-
flow as a result of this test. erances included in Table 12-72-2B, when subjected
to an operating temperature test in heated water, oil
2. Devices capable of repeated operation are to be sub- or air bath.
jected to the Oven Test before and after exposure to 2. Five samples of each temperature rating are to be
the test temperature ambient. Where devices are not subjected to this test. Depending on their particular
capable of repeated operation the response data after design, the devices are to be suspended in a circulat-
exposure is to be compared to the response of identi- ing water, oil or air bath, and the temperature gradu-
cal as-received samples. ally increased at the rate of 1°F (0.6°C) per minute
3. A fire alarm device shall withstand the high-tem- until operation takes place. The temperature of the
perature exposure without false operation and there bath at the instant of operation is to be recorded.
shall be no visible deformation or change in the tem- (h) Vibration test.
perature sensitive element or any other part of the
unit as a result of the test. 1. A fire alarm device shall be capable of withstanding
vibration without false operation, without breakage
4. Five samples of each temperature rating are to be or damage to parts or any leakage at fittings. Follow-
tested for their normal operating temperature after ing the vibration test the response of a unit shall not
which they are to be placed in a circulating air oven show a variation of more than 50 percent from the
maintained at the test temperature. value obtained in the oven test on as-received sam-
5. The units are to be removed from the oven after the ples. There shall be no change in the sound intensity
30- day period, allowed to remain at room tempera- following the vibration.
ture for at least 24 hours and then subjected to the 2. Two samples are to be secured in the position of
oven test. normal use on a mounting board and the board, in
turn, securely fastened to a variable speed vibration
(f) Corrosion tests.
machine having an amplitude of 0.01 inch. The fre-
1. The response of a fire alarm device, after being sub- quency of vibration is to be varied from 10 to 35
jected to corrosive atmospheres, shall not show a cycles per second (cps) in increments of 5 cps until a
variation of more than 50 percent from the value resonant frequency is obtained. The samples are
obtained in the oven test on as-received samples. No then to be vibrated at the maximum resonant fre-
false alarms shall occur during the exposure and quency for a period of four hours. If no resonant fre-
there shall be no change in the sound intensity when quency is obtained, the samples are to be vibrated at
the units are subjected to the oven test. 35 cycles per second for a period of 120 hours.
2. Devices capable of repeated operations are to be 3. For these tests, amplitude is defined as the maxi-
subjected to the oven test before and after exposure mum displacement of sinusoidal motion from a
to the corrosive atmospheres. Where devices are not position of rest or one-half of the total table dis-
capable of repeated operation, the response data placement. Resonance is defined as the maximum
obtained from the oven test is to be compared to the magnification of the applied vibration.
response of identical as-received samples. 4. Devices capable of repeated operation are to be sub-
3. Two samples are to be exposed for 10 days to an jected to the oven test before and after the vibration
atmosphere containing approximately 1 percent test. Where devices are not capable of repeated oper-
hydrogen sulfide by volume in air saturated with ation, the response data obtained from the oven test
water vapor at room temperature. is to be compared to the response of identical as-
received samples.
4. Two samples are to be exposed for 10 days to an
5. This test is generally to be conducted only on
atmosphere containing approximately 1 percent sul-
devices of the ordinary degree rating unless there is
phur dioxide in 1 percent carbon dioxide by volume
a reason to anticipate different behavior of other rat-
in air saturated with water vapor at room tempera-
ings. For multiple station fire alarm devices, the
ture.
units shall be interconnected with a 10-foot length of
5. After exposure to the corrosive atmospheres, the tubing between units and between the units and any
samples are to be removed from the test chamber, sounding appliance with which it is intended to be
allowed to remain in a normal atmosphere at room employed.

122 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

(i) Humidity test. high or larger with sound absorbing panels on walls
1. A fire alarm device shall be capable of operating in a and ceiling having a Noise Reduction Coefficient
normal manner and comply with the requirements of (NRC) of 0.95 or higher for the walls and 0.64 or
the oven test following exposure for 24 hours to higher for the ceiling. The ambient noise level shall
moist air having a relative humidity of 85 ± 5 per- be not greater than 55 decibels. The device is to be
cent at a temperature of 30 ± 2°C (86 ± 3.6°F). The mounted in a position of normal use, approximately
units shall be tested within five minutes after 5 feet above the floor in the center of the room. The
removal from the humid environment. microphone is to be located at a 10-foot distance
from the device and in a position to receive the max-
2. Two samples are to be subjected to this test. This imum sound level produced by the device.
test is to be conducted on devices having an ordinary
degree rating only, unless different behavior of other 3. Alternately, the measurement may be made in a free
ratings is anticipated. field condition to minimize the effect of reflected
sound energy. The ambient noise level is to be at
(j) Low-temperature exposure test. least 10 decibels below the measured level produced
1. A fire alarm device shall be capable of operating in a by the signal device. Free field conditions may be
normal manner and comply with the requirements of simulated by mounting the device not less than 10
the oven test following exposure for 24 hours to a feet from the ground and with the microphone
temperature of minus 30 ± 2°C (minus 34.4 ± located 10 feet from the device and conducting the
3.6°F). The units shall be tested within five minutes test outdoors on a clear day with a wind velocity of
after removal from the low temperature chamber. not more than 5 miles per hour and an ambient tem-
There shall be no false operation, damage to parts or perature of 15–25°C (50–77°F).
leakage at fittings.
4. Alternatively, an anechoic chamber of not less than
2. Two samples are to be subjected to this test. This 1,000 cubic feet, with no dimension less than 7 feet,
test is to be conducted on devices having an ordinary and with an absorption factor of 0.99 or greater from
degree rating only, unless different behavior of other 100 Hertz (Hz) to 10 kiloHertz (kHz) for all surfaces
ratings is anticipated. may be used for this measurement.
3. For a multiple station fire alarm device the maxi- (m) Hydrostatic strength test.
mum length of tubing specified by the manufacturer
[see Section 12-72-203 (a), Item 2] is to be con- 1. The storage cylinder of a gas operated-type detector
nected between the unit and any alarm sounding shall be capable of withstanding, without failure, an
device with which it is intended to be used prior to internal hydrostatic pressure of five times the pres-
conducting the test. sure of the stored gas at the operating temperature of
(k) Endurance test. the device.
1. There shall be no mechanical failure of a spring 2. In conducting the hydrostatic strength test, the stor-
wound-type fire alarm device and the unit shall be age cylinder is to be tested to the specified pressure
capable of operating in a normal manner and comply after the shell has been completely filled with water
with the requirements of the oven test following 100 or oil. Care should be exercised to expel all air from
cycles of operation at a rate of not less than once per the test specimen before the pressure is applied.
hour. 3. The apparatus for this test is to consist of a hand- or
2. Two samples of any rating shall be subjected to this motor-operated hydraulic pump capable of produc-
test. Each cycle shall consist of a complete rundown ing the required test pressure, a substantial test cage
and rewinding operation. Following the 100 cycles, capable of containing the shell and its parts in the
the units shall be subjected to the oven test. event of failure, the necessary valves and fittings for
(l) Audibility test. attachment to the test sample, a calibrated pressure
gage graduated in at least 20 pounds per square inch
1. The audible alarm generated by a fire alarm device (psi) increments to at least 200 psi more than the test
shall be distinctive in sound from other customary pressure, and the necessary valves, fittings, etc., for
sounds, continue for at least four full minutes at full regulating and maintaining the specified test pres-
intensity and be not less than 83 decibels when mea- sure.
sured in an ambient temperature of 23 ± 3°C (73 ±
5.4°F) with a relative humidity of 60 ± 20 percent 4. The pressure should be increased at a rate of approx-
and a barometric pressure of approximately 700 mm imately 300 psi per minute until the test pressure is
mercury. obtained. The ultimate test pressure is to be held for
one minute.
2. The measurement of sound level is to be made with
a sound level meter employing the C weighting net- 5. Five cylinders are to be subjected to this test. None
work and fast response characteristics. The measure- of the cylinders shall rupture or show evidence of
ment is to be made in a room having the leakage. Deformation of a cylinder is not considered
approximate dimensions of 20- by 10- by 10-feet a failure.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 123

PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

INSTRUCTIONS perature Produced By A Fire. This Temperature

Sec. 12-72-204. Differential Results From the Time Lag Before The
Temperature Element Absorbs The Necessary Heat
(a) General. Each fire alarm device shall be provided with From the Surrrounding Air to Actuate.
the following installation, operating and maintenance instruc-
tions: 8. Instructions for setting or rewinding of a spring
wound fire alarm device to be included on the
1. Typical installation layout for the unit(s) indicating device.
recommended locations.
9. For gas-operated fire alarm devices information to
2. Description of the operation, testing (if provided), return the unit to the factory for servicing shall be
and proper maintenance procedures of the unit(s). provided.
3. Information on establishing a household emergency 10. State Fire Marshal listing file number if required by
evacuation plan in the event of a fire. Article 1.5.
4. An indication that the local fire authority shall be (b) If a manufacturer has more than one temperature rating
notified of the installation. for an alarm device, where the thermally sensitive element is
(b) The instructions may be incorporated on the outside of renewable and must be replaced after operation, the renew-
the unit, on a separate sheet, or as part of a manual. If not able element shall bear the manufacturer’s name or equiva-
included directly on the device, the instructions or manual lent identification and the temperature rating.
shall be referenced in the marking information on the unit. (c) If a manufacturer produces units at more than one fac-
tory, each unit shall have a distinctive marking to identify it
as the product of a particular factory.
MARKING
Sec. 12-72-205.
TESTING OVEN
(a) General. A fire alarm device shall be clearly and per-
manently marked where it will be visible after installation Sec. 12-72-206.
with the following information. Removal of a unit from an (a) General. The testing oven shall be constructed and
installed position by removing not more than one screw to operated in accordance with this section and the following:
view the marking is considered as meeting the requirement
regarding visibility after installation. 1. A typical test oven consists of an oval shaped stain-
less steel box approximately 31 by 10 by 16 inches
1. Name or identifying symbol of manufacturer or ven- high, made of No. 11 M.S.G. material. One of the
dor. curved end sections is hinged. See Figure 12-72-2-3.
2. Model number or equivalent. 2. A section 6 by 6 inches at the top is fitted with a
3. Temperature rating of the fire alarm device. removable wooden cover.
4. Reference to the State Fire Marshal Regulations for 3. Two glass windows, 4 by 6 inches in size, are pro-
Household Fire Warning Equipment. vided in the sides of the oven for observation of the
samples under test.
5. The statement: “Do Not Paint” or equivalent to pre-
vent painting of the temperature sensitive element 4. The interior of the oven is divided horizontally by a
and the markings. The letters shall be a minimum of baffle over the heater chamber located in the central
1
/8 inch in height. lower section. One end of the horizontal baffle is
joined to a guide vane extending upward at an angle
6. The following information is required on gas oper- of 72 degrees into the oven chamber. The vane
ated units. The letters shall be a minimum of 1/8 inch directs the air currents to ensure greater uniformity
in height. of temperature in the oven.
CAUTION—Pressurized Container—Do Not 5. Eight 1,000-watt heating elements, threaded into
Puncture or Incinerate—Explosion Hazard May screw shell lampholders, furnish the heat. They are
Result so connected that six of the heating elements are
7. The following or equivalent wording: controlled by means of two manually adjusted auto-
Operation—Responds To A Heat Producing Fire transformers. An auxiliary switch controls the other
Only. Unit Will Actuate When The Temperature Of two heating elements for supplying additional heat
The Surrounding Air Reaches The Marked Tem- when necessary.
perature Rating (Plus Or Minus A Few Degrees) 6. An air current through the bank of heaters is created
Provided The Air Temperature Increase Is 1°F by means of a four blade five-inch diameter fan
(0.56°C) Per Minute Or Less. At Faster Rates Of located behind the heating elements and connected
Temperature Rise, The Surrounding Air Tempera- to a shaft which extends to the outside of the oven. A
ture At Which The Unit Will Actuate Will Be variable speed motor is mounted on a bracket inside
Above The Marked Rating, The Temperature Dif- the lower cabinet and operates the fan through a pul-
ferential Depending On The Rate Of Rise Of Tem- ley and belt arrangement. The speed of the motor is

124 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

adjusted and the pitch of the fan blade is such that (b) Test method.
the velocity of the air current is 230-245 feet per 1. The preparation for test consists of mounting the
minute over the sample under test. device on the small removable screen base of 1/4-
7. Temperatures are measured by means of two No. 30 inch hardware cloth formed to a height where the
AWG wire thermocouples inserted through copper temperature sensing element is midway between the
tubes extending to the inside of the test chamber and top of the chamber and the guide vane. The sample
are located adjacent to the device under test and in under test is positioned in the air stream so that there
the heating chamber. The air velocity is measured by is no obstruction between the guide vane and sens-
a velometer installed in the oven. ing element. A spring wound device is mounted with
8. A control board is mounted on the cabinet adjacent the sensing element in a horizontal position. The test
to the testing oven. The control board incorporates sample shall remain in the oven at least five minutes
five toggle switches and four indicating lights for prior to starting each test run.
operating the heating elements, air flow fan and a 2. The heating coils are permitted to preheat for 10-20
cooling fan. A toggle switch is used for turning on seconds prior to starting the test. The fan controlling
the temperature recorder and another is used for the air flow is turned on and its speed adjusted to
checking the temperatures in either the upper or produce the required velocity. The temperatures are
lower portion of the oven. read every 10 seconds. The two autotransformers are
9. Two manually adjusted autotransformers are adjusted as needed to obtain the desired rate of tem-
mounted on the control panel for controlling the heat perature rise. Normal oven temperatures at the start
developed by the heating coils. An air flow indicator of the test are to be 85–90°F (29.4–32.2°C).
gage is incorporated on the control board for contin- 3. Upon operation of the device, the current applied to
uous indication of the air flow during the test run. In the bank of heaters is cut-off and the oven is cooled
the event that the air flow tends to change during a to normal room temperature by means of the cooling
test run, the speed of the fan is adjusted to keep the fan.
air velocity within the specified range.

TABLE 12-72-2A—TEMPERATURE CLASSIFICATIONS

TEMPERATURE CLASSIFICATION RATING RANGE °F (°C) TEST TEMPERATURE °F (°C)

Ordinary 135-174 (57-74) 125 (51.7)

Intermediate 175-225 (79-107) 150 (66)

TABLE 12-72-2B—TEMPERATURE CLASSIFICATIONS

TEMPERATURE OPERATING TEMPERATURE LIMITS OPERATION

CLASSIFICATION Minimum °F (°C) Maximum °F (°C) Tolerance, °F (°C)

Ordinary 128 (53.3) 165 (73.9) 10 (5.6)

Intermediate 166 (74.4) 225 (107) 15 (8.3)

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 125

PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

FIGURE 12-72-2-1—TIME-TEMPERATURE CURVE—15-FOOT SPACINGS

FIGURE 12-72-2-2—FIRE-TEST LAYOUT

126 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

FIGURE 12-72-2-3—TEST OVEN

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 127

128 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE
 CHAPTER 12-72-3

PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

SMOKE DETECTORS, COMBUSTION PRODUCTS TYPE

STANDARD 12-72-3

STATE FIRE MARSHAL volts alternating current (42.4 peak) or direct cur-
SCOPE rent, and supplied from a circuit whose power is
Sec. 12-72-300. limited to a maximum of 100 volt amperes.
(a) Basic. This standard represents the minimum basic B. High voltage. A circuit classified as high voltage
requirements for the construction and performance of com- is one having circuit characteristics in excess of
bustion products detectors of other than the photoelectric type those of a low-voltage circuit.
to be employed in ordinary indoor locations and to be listed
under this classification. The minimum design, construction
and performance standards set forth herein are those deemed TEST REPORTS
as minimum necessary to establish conformance to the regu- Sec. 12-72-301.
lations of the State Fire Marshal. (a) The report shall include engineering data, and an anal-
(b) Definitions. For the purpose of this standard, the fol- ysis comparing the design against Sections 12-72-302 (a)
lowing definitions shall apply: through 12-72-302 (t); it shall include wiring diagrams, oper-
1. Alarm signal. A signal intended to indicate an ating manuals and photographs; it shall set forth the tests per-
emergency fire condition. formed in accordance with this standard and the results
thereof and shall verify the correctness of the electrical rating.
2. Annunciator. Integrally mounted or remotely con-
nected visual indicating device intended to indicate (b) Listed components. Electrical wiring, material,
an alarm or trouble condition. devices, combination of devices, fittings, appliances and
equipment which have been tested and listed by an approved
3. Ionization type detector. A device in which the listing agency for the intended purpose and use need not be
presence of small combustion practices, often invisi- individually retested.
ble to the eye, interfere with the normal ionization
current resulting from radiation produced by a radio- The report shall include the catalog number or other read-
active source in the detection chamber. A second ily identifiable marking; the name of the approved listing
chamber, employing a similar ionization source, agency, the laboratory test report number and date. Such indi-
may also be used to compensate for normal environ- vidually tested and listed component parts and devices shall
mental ambient changes. be subjected to the performance standard tests to determine
its suitability for use in combination with other component
4. Ionization-resistance bridge type detector. parts, devices, circuits or equipment.
Employs both ionization and resistance bridge prin-
ciples in one unit. Additive response from both (c) Listed detectors. Detectors which have been tested to
detector elements is required for detector operation. any other acceptable test standard may be evaluated provided
such test incorporates all features of this standard.
5. Resistance-bridge type detector. Responds to an
abnormal rate of increase of combustion products (d) Rejection for cause. Compliance with these standards
which change the impedance of second similar plate will not necessarily mean approval and listing, if when exam-
may be employed to compensate for normal ambient ined and tested, it is found to have other features which may
changes. impair the result intended by these regulations. Unusual con-
structions may require application of additional performance
6. Sensitivity. Relative degree of response of a detec- tests. The State Fire Marshal may refuse to approve any item
tor. A high sensitivity denotes response to a lower for cause. (See the California Electrical Code.)
concentration of combustion than a low sensitivity
under identical fire test conditions. (e) Smoke detectors only.
7. Trouble signal. A visual or audible signal intended 1. A combustion products detector, as covered by these
to indicate a fault or trouble condition, such as an requirements consists of an assembly of electrical
open or ground fault, occurring in the device or con- components arranged to detect one or more products
nected wiring. of combustion. The products of combustion may
consist of but are not necessarily limited to gaseous
8. Voltage classification. combustion products, water vapor and visible as
A. Low voltage. A circuit classified as low voltage well as invisible smoke particles. The detector
is one involving a potential of not more than 30 includes provision for the connection to a source of

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 129

PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

power, signaling and optional remote control cir- GENERAL

cuits. 12-72-302.
2. These requirements cover the following types of (a) Construction.
detectors:
1. A detector shall be so constructed that it will be reli-
A. Detectors intended for open area protection, able and sufficiently durable for its intended instal-
intended for connection to a compatible power lation and use.
supply or control unit for operation as part of a
fire alarm system. 2. A component of a detector shall comply with the
requirements for that component, except that such
B. Detectors intended solely for control of releasing requirements may be modified if appropriate for the
devices such as electromagnetic door holders, particular application.
fire dampers, etc.
3. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, the
C. Detectors suitable for Items A and B above. construction requirements specified for a detector
3. This standard does not cover the following: shall also apply for any remote accessories with
which it is to be employed.
A. Detectors for monitoring the smoke density
within flues or stacks. 4. Each detector is to be provided with a means for
monitoring the relative sensitivity of the unit after it
B. Duct detectors. has been installed.
C. Power supplies and control units to which the 5. The monitoring means may be by means of a jack or
detectors are intended to be connected. These are terminals for connection of a meter, or by a visual
covered under the Standard Test Procedures for means which would be visible with the unit
Protective Signaling Systems, SFM 12-72-1. installed, or equivalent.
D. Smoke detectors of the photoelectric type which 6. The use of a plug-in type detector assembly, which
are covered by the Standard for Smoke Detectors, may be removed readily for insertion of an adapter
Photoelectric Type, for Fire-Protective Signaling connected to metering equipment, would be accept-
Systems, UL 168. able.
4. The manufacture, importation, distribution and dis- (b) Marking.
posal of smoke detectors containing radioactive
material are subject to the safety requirements of 1. A detector shall be permanently marked with the
state radiation control agencies and/or the U.S. following information, except where it is indicated
Atomic Energy Commission. that the information may appear on an installation
wiring diagram.
5. Verification of an acceptable evaluation by the regu-
lating agency involved is required prior to the inves- A. Name or identifying symbol of the manufacturer
tigation of the smoke detector to ensure compliance or vendor.
with this standard. B. Model number or equivalent and serial number or
(f) Differing constructions. A detector having materials equivalent.
or forms of construction differing from this standard may be C. Electrical rating, in volts, amperes or watts, and
investigated and tested according to the intent of this stan- frequency for each circuit. May appear on the
dard, and if found to be substantially equivalent may be given installation wiring diagram.
recognition for approval and listing. The office of the State
D. Sensitivity setting and reference to the region of
Fire Marshal shall be consulted for general requirements and
sensitivity such as maximum, nominal or inter-
performance standards.
mediate or minimum. If a detector is intended to
(g) Operating and installation instructions. be adjusted in the field, the range of sensitivity is
1. A copy of the operating and installation instructions to be indicated. The sensitivity shall be indicated
and related schematic wiring diagrams and installa- as an instrument reading. A sensitivity indication
tion drawings are to be furnished with the sample other than an instrument reading may be
submitted for investigation to be used as a guide in employed if it provides an equivalent indication
the examination and test of the detector and for this of the sensitivity of the detector. May appear on
purpose need not be in final printed form. The infor- the installation wiring diagram.
mation may be included in a manual or technical E. Correct mounting position if a unit is intended to
bulletin. be mounted in a definite position. This informa-
2. The instructions and drawings should include such tion may appear on the installation wiring dia-
directions and information as deemed by the manu- gram.
facturer to be adequate for attaining proper and safe F. Identification of lights, switches, meters, etc.,
installation, maintenance and operation of the detec- regarding their function, unless their operation is
tor. See Section 12-72-302 (b). obvious.

130 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

G. Maximum rating of fuse in each fuseholder. B. Initiating device circuit connections. For detec-
Located adjacent to the fuseholder. tors intended to be connected only to the initiat-
H. Reference to an installation wiring diagram, if ing device circuit of a fire alarm system control
not attached to the detector, by drawing number unit, at least two detectors shall be shown con-
and issue number of date. nected to a typical initiating device circuit. For a
detector intended only for releasing device ser-
I. For a detector which employs a radioactive mate- vice, a typical connection shall be shown. For a
rial, the following information shall be indicated detector suitable for both application, typical
directly on the unit: type, amount, radiation sym- connections representing both types of connec-
bol (optional), safe disposal and a caution notice tions shall be illustrated.
which shall read as follows:
C. Supplementary circuits. Voltage, current or
CAUTION—Contains Radioactive Material, watts, and frequency rating.
or its equivalent wording.
5. Technical bulletin. A technical bulletin shall be
J. A reference to the Technical Bulletin. May provided by the manufacturer for each installation to
appear on the installation wiring diagram. be used as a reference by the installer. The bulletin
K. Reference to a specific model number or descrip- shall include the manufacturer’s recommendations
tion of the instrument to be used for checking the regarding typical detector locations. The informa-
sensitivity of the detector. May appear on the tion shall include guidelines on detector location,
installation wiring diagram. spacings, maintenance, servicing tests, etc., under
various environmental conditions and physical con-
L. A detector intended for permanent connection figurations. Some conditions for which guidelines
only to a wiring system other than metal-clad are required are:
cable or conduit shall be marked to indicate the
system or systems for which it is suitable. The A. Temperature
marking shall be so located that it will be visible B. Humidity
when power-supply connections to the detector C. Corrosive atmospheres
are made or may appear on the installation wiring
diagram. D. Air movement (ventilating and air-conditioning
systems)
M.The State Fire Marshal’s listing label if required
by Article 1.5. E. High ceilings
N. A detector which is not intended to be painted in F. Sloped ceilings
the field shall be marked on the outside “DO G. Girder ceiling construction
NOT PAINT.”
H. Small and large bays
2. An installation wiring diagram shall be provided
with each detector illustrating the field connections I. Open joist construction
to be made. The drawing may be attached to the unit J. High stock piling
or, if separate, shall be referenced in the marking K. Conditions produced by manufacturing processes
attached to the unit with the drawing number and
issue number and/or date. 6. Detailed information shall be provided regarding the
use of the facilities provided on the detector to mon-
3. The drawing shall show a pictorial view of the itor the sensitivity. Typical information that shall be
installation terminals or leads to which field connec- provided includes:
tions are made as they would appear when viewed
during an installation and the minimum internal A. Nominal reading under clear condition
dimensions of a back box, if not provided with the B. Nominal reading when close to alarm
detector, shall be specified. The terminal numbers C. Nominal reading at alarm condition
on the detector shall agree with the numbers on the
drawing. A drawing not attached to the detector unit D. Guidelines on instrument use for an engineering
shall be marked with the name or identifying symbol survey, installation and maintenance
of the manufacturer’s or vendor’s drawing number, 7. Information regarding locations where not to install
and an issue number and/or date. detectors shall also be provided to minimize the pos-
4. The following marking information is required to sibility of false alarms.
appear on the detector or the installation wiring dia- 8. Reference to the bulletin number and date is
gram for the applicable circuits to which field con- required either on the detector nameplate marking or
nections are made. Where an electrical rating is on the installation drawing. If the installation draw-
indicated, it may be omitted if reference is made for ing is included as part of the technical bulletin, refer-
connection to a specific control unit or equivalent. ence to the bulletin is required to be indicated on the
A. Supply circuit. Voltage, current or watts, and detector.
frequency.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 131

PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

(c) Frame, enclosure and metalware. thickness may be employed if the surface under con-
1. A detector enclosure shall be so formed and assem- sideration is curved, ribbed or otherwise reinforced,
bled that it has the strength and rigidity necessary to or if the shape and/or size of the surface is such that
resist the abuses to which it is likely to be subjected equivalent mechanical strength is provided.
in service without adversely affecting its perfor- 10. At any point where conduit or metal-clad cable is to
mance and without introducing a fire, shock, or acci- be attached, sheet metal shall be of such thickness or
dent hazard due to total or partial collapse with shall be so formed or reinforced that it will have a
resulting reduction of spacings, loosening or dis- stiffness at least equivalent to that of an uncoated
placement of parts or other defects. flat sheet steel having a minimum thickness of 0.053
2. Except as noted, all electrical parts of a detector inch (No. 16 MSG).
shall be enclosed to provide protection against con- 11. A plate or plug closure for an unused conduit open-
tact with uninsulated live parts. A separate enclosure ing or other hole in the enclosure shall have a thick-
for field wiring terminals that will be enclosed by a ness not less than:
back box is not required. A. 0.014 inch for steel or 0.019 inch for nonferrous
3. A detector shall have a suitable means for mounting, metal for a hole having a 1/4-inch maximum
which shall be accessible without disassembling any dimension.
operating part of the unit. Removal of a completely B. 0.027-inch steel or 0.032-inch nonferrous metal
assembled panel or equivalent to mount the detector for a hole having a 13/8-inch maximum dimen-
is not considered to be disassembly of an operating sion.
part.
12. A closure for a hole larger than 13/8-inch diameter
4. An assembled part intended to be removed during shall have a thickness equal to that required for the
installation shall be protected against damage from enclosure of the device or a standard knockout seal
handling. shall be used. Such plates or plugs shall be securely
5. An enclosure shall have provision for the connection mounted.
of metal-clad cable or conduit. An enclosure without 13. A knockout in a sheet metal enclosure shall be reli-
provision for the connection of metal-clad cable or ably secured but shall be capable of being removed
conduit may be acceptable if there are furnished without undue deformation of the enclosure.
with it definite instructions indicating the sections of
the unit which are intended to be drilled in the field 14. A knockout shall be provided with a surrounding
for the connection of raceways, or if the unit is surface adequate for proper seating of a conduit
intended for mounting on an outlet box. bushing, and shall be so located that installation of a
bushing at any knockout likely to be used during
6. The thickness of cast metal for an enclosure shall be installation will not result in spacings between unin-
as indicated in Table 12-72-3A. Except that cast sulated live parts and the bushing of less than those
metal having a thickness 1/32 inch less than that indi- indicated under spacings.
cated in the table may be employed if the surface
under consideration is curved, ribbed or otherwise The figures in parentheses are the galvanized sheet
reinforced, or if the shape and/or size of the surface gage numbers (GSG) (for zinc-coated steel), the
is such that equivalent mechanical strength is pro- manufacturers’ standard gage numbers (MSG) (for
vided. uncoated steel), and the American wire gage num-
bers (AWG) (for a nonferrous metal) which provide
7. If threads for the connection of conduit are tapped the required minimum thickness of metal.
all the way through a hole in an enclosure wall, or if
an equivalent construction is employed, there shall 15. An enclosure or parts of an enclosure of nonmetallic
be not less than three and one-half nor more than material shall have the mechanical strength and
five threads in the metal, and the construction shall durability and be so formed that parts will be pro-
be such that a standard conduit bushing can be prop- tected against damage. The mechanical strength of
erly attached. an enclosure shall be at least equivalent to a sheet
metal enclosure of the minimum thickness specified
8. If threads for the connection of conduit are tapped in Table 12-72-3B. See Section 12-72-205 for per-
only part of the way through a hole in an enclosure formance tests on plastic materials and enclosures.
wall, there shall be not less than three and one-half
full threads in the metal, and there shall be a smooth, 16. (No requirements.)
rounded inlet hole for the conductors which shall 17. The continuity of the grounding system shall not
afford protection to the conductors equivalent to that rely on the dimensional integrity of the nonmetallic
provided by a standard conduit bushing. material.
9. Sheet metal enclosures. The thickness of sheet 18. Ventilating openings in an enclosure, including per-
metal employed for the enclosure of a detector shall forated holes, louvers and openings protected by
be not less than that indicated in Table 12-72-3B, means of wire screening, expanded metal or perfo-
except that sheet metal of two gauge sizes lesser rated covers, shall be of such size or shape that no

132 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

opening will permit passage of a rod having a diam- thickness of a glass cover shall be not less than that
eter of 33/64 inch. An enclosure for fuses or other indicated in Table 12-72-3C.
overload protective device and provided with venti-
lating openings shall afford adequate protection 27. A glass panel for an opening having an area of more
against the emission of flame or molten metal. The than 144 square inches or having any dimension
opening shall be designed to permit cleaning with- greater than 12 inches, shall be supported by a con-
out damage to functional enclosed parts. tinuous groove not less than 3/16 inch deep along all
four edges of the panel.
19. Except as noted in the following paragraph, perfo-
rated sheet metal and sheet metal employed for 28. A transparent material other than glass employed as
expanded metal mesh shall be not less than 0.042 a cover over an opening in an enclosure shall have
inch in average thickness, 0.046 inch if zinc coated. mechanical strength equivalent to that of glass, not
become a fire hazard or distort, or not become less
20. If the indentation of a guard or enclosure will not transparent at the temperature to which it may be
alter the clearance between uninsulated live parts subjected under normal or abnormal service condi-
and dead metal parts so as to affect performance tions.
adversely or reduce spacings below the minimum
values given under spacings, 0.021 inch expanded (d) Protection against corrosion.
metal mesh (0.024 inch if zinc coated) may be 1. Except as indicated herein, iron and steel parts shall
employed, provided that (1) the exposed mesh on be suitably protected against corrosion by enamel-
any one side or surface of the device so protected ing, galvanizing, sheradizing, plating or other equiv-
has an area of not more than 72 square inches and alent means.
has no dimension greater than 12 inches, or (2) the
width of an opening so protected is not greater than 2. These requirements apply to all enclosures whether
31/2 inches. of sheet steel or cast iron, and to all springs and
other parts upon which proper mechanical operation
21. The wires forming a screen protecting current carry-
may depend. It does not apply to minor parts such as
ing parts shall be not smaller than No. 16 AWG and
washers, screws, bolts and the like, if the failure of
the screen openings shall be not greater than 1/2
such unprotected parts would not be liable to result
square inch in area.
in a hazardous condition or adversely affect the
22. An enclosure cover shall be hinged, sliding, pivoted operation of the unit. Parts made of stainless steel
or similarly attached if (1) it provides ready access (properly polished or treated if necessary) do not
to fuses or any other overcurrent protective device require additional protection against corrosion.
the normal functioning of which requires renewal, or Bearing surfaces should be of such materials and
(2) it is necessary to open the cover in connection design as to ensure against binding due to corrosion.
with the normal operation of the unit.
(e) Insulating materials.
23. With reference to the requirement of Item 22, nor-
mal operation is considered to be operation of a 1. Material for the mounting of current-carrying parts
switch for testing or for silencing an audible signal shall be porcelain, phenolic composition, cold-
appliance or operation of any other component of a molded composition or material which is suitable
unit which requires such action in connection with for the particular application.
its intended performance. 2. Vulcanized fiber may be used for insulating bush-
24. A hinged cover is not required where the only ings, washers, separators and barriers, but not as the
fuse(s) enclosed is intended to provide protection to sole support for uninsulated current-carrying parts
portions of internal circuits, such as may be of other than low-voltage circuits. Plastic materials
employed on a separate printed wiring board or cir- may be used for the sole support of uninsulated live
cuit subassembly, to prevent excessive circuit dam- parts, if found to have adequate mechanical strength
age resulting from a fault. The use of such a fuse(s) and rigidity, dielectric withstand, resistance to heat,
is acceptable if the following or equivalent marking flame propagation, arcing, creep and moisture, and
is indicated on the cover of units employing high other properties suitable for the application, without
voltage circuits: Circuit Fuse(s) Inside—Disconnect displaying a loss of these properties beyond the min-
Power Prior to Servicing. imum acceptable level as a result of aging.
25. A hinged cover shall be provided with a latch, screw 3. Metal parts as described below need not comply
or catch to hold it closed. An unhinged cover shall with the requirement of Section 12-72-302 (d), Item
be securely held in place by screws or the equiva- 2.
lent.
A. Adhesive attached metal foil markings, screws,
26. Glass covering an observation opening shall be held handles, etc., which are located on the outside of
securely in place so that it cannot be readily dis- the detector enclosure and isolated from electrical
placed in service and shall provide adequate components or wiring by grounded metal parts so
mechanical protection of the enclosed parts. The that they are not liable to become energized.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 133

PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

4. A terminal block mounted on a metal surface which brazing, or welding. The bonding connection shall
may be grounded shall be provided with an insulat- reliably penetrate nonconductive coatings such as
ing barrier between the mounting surface and all live paint. Bonding around a resilient mount shall not
parts on the underside of the base which are not depend on the clamping action of rubber or similar
staked, upset, sealed or equivalently prevented from material.
loosening so as to prevent such parts and the ends of 6. A bolted or screwed connection that incorporates a
replaceable terminal screws from coming in contact star washer under the screw head, is considered
with the supporting surface. acceptable for penetrating nonconductive coatings.
5. A countersunk part shall be covered with a water-
7. Where the bonding means depends upon screw
proof insulating compound which will not melt at a
threads, two or more screws or two fall threads of a
temperature 15°C (27°F) higher than the maximum
single screw engaging metal is considered accept-
normal operating temperature of the assembly, and
able.
at not less than 65°C (149°F) in any case. The depth
or thickness of sealing compound shall be not less 8. Metal-to-metal hinge-bearing members for doors or
than 1/8 inch. covers may be considered as a means for bonding
the door or cover for grounding providing a multi-
(f) Mounting parts.
ple-bearing, pin-type hinge is employed.
1. All parts of a detector shall be securely mounted in
9. Splices shall not be employed in conductors used to
position and prevented from loosening or turning if
bond electrical enclosures or components.
such motion may affect adversely the normal perfor-
mance of the unit, or may affect the fire and accident (g) Deleted.
hazard incident to the operation of the detector. (h) Motors.
2. A switch, lampholder, attachment-plug receptacle, 1. All motors shall be protected by thermal or by over-
plug connector or similar electrical component, shall current protective devices, or a combination thereof.
be mounted securely and, except as noted in Items 3
and 4, shall be prevented from turning. 2. A motor employing thermal protection which com-
plies with the Standard for Thermal Protectors for
3. The requirement that a switch be prevented from Motors, UL 547, is considered to comply with the
turning may be waived if all four of the following requirement of Item 1.
conditions are met:
3. Motors, such as direct-drive fan motors, which are
A. The switch is to be of a plunger or other type that not normally subjected to overloads, and which are
does not tend to rotate when operated. A toggle determined to be adequately protected against over-
switch is considered to be subject to forces that heating due to locked-rotor current by a thermal or
tend to turn the switch during normal operation of overcurrent protective device may be accepted under
the switch. this requirement, provided it is determined that the
B. Isolated metal parts, such as small assembly motor will not overheat under the performance
screws, etc., which are positively separated from requirements of this standard.
wiring and uninsulated live parts. 4. Impedance protection may be accepted for motors
C. Panels and covers which do not enclose uninsu- which are determined to be adequately protected
lated live parts if wiring is positively separated against overheating due to locked-rotor current, pro-
from the panel or cover so that it is not liable to vided it is determined that the motor will not over-
become energized. heat under the performance requirements of this
standard.
D. Panels and covers which are insulated from elec-
trical components and wiring by an insulating (i) Current-carrying parts.
barrier of vulcanized fiber, varnished cloth, phe- 1. A current-carrying part shall have adequate mechan-
nolic composition or similar material not less ical strength and current carrying capacity for the
than 1/32-inch thick and reliably secured in place. service, and shall be a metal such as silver, copper or
4. A bonding conductor shall be of material suitable copper alloy, or other material which will provide
for use as an electrical conductor. If of ferrous equivalent performance.
metal, it shall be protected against corrosion by
2. Bearings, hinges, etc., are not acceptable for carry-
painting, plating or the equivalent. The conductor
ing current between interrelated fixed and moving
shall be not smaller than the maximum size wire
parts.
employed in the circuit wiring of the component or
part. A separate bonding conductor or strap shall be 3. The insulation of coil windings of relays, transform-
installed in such a manner that it is protected from ers, etc., shall be such as to resist the absorption of
mechanical damage. moisture.
5. The bonding shall be by a positive means, such as by 4. Enameled wire is not required to be given additional
clamping, riveting, bolted or screwed connection, treatment to prevent moisture absorption.

134 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

(j) Supply connections. A detector shall be provided with ing on a wiring diagram provided on the detector.
wiring terminals or leads for the connection of conductors of The field-wiring diagram is provided on the detec-
at least the size required by the California Electrical Code, tor. The field-wiring terminal shall be so located that
corresponding to the rating of the unit. it is unlikely to be removed during normal servicing
(k) Terminal connections and leads. of the detector.
1. The parts to which wiring connections are made are 10. A field-wiring terminal for the connection of a
to consist of binding screws with terminal plates grounded supply conductor shall be identified by
having upturned lugs or the equivalent to hold the means of a metallic plated coating substantially
wires in position. Other terminal connections may white in color and shall be readily distinguishable
be provided if found to be equivalent. from the other terminals, or proper identification of
the terminal for the connection of the grounded con-
2. If a wire binding screw is employed at a field wiring ductor shall be clearly shown in some other manner,
terminal, the screw shall be not smaller than No. 8, such as on an attached wiring diagram.
except that a No. 6 screw may be used for the con-
nection of a No. 14 AWG or smaller conductor. 11. A field-wiring lead provided for connection of a
grounded supply conductor shall be finished to show
3. Except as noted in the following paragraph, a termi- a white or natural gray color and shall be readily dis-
nal plate tapped for a wire binding screw shall be of tinguishable from other leads and no other leads,
metal not less than 0.050 inch in thickness for a No. other than grounded conductors, shall be so identi-
8 or larger screw, and not less than 0.030 inch in fied.
thickness for a No. 8 screw, and shall have not less
than two full threads in the metal. 12. A terminal or lead identified for the connection of
the grounded supply conductor shall not be electri-
4. A terminal plate may have the metal extruded at the cally connected to a single-pole manual switching
tapped hole for the binding screw so as to provide device which has an off position or to a single-pole
two full threads. Other constructions may be overcurrent (not thermal) protective device.
employed if they provide equivalent security.
(l) Field-wiring compartment.
5. Leads provided for field connections shall be not
less than 6 inches long, provided with strain relief, 1. The field-wiring compartment area of a detector to
shall be not smaller than No. 18 AWG, and the insu- which connections are to be made is to be of suffi-
lation, if of rubber or thermoplastic, shall be not less cient size for completing all wiring connections as
than 1/32 inch in thickness. specified by the installation wiring diagram.
6. The leads specified in Item 5 may be less than 6 2. Protection for the internal components and wire
inches in length if it is evident that the use of a lon- insulation from sharp edges shall be provided by
ger lead might result in a hazard. insulating or metal barriers having smoothly
rounded edges or by the following or equivalent
7. In a detector intended for connection to a high- volt- instructions located in the wiring area: “CAU-
age source of supply by means of other than a metal- TION—When making installation route field wiring
enclosed wiring system, such as nonmetallic away from sharp projections, corners and internal
sheathed cable: components.”
A. An equipment-grounding terminal or lead shall 3. The location of an outlet box or compartment in
be provided. which field-wiring connections are to be made shall
B. A marking shall be provided to indicate the sys- be such that these connections may be inspected
tem or systems for which it is suitable. (See Item after the detector is installed as intended. The
1, L of Section 12-72-302 (b). removal of not more than two mounting screws, or
an equivalent arrangement, to view the field connec-
C. The grounding means shall be reliably connected
tions, is considered as meeting the intent of this
to all exposed dead metal parts which are liable to
paragraph.
become energized and all dead metal parts within
the enclosure which are exposed to contact (m) Internal wiring.
during servicing and maintenance. 1. The internal wiring of a unit shall consist of conduc-
8. The surface of an insulated lead intended solely for tors of at least the size required by the Basic Electri-
the connection of an equipment-grounding conduc- cal Regulations, corresponding to the current rating
tor shall be green, with or without one or more yel- of the unit, and having insulation rated for the poten-
low stripes and no other leads visible to the installer, tial involved and the temperatures to which it may
other than grounding conductors, shall be so identi- be subjected. The wiring shall be routed away from
fied. moving parts and sharp projections and held in place
9. A field-wiring terminal intended for connection of with clamps, string ties or equivalent, unless of suf-
an equipment-grounding conductor shall be plainly ficient rigidity to retain a shaped form.
identified, such as being marked G, GR, Ground, 2. Leads or a cable assembly connected to parts
Grounding, or the equivalent, or by a suitable mark- mounted on a hinged cover shall be of sufficient

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 135

PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

length to permit the full opening of the cover with- equivalent, which shall be substantial, reliably
out applying stress to the leads or their connections. secured in place, and shall have a smooth rounded
The leads shall be secured or equivalently arranged surface against which the wire may bear.
to prevent abrasion of insulation and jamming 12. If the opening is in a phenolic composition or other
between parts of the enclosure. suitable nonconducting material or in metal of thick-
3. If the use of a short length of insulated conductor is ness greater than 0.042 inch, a smooth surface hav-
not feasible, e.g., a short coil lead or the like, electri- ing rounded edges is considered to be the equivalent
cal insulating tubing may be employed. The tubing of a bushing.
is not to be subjected to sharp bends, tension, com- 13. Ceramic materials and some molded compositions
pression, or repeated flexing, and is not to contact are considered to be acceptable for insulating bush-
sharp edges, projections, or corners. The wall thick- ings, but separate buildings of wood and of hot-
ness of the tubing is to conform to the requirements molded shellac are not acceptable.
for such tubing, except that the wall thickness at any
point for polyvinyl chloride tubing of 3/8-inch diame- 14. Fiber may be employed where it will not be sub-
ter or less, is to be not less than 0.017 inch. For insu- jected to a temperature higher than 90°C (194°F)
lating tubing of other types, the wall thickness is to under normal operating conditions, the bushing is
be not less than required to at least equal the not less than 1/16 inch in thickness with a minus toler-
mechanical strength, dielectric properties, heat and ance of 16/4 inch for manufacturing variations, and it
moisture resistant characteristics, etc. of polyvinyl is so formed and secured in place that it will not be
chloride tubing having a wall thickness of 0.017 affected adversely by ordinary ambient conditions
inch. of humidity.
4. Internal wiring of circuits which operate at different 15. If a soft-rubber bushing is employed in a hole in
potentials shall be reliably separated by barriers or metal, the hole shall be free from sharp edges, burrs,
shall be segregated, unless the conductors of the cir- projections, etc., which would be likely to cut into
cuits of lower voltage are provided with insulation the rubber.
equivalent to that required for the highest voltage 16. An insulating metal grommet may be considered
involved. Segregation of insulated conductors may acceptable in lieu of an insulating bushing, provided
be accomplished by clamping, routing or equivalent that the insulating material used is not less than 1/32
means which ensures permanent separation. See inch in thickness and fills completely the space
Item 10. between the grommet and the metal in which it is
5. Stranded conductors clamped under wire-binding mounted.
screws or similar parts shall have the individual 17. A strain relief means shall be provided for the field
strands soldered together or be equivalently supply leads, and all internally connected wires or
arranged to ensure reliable connections. cords which are subject to movement in conjunction
6. Wireways shall be smooth and free from sharp with the installation, operation or normal servicing
edges, burrs, fins, moving parts, etc., which may of a detector to prevent any mechanical stress from
cause abrasion of the conductor insulation. being transmitted to terminals and internal connec-
tions. Inward movement of the cord or leads pro-
7. All splices and connections shall be mechanically
vided with a ring-type strain relief means shall not
secured and bonded electrically.
damage internal connections or components, or
8. A splice shall be provided with insulation equivalent result in a reduction of electrical spacings.
to that of the wires involved if permanence of elec-
18. Each lead employed for field connections or an
trical spacing between the splice and uninsulated
internal lead subjected to movement or handling
metal parts is not assured.
during installation and normal servicing shall be
9. Splices shall be located, enclosed and supported so capable of withstanding for one minute a pull of 10
that they are not subject to damage from flexing, pounds without any evidence of damage or of trans-
motion or vibration. mitting the stress to internal connections.
10. A metal barrier shall have a thickness at least equal (n) Lampholders and lamps.
to that required by Table 12-72-3B, based on the
size of the barrier. A barrier of insulation material 1. Lampholders and lamps shall be rated for the circuit
shall be not less than 0.028 inch in thickness and in which they are employed when the detector is
shall be of greater thickness if its deformation may operated under any condition of normal service.
be readily accomplished so as to defeat its purpose. 2. A lampholder employing a screw shell shall be so
Any clearance between the edge of a barrier and a wired that the screw shell will be connected to an
compartment wall shall be not more than 1/16 inch. identified (grounded circuit) conductor.
11. Where a lead or wire harness passes through an 3. If more than one screw shell-type lampholder is pro-
opening in a wall, barrier, or enclosing case, there vided, the screw shells of all such lampholders shall
shall be a metal or insulating type bushing, or the be connected to the same conductor unless there is

136 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

no shock hazard present (30 volts RMS or less) 3. In determining compliance with Item 2, only uninsu-
when replacing the lamps. lated live parts in high-voltage circuits are to be con-
4. A lampholder shall be installed so that uninsulated sidered.
live parts will not be exposed to contact by persons 4. An electrical control component which may require
removing or replacing lamps in normal service. examination, adjustment, servicing or maintenance
(o) Operating components. while energized (excluding voltage measurements
except for jacks or terminals specifically intended
1. Operating components and assemblies, such as for that purpose) shall be located and mounted with
switches, relays and similar devices, shall be ade- respect to other components and with respect to
quately protected by individual protection or dust- grounded metal parts so that it is accessible for elec-
tight cabinets, against fouling by dust or by other trical service functions without subjecting persons to
material which may affect their normal operation. the likelihood of shock hazard from adjacent uninsu-
2. Moving parts shall have sufficient play at bearing lated live parts or to accident hazard from adjacent
surfaces to prevent binding. hazardous moving parts.
3. Provision shall be made to prevent adjusting screws 5. Other arrangements of location of components and/
and similar adjustable parts from loosening under or guarding are also acceptable where electrical
the conditions of actual use. components are accessible for service as indicated
4. Manually operated parts shall have sufficient by Item 4.
strength to withstand the stresses to which they will
6. The following are not considered to be uninsulated
be subjected in operation.
live parts: (1) coils of controllers, relays and sole-
5. An electromagnetic device shall ensure reliable and noids, and transformer windings, if the coils and
positive electrical and mechanical performance windings are provided with suitable insulating over-
under all conditions of normal operation. wraps, (2) enclosed motor windings, (3) terminals
(p) Switches. and (4) splices with suitable insulation and insulated
wire.
1. A switch provided as part of a unit shall have a cur-
rent and voltage rating not less than that of the cir- (t) Spacings.
cuit which it controls when the device is operated
1. A detector shall provide reliably maintained spac-
under any condition of normal service.
ings between uninsulated live parts and dead metal
2. If a reset switch is provided, it shall be of a self- parts and between uninsulated live parts of opposite
restoring type. polarity. The spacings shall be not less than those
(q) Over-current protection. Fuseholders, fuses and cir- indicated in Table 12-72-3E.
cuit breakers provided on a detector unit shall be rated for the 2. The spacing between an uninsulated live part and a
application. wall or cover of a metal enclosure, a fitting for con-
(r) Printed wiring boards. Printed wiring boards shall be duit or metal-clad cable, and any dead-metal part
acceptable for the application. The securing of components to shall be not less than that indicated in Table 12-72-
the board shall be made in a reliable manner and the spacings 3E.
between circuits shall comply with the spacings require-
ments. The board shall be reliably mounted so that deflection 3. The through air and over surface spacings at an indi-
of the board during servicing shall not result in damage to the vidual component part are to be judged on the basis
board or in a fire or shock hazard. (See SFM 12-72-1.) of the volt-amperes used and controlled by the indi-
vidual component. However, the spacing from one
(s) Service and maintenance protection. component to another, and from any component to
1. An uninsulated live part and hazardous moving parts the enclosure or to other uninsulated dead metal
within the enclosure shall be located, guarded or parts excluding the component mounting surface,
enclosed so as to minimize the likelihood of acci- shall be judged on the basis of the maximum voltage
dental contact by persons performing service func- and total volt-ampere rating of all components in the
tions which may have to be performed with the enclosure.
equipment energized. 4. The spacing requirements in Table 12-72-3E do not
2. Manual-switching devices may be located or ori- apply to the inherent spacings inside motors, except
ented with respect to uninsulated live parts or haz- at wiring terminals, or to the inherent spacings of a
ardous moving parts so that manipulation of the component which is provided as part of the detector.
mechanism can be accomplished in the normal Such spacings are judged on the basis of the require-
direction of access if uninsulated live parts or haz- ments for the component. The electrical clearance
ardous moving parts are not located in front (in the resulting from the assembly of a component into the
direction of access) of the mechanism and are not complete device, including clearances to dead metal
located within 6 inches on any side or behind the or enclosures, shall be those indicated in Table 12-
mechanism, unless guarded. 72-3E.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 137

PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

5. The “to walls of enclosure” spacings are not to be D. Component failure rate data at rated values
applied to an individual enclosure of a component and derated values. This may be in the form of a
part within an outer enclosure. reference to a Mil-Spec. handbook or equivalent.
6. An insulating liner or barrier of vulcanized fiber, E. Maximum ratings for components.
varnished cloth, mica, phenolic composition or simi- F. Any other data, not included above, which will
lar material employed where spacings would other- provide an equivalent reliability analysis.
wise be insufficient, shall be not less than 0.028 inch
in thickness, except that a liner or barrier not less DETECTOR RATED VOLTAGE,
TEST VOLTAGE
than 0.013 inch in thickness may be used in conjunc- NAMEPLATE
tion with an air spacing of not less than one-half of 110 to 120 120
the through air spacing required. The liner shall be
220 to 240 240
located so that it will not be affected adversely by
arcing. Other Marked Rating

7. Insulating material having a thickness less than that 5. Unless specifically specified otherwise, the test volt-
specified in Item 6 may be used, if upon investiga- age for each test of a detector shall be as follows at
tion, it is found to be adequate for the particular rated frequency:
application.
6. The following samples are used to perform the tests
8. Enamel-insulated wire is considered to be a bare of this standard:
current-carrying part in determining compliance of a
device with the spacing requirements, but enamel is A. At least 20 assembled detectors fully representa-
acceptable as turn-to-turn insulation in coils. tive of production units.
B. One additional unassembled detector fully repre-
sentative of production units.
PERFORMANCE
C. Five additional samples of detectors employing a
Sec. 12-72-303. radioactive source. These may be partial assem-
(a) General. blies illustrating the radioactive source installa-
1. Unless otherwise specified, detectors representative tion.
of production are to be used for each of the follow- D. Three control units and/or power supplies if the
ing tests. detectors are intended specifically to be
2. The devices employed for testing are to be those employed with a specific unit or power supply.
specified by the wiring diagram of the detector, E. The monitoring instrument or reference to a com-
except that substitute devices may be used if they monly available meter intended to monitor sensi-
produce functions and load conditions equivalent to tivity of a detector.
those obtained with the devices intended to be used (b) Normal operation.
with the detector in service.
1. A detector shall be capable of operating for all con-
3. Data on detector components, e.g., capacitors, resis- ditions of its intended performance at all sensitivity
tors (other than carbon or wire wound), solid state settings when employed in conjunction with any
devices, etc., shall be provided by the manufacturer related power supply or control unit with which it is
for evaluation of the reliability of the components intended to be employed and indicating devices to
for the intended application. If a Mil-Spec. is refer- form the system combination covered by the instal-
enced, a copy of the specification is to be provided lation wiring diagram and any supplementary infor-
for review. A failure rate of 0.5 failure per million mation provided.
hours for nonsupervised components would be
acceptable. 2. The test voltage shall be in accordance with Section
12-72-303 (a), Item 5, and the combustion products
4. The data required in the preceding paragraph shall detector shall be in the normal circuit supervisory
include the following: standby condition and prepared for normal signaling
A. Component fault analysis. Effect of failure, operation when it is connected to related devices and
open and short, particularly of capacitors, on circuits.
operation of a detector. 3. The introduction of combustion products into the
B. A description of any component screening and detector chamber such as produced by a smoldering
burn-in test, if available. cotton lamp wick, rope or equivalent, shall result in
C. Amount of derating of components under normal the operation of the detector in its intended manner.
standby and alarm conditions. A derating of 50 Section 12-72-303 (p), Item 2.
percent or more is acceptable for all components (c) Power input and output. The input or output current
except for electrolytic capacitors. See also Table of each circuit of a combustion products detector shall not
12-72-3F. exceed the marked rating by more than 10 percent when the

138 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

detector is operated under the conditions of normal use and fault by an audible trouble signal if the fault pre-
with the detector connected to a source of supply in accor- vents normal operation of the unit.
dance with Section 12-72-303 (a), Item 5. 4. Internal shorts between any two elements of an elec-
(d) Electrical supervision. tronic tube shall be indicated by either a trouble sig-
1. All nonreliable components such as electronic tube nal or an alarm signal if such failure prevents normal
heaters, blower motors, capacitors, functional heat- operation of the unit. Such a failure shall not result
ing elements, etc., the failure of which may result in in a fire hazard.
an open or shorted condition shall be electrically 5. Interruption and restoration of any source of electri-
supervised. See Sections 12-72-302 (e); 12-72-303 cal power connected to a detector unit shall not
(a), Item 3; 12-72-303 (e) and 12-72-303 (s). cause an alarm signal.
2. All electrical circuits formed by conductors extend- 6. The operation of any manual switching part of a
ing from the installation wiring connections for detector unit to other than its normal position while
interconnecting to a power supply or system control the detector unit is in the normal standby condition
units the failure of which may result in an open or shall be indicated by a trouble signal, if the off-nor-
ground fault shall be electrically supervised either at mal position of the switch interferes with normal
the detector or at the control unit to which a detector operation of the detector unit.
would be connected. See Section 12-72-302 (e). 7. To determine if a detector unit complies with the
3. The requirements of Sections 12-72-392 (d), Items 1 requirements for electrical supervision, see Section
and 2, do not apply to the following: 12-72-303 (d). The detector is to be tested with the
A. Trouble indicating circuits. representative system combination in its normal
supervisory condition, and the type of fault to be
B. The circuits of a detector employed only for detected is then to be introduced. Each fault shall be
releasing device service if the fault results in the applied separately, the results noted and the fault
same operation of the unit as that obtained by removed. The system combination is then to be
detection of combustion products. restored to its normal supervisory condition prior to
C. A circuit for a supplementary signal annunciator, establishing the next fault.
signal sounding appliance, motor controller, or (f) Sensitivity test.
similar appliance provided that a break or a
ground fault in no way affects the normal opera- 1. A combustion products detector shall operate within
tion of the unit except for omission of the supple- the limits specified below when subjected to a smol-
mentary feature. dering smoke condition using the combustion prod-
ucts and test equipment described in the following
(e) Electrical supervision test. paragraphs. If the detector employs a variable sensi-
1. The electrical circuits formed by conductors extend- tivity setting, test measurements are to be made at
ing from the installation wiring connections of a maximum, minimum and nominal settings.
detector for interconnection to a power supply A. Visible Smoke Obscuration Limits—
source or system control unit initiating device circuit
shall be electrically supervised so that the detector 0.0 percent per foot maximum (0.013)1
trouble signal or circuit is energized under any of the 0.2 percent per foot minimum (0.001)1
following fault conditions if the fault prevents nor- B. Relative Combustion Products Measurement
mal operation of the detector for fire alarm signals. Limits—
A. Single open or single ground fault of the connect- 9.0 volts maximum
ing field wiring. 1.0 volt minimum
B. Failure of a nonreliable component. See Sections C. Monitoring Means—
12-72-303 (d), Item 1; 12-72-303 (a), Item 3; and
Within 25 percent of the operating limits of the
12-72-303 (s).
detector rating.
2. A motor included in a detector, such as a blower
motor which is required to operate continuously 2. Combustion products. A mercerized cotton lamp
during normal operation, shall be supervised to indi- wick, nominally 7/8 inch wide by 1/8 inch in cross sec-
cate stalling or burnout. tion and secured by an alligator type clip 3 inches
below a removable cover assembly is to be employed
3. The heaters of all electronic tubes or other func- as the source of combustion products. The wick end is
tional heating elements employed in a detector shall to be cut square and smoldering initiated by momen-
be electrically supervised to indicate an open circuit tarily placing the wick end over a horizontally
mounted resistive heater element energized to a dull

1. Figure in parentheses denotes optical density per foot.

2. A meter suitable for this purpose is Weston Instrument Model 622 in conjunction with a Model 594 RR Photronic Cell.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 139

PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

red color. Smoldering may be promoted by passing a ODt = Optical density.

slow current of air over the wick end. The smoldering Tc = Smoke density meter reading with clear air.
end is to be cut away approximately 1/4 inch above the
charred section prior to conducting a succeeding trial. Ts = Smoke density meter reading with smoke.
The smoldering rate of the wick is to be such that the E. At any distance, the optical density per foot will be:
visible smoke obscuration increases at an approxi-
ODf = [Logo10 (Tc /Ts)]/d
mate uniform rate of 1.5 ± 0.2 percent per foot
(0.0329 0.001 optical density per foot). where:
(g) Test equipment and methods. ODf = Optical density per foot.
1. The visible smoke obscuration (optical density) in Tc = Smoke density meter reading with clear air.
the test compartment is to be measured by means of Ts = Smoke density meter reading with smoke.
a direct current (DC) type microammeter having a
maximum internal resistance of 100 ohms used with d = Distance in feet (m × 3.33).
a barrier type selenium photovoltaic cell, enclosed in 2. A meter3 calibrated in volts is to be used to measure
a hermetically sealed case. The meter and cell are the relative buildup of primarily invisible products
used in conjunction with the light produced by a of combustion. The meter, used with an ionization
tungsten filament automotive type lamp rated 6 volts detecting monitoring head without an alarm indicat-
and energized from a regulated supply to provide a ing circuit, has Americium 241 as the radioactive
light beam of uniform flux density. The photoelec- element. The monitoring head is to be located in the
tric cell and lamp are to be spaced 5 feet apart. The test chamber adjacent to the sample under test
following equations are to be used: 3. Test chamber. The following items refer to Figure
A. At any distance, the percent obscuration per foot 12-72-3-1.
will be: A. Cabinet. Plywood, 3/4 inch thick, except for 1/4
1/d
Ou = [1 – (Ts /Tc) ] 100 inch thick clear plastic front panel. Overall
where: dimensions approximately 691/2 inches long, 18
inches high, 11 inches deep. A center divider
Ou = Percent obscuration per foot. forms two equal 8 inches high by 10 inches deep
Ts = Smoke density meter reading with smoke. interior compartments. Inside of lower left side of
plastic front panel, as well as all interior surfaces
Tc = Smoke density meter reading with clear air.
of the cabinet are to be painted flat black. Plastic
d = Distance in feet (m × 3.33). front assembled with rubber gasket.
B. The percent obscuration of light for the full B. Combustible. Cotton wick. See Section 12-72-
length beam at any distance will be: 303 (f), Item 2. Secured by alligator type clip to
Od = [1 – (Ts /Tc)] 100 removable cap which covers a 31/4-inch diameter
hole in top of compartment. Cap measures
where: approximately 4 inches square. Center of hole
Od = Percent obscuration at distance d. located approximately 16 inches from left end.
Ts = Smoke density meter reading with smoke. C. Air dispersing medium. Three-fourths inch
Tc = Smoke density meter reading with clean air. nominal diameter solid glass beads to fill to
capacity an expanded metal container, approxi-
C. When the percent obscuration per foot is known, mately 4 inches wide, 8 inches high, 10 inches
the percent obscuration for the full length of any deep. Any space between top surface of beads
longer beam can be determined by the following: and compartment ceiling to be filled with foam
Od = [1 – [1 – (Ou /100)]d] 100 plastic. Provides uniform flow of air and combus-
where: tion products. Center of unit approximately 22
inches from right-hand side of compartment.
Od = Percent obscuration at distance d.
D. Air circulating fan. Motor mounted on 1/4-inch
Ou = Percent obscuration per foot. plastic support which fits into slots of compart-
d = Distance in feet (m × 3.33). ment and fills completely the upper chamber.
Employs 5 inch (100 cfm) diameter fan.
D. At any distance, the total optical density will be:
E. Opening. Rectangular hole, approximately 6 by
ODt = Logo10 (Tc /Ts)
4 inches, center of opening 4 inches from end of
where: cabinet.

1 Figure in parentheses denotes optical density per foot.

2 A meter suitable for this purpose is Weston Instrument Model 622 in conjunction with a Model 594 RR Photronic Cell.
3 A meter suitable for this purpose is a Pyrotronics, Inc., Type CPM-2 with monitoring head.

140 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

F. Exhaust fan. Same as Item D. Mounted in end approximately 3 inches below the compartment
wall of compartment. roof. See Section 12-72-303 (r), Item 2. Operation is
G. Exhaust fan cover. Plastic, approximately 53/4 to be continued until the detector is actuated in an
inches wide, 10 inches long, by 3/16 inch thick. alarm condition. Five test trials shall be conducted
Fitted in slots. on each sample with at least a five-minute interval
between each trial. The following readings are to be
H. Lamp. Low voltage automobile-type lamp. See recorded for each trial at the moment of actuation:
Section 12-72-303 (g), Item 1. (1) visible smoke obscuration, (2) combustion prod-
I. Monitoring head. Ionization detector mounted ucts meter reading, (3) elapsed time of test trial and
on back wall in test area. See Section 12-72-303 (4) the monitoring means. If a detector has a variable
(g), Item 2. Employed with Item M. sensitivity setting, five trials are to be made at the
maximum, minimum and nominal sensitivity set-
J. Photovoltaic cell. See Section 12-72-303 (g), tings.
Item 1. Mounted on Item K. Has a linear response
up to 800 microamperes at 200 footcandles. 6. The detector shall be uniform in operation so that
the average of the readings of the smoke density and
K. Air dispersing medium. Same as Item C, except combustion products meters of the mean three of
3 inches wide. five trials (highest and lowest not included) of one
L. Opening. Rectangular, approximately 6 by 2 detector shall be within 50 percent of the mean aver-
inches, center of opening 3 inches from left end. age of all detectors. If a detector has a variable sensi-
Covered with perforated metal having approxi- tivity setting, the requirement applies to each setting
mately 50 percent openings. tested.
M.Combustion products meter. See Section 12- 7. There shall be no false alarms or effect on operation
72-303 (g), Item 2. Meter is to have a 0–10 volts of a detector set at the maximum sensitivity setting
scale. Employed with ionization head (Item I). when two representative samples are subjected to
Provides indication of relative build-up of com- the following test conditions:
bustion products in test chamber.
A. Operation for three months in an ambient room
N. Control equipment. Includes fan and switch temperature of approximately 25 ± °C (77 ± 5°F)
controls, lamp voltage control and terminals for and relative humidity of 30–50 percent, having a
connection of microammeter. relatively clean atmosphere with minimum air
O. Obscuration equipment meter. See Section 12- movement.
72-303 (g), Item 1. Meter is to have 0–100 or 0– B. Operation for three months in a relatively clean
200 microamperes full scale. atmosphere in laminal air stream having a veloc-
P. Access door for test sample. Plastic, approxi- ity of 300 ± 25 fpm. in an ambient room tempera-
mately 111/2 by 71/2 by 1/4 inch thick. Secured by ture of approximately 25 ± 3°C (77 ± 5°F) and
hinges and spring catch to front section. Center of relative humidity of 30–50 percent.
door approximately 30 inches from right-hand C. Ten cycles of humidity variation between 20 and
side of cabinet. Fitted with rubber gasket to pre- 90 ± 5 percent at room temperature.
vent air loss.
D. Ten cycles of temperature variation between
4. Test method. The test is to be conducted in an 17.8°C and 66°C (0°F and 150°F).
ambient temperature of 23 ± 3°C (73.4 ± 5°F) at a
relative humidity between 30–50 percent and a baro- E. Ten cycles of rapid change of air velocity from 0
metric pressure of not less than 700 millimeters of to 300 ± 25 fpm.
mercury. A minimum of 12 samples of the detector, F. Ten cycles of a 2-inch drop of air pressure start-
previously energized for at least 16 hours or as rec- ing from 29-31 ± 0.5 inch of mercury.
ommended by the manufacturer from a source of
supply in accordance with Section 12-72-303 (a), G. Fifty cycles of momentary interruption of the
Item 5, are to be subjected to this test. The samples detector power supply at a rate of not more than 6
shall be momentarily disconnected from the source cycles per minute.
of supply, placed in the center of the lower section 8. Two detectors, employing a maximum sensitivity
of the test chamber with the signaling contacts con- setting are to be mounted in a position of normal
nected to an indicating circuit and re-energized from use, energized from a source of supply in accor-
the specified source of supply. dance with Section 12-72-303 (a), Item 5, and sub-
5. With the air velocity in the test compartment main- jected to each of the above test conditions.
tained at 30-35 feet per minute (fpm), as measured 9. For tests, C, D and F of Section 12-72-303 (g), Item
in the sample area, the wick is to be inserted into the 5, the time of cycling from one extreme to the other
upper chamber with the smoldering end facing shall be a maximum of one hour and a minimum of
downward. The air flow is to be parallel to the 1/8- five minutes. For test E the air velocity is to be
inch thick end of the wick and the wick end is to be turned on and off abruptly with a maximum of one

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 141

PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

hour between applications. For test F the time of 2. The fire tests are to be conducted in a room having a
change from one pressure to the other is approxi- smooth ceiling with no physical obstructions
mately one-half minute. The cycling is conducted at between the fire source and detectors and with mini-
a rate not faster than once per 10 seconds. Each mum air movement. The room is to be provided with
cycle is to start at one test condition, changing to the means for the removal of combustion products, such
other extreme, and returning to the original test con- as vents or exhaust fans. Heaters are to be provided
dition. for maintaining the room temperature ambient, if
necessary. The heaters are to be shut off during a test
10. The test samples subjected to tests A-G of Section
trial. The room shall be of sufficient cross-sectional
12-72-303 (g), Item 5, are to be tested for sensitivity,
area so that the detectors can be located in accor-
see Sections 12-72-303 (f) following the completion
dance with the spacing layout illustrated by Figure
of the test. The response of the detectors, when
12-72-3-2 and any reflection of combustion prod-
tested in accordance with the sensitivity test, shall
ucts is prevented from returning to the detectors
not vary more than 50 percent from the value
from adjacent walls during the course of the test.
obtained prior to the test.
The room height shall be such that the vertical dis-
(h) Deleted. tance from the base of the combustible to the ceiling
(i) Fire test. is approximately 12 feet.
3. The tests are to be conducted in an ambient tempera-
1. At least two of the four detectors subjected to each
ture between 15.6°C and 26.7°C (60°F and 80°F)
of the following combustible tests shall operate for
and a relative humidity of 50 ± 20 percent. The test
alarm when installed on 30-foot spacings and
samples are to be energized from a source of supply
exposed to the following four types of controlled
in accordance with Section 12-72-303 (a), Item 5.
test fires. The maximum response time shall be two
minutes for tests A, B and C, and four minutes for 4. Four samples, each adjusted to their minimum sensi-
test D. tivity setting, are to be installed on the ceiling at a
30-foot spacing schedule with relation to the test fire
A. Paper. Combustible is to be 1/2 pound of shred- (21.2-foot linear distance measured along the ceiling
ded newsprint type paper, strips to be 1/4 to 3/8 to a point directly over the center of the test fire).
inch wide, 6 to 24 inches long placed in a recep- See Figure 12-72-3-2. The time starts at the moment
tacle formed of 1/4-inch mesh hardware cloth. The of ignition. At least two trials shall be conducted for
receptacle is to be approximately 12 inches in each combustible. Each detector shall respond at
diameter by 24 inches high with a hardware cloth least once to each of the four combustibles
bottom 6 inches above the base. The combustible employed.
is to be ignited at the bottom center. Paper is to be
dried prior to test. 5. Sensitivity monitoring instruments are to be
employed to determine that the test room area is free
B. Polystyrene. Combustible is to be 2 ounces of of products of combustion prior to conducting a test.
typical foam polystyrene type packing material,
with no flame inhibitor, each piece 1/4 to 3/8 inch (j) Temperature test.
diameter, 3 to 10 inches long placed in the same 1. The materials or components employed in a detector
type of receptacle as used for test A. Alternate shall not be affected adversely by the temperatures
shape of combustible is cylindrical, 3/4 inch diam- attained under any condition of normal operation.
eter by 1/2 inch high having a 3/8-inch diameter 2. A material or component will be considered as being
hole. The combustible is to be ignited at the bot- adversely affected if it is subject to a temperature
tom center. rise greater than that indicated in Table 12-72-3F.
C. Gasoline. Combustible is to be 200 cubic centi- 3. The classes of material used for electrical insulation
meters (cc) of regular leaded gasoline placed in a referred to in Items 8 and 9 of Table 12-72-3F
9-inch diameter steel pan container 11/2 inches include the following:
deep.
Class A — Impregnated cotton, paper and similar
D. Wood brand (Class A). Combustible is to be (Class 105) organic materials when impregnated,
three layers of kiln dried fir strips, each strip 3/4 and enamel as applied to coil windings.
inch in cross section, 12 inches long with 12
strips in each layer. Strips are to be nailed or sta- Class B — Inorganic materials, such as mica and
pled together with adjacent layers at right angles (Class 130) impregnated asbestos.
to each other. Overall dimensions of wood brand 4. All values for temperature rises apply to equipment
is approximately 12 by 12 by 21/4 inches high. intended for use in ambient temperatures normally
The brand is to be ignited by burning 100 cc of prevailing which usually are not higher than 25°C
denatured alcohol consisting of 190 proof (95 (77°F). If equipment is intended specifically for use
percent) ethanol to which 5 percent methanol is with a prevailing ambient temperature constantly
added as a denaturant. The alcohol is placed in more than 25°C (77°F), the test of the equipment is
the same type of container as used for test C. made at the higher ambient temperature, and the

142 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

allowable temperature rises specified in the table are with Section 12-72-303 (a), Item 5, and operated
to be reduced by the amount of the difference under the following conditions:
between that higher ambient temperature and 25°C A. Normal standby—(16 hours) constant tempera-
(77°F). tures.
5. Temperature measurements on equipment intended B. Alarm—(1 hour).
for recessed mounting shall be made with the unit
installed in an enclosure of nominal 3/4-inch wood C. Alarm— (7 hours) abnormal test.
having clearances of 2 inches on the top, sides and 13. For test condition C the temperature limits may be
rear, and the front extended to be flush with the exceeded but there shall be no manifestation of a fire
detector cover. hazard or approaching failure and the detector shall
6. A temperature is considered to be constant when operate in a normal manner following the test.
three successive readings, taken at not less than five 14. The detector is to be subjected to the Dielectric
minute intervals, indicate no change. Withstand Test following the above test.
7. Temperatures are to be measured by means of ther- (k) Over-and-under voltage operation.
mocouples consisting of wires not larger than No. 24
AWG. The preferred method of measuring the tem- 1. A detector shall withstand the continuous applica-
perature of a coil is the thermocouple method, but a tion of 110 percent of the test voltage specified by
temperature measurement by either the thermocou- Section 12-72-303 (a), Item 5, in the normal standby
ple or resistance method is acceptable, except that condition at maximum and minimum sensitivity set-
the thermocouple method is not to be employed for a tings without being affected adversely and shall
temperature measurement at any point where sup- operate successfully for normal signaling perfor-
plementary thermal insulation is employed. mance at the specified increased voltage. Sensitivity
measurements at the increased voltage shall be
8. If thermocouples are used in the determination of within 50 percent from the readings measured at
temperatures, it is standard practice to employ ther- rated voltage.
mocouples consisting of No. 24-30 AWG iron and
2. For operation at the higher voltage four new detec-
constantan wires and a potentiometer type indicating
tors are to be subjected to the specified increased
instrument. Such equipment will be used whenever
voltage in the normal standby condition for at least
referee temperature measurements by thermocou-
16 hours and then tested for normal signaling opera-
ples are necessary.
tion and sensitivity.
9. The thermocouple wire is to conform with the
3. A detector shall operate for its normal signaling per-
requirements for “special” thermocouples as listed
in the Table of Limits of Error of Thermocouples in formance while energized from a supply of 85 per-
ANSI C96.1-1964 (R1969). cent of the test voltage specified by Section 12-72-
303 (a), Item 5, for both maximum and minimum
10. The temperature of a copper coil winding is deter- sensitivity settings. Sensitivity measurements at the
mined by the resistance method by comparing the reduced voltage shall be at 50 percent of the read-
resistance of the winding at the temperature to be ings measured at rated voltage.
determined with the resistance at a known tempera-
4. For operation at the reduced voltage four new detec-
ture by means of the equation:
tors are to be energized from a source of supply in
TE (R/r) (234.5 + t) – 234.5 accordance with Section 12-72-303 (a), Item 5, fol-
where: lowing which the voltage is to be reduced to 85 per-
cent of nameplate rating and then tested for normal
T = is the temperature to be determined in degrees C. signaling operation and sensitivity.
t = is the known temperature in degrees C. (l) Variable ambient temperature.
R = is the resistance in ohms at the temperature to be 1. A detector shall be capable of operating in a normal
determined. manner when tested in an ambient temperature of
r = is the resistance in ohms at the known temperature. 0°C and 49°C (32°F and 120°F), at a relative humid-
11. As it is generally necessary to de-energize the wind- ity between 30-50 percent.
ing before measuring R, the value of R at shutdown 2. Two detectors are to be maintained at each ambient
may be determined by taking several resistance temperature for a sufficient length of time to ensure
measurements at short intervals, beginning as that thermal equilibrium has been reached. The units
quickly as possible after the instant of shutdown. A are then to be tested for sensitivity while connected
curve of the resistance values and the time may be to a source of supply in accordance with Section 12-
plotted and extrapolated to give the value of R at 72-303 (a), Item 5.
shutdown. 3. Sensitivity measurements shall be recorded before
12. To determine compliance with this test, a detector is and during exposure to each ambient temperature in
to be connected to a source of supply in accordance accordance with the sensitivity test.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 143

PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

4. Each unit shall operate normally in each ambient. alarm signal operation at a rate of not more than 10
The sensitivity readings measured with the units in cycles per minute with the detector connected to a
each ambient temperature shall be within 50 percent source of supply in accordance with Section 12-72-
of the value recorded in the normal ambient condi- 303 (a), Item 5, and with related devices or equiva-
tion. lent loads connected to the output circuits. There
shall be no electrical or mechanical failure or evi-
(m) Overload.
dence of failure of the detector components. The
1. A detector shall be capable of operating in a normal same detector shall be tested that had been subjected
manner after being subjected to 50 cycles of alarm previously to the overload test.
signal operation at a rate of not more than six cycles
2. Separately energized circuits of a detector shall be
per minute with the supply circuit to the detector at
capable of performing acceptably when operated for
115 percent of rated nameplate voltage. Each cycle
6,000 cycles at a rate of not more than 10 cycles per
shall consist of starting with the detector energized
minute. When an electrical load is involved, the con-
in the normal standby condition, initiation of an
tacts of the device shall be caused to make and break
alarm by smoke or electrical means, and restoration
the normal current at the voltage specified by Sec-
of the detector to normal standby condition.
tion 12-72-303 (a), Item 5. The load shall represent
2. Rated test loads are to be connected to those output that which the device is intended to control. The
circuits of the detector which are energized from the endurance tests of the separately energized circuits
detector power supply, such as remote indicators, may be conducted in conjunction with the endurance
relays, etc. The test loads shall be those devices, or test of the detector. There shall be no electrical or
the equivalent, normally intended for connection. If mechanical failure of the detector nor undue pitting,
an equivalent load is employed for a device consist- burning or welding of any relay contacts.
ing of an inductive load, a power factor of 60 per-
cent is to be employed. The rated loads are (o) Dielectric tests.
established initially with the detector connected to a 1. A detector shall be capable of withstanding, without
source of supply in accordance with Section 12-72- breakdown for a period of one minute, the applica-
303 (a), Item 5, following which the voltage is tion of a 60 Hz alternating potential between high-
increased to 115 percent of rating. voltage, live parts and dead-metal parts, and
3. For direct current signaling circuits an equivalent between live parts of high- and low-voltage circuits,
inductive test load is to have the required direct cur- except as noted in Item 2. The test potential shall be:
rent resistance for the test current and the inductance A. 1,000 volts RMS plus twice rated voltage for
(calibrated) to obtain a power factor of 60 percent high-voltage circuits.
when connected to a 60 Hertz (Hz) alternating cur-
2. A detector employing a low-voltage circuit shall be
rent potential equal to the rated direct current test
capable of withstanding, for one minute without
voltage. When the inductive load has both the
breakdown, a 60 Hz alternating potential of 500
required direct current resistance and the required
volts RMS applied between low-voltage live parts
inductance, the current measured with the load con-
and dead-metal parts.
nected to an alternating current circuit will be equal
to 0.6 times the current measured with the load con- 3. Any reference grounds shall be disconnected prior
nected to a direct current circuit when the voltage of to the test applications.
each circuit is the same. 4. A transformer, the output voltage of which is essen-
4. Separately energized circuits of a detector such as tially sinusoidal, can be varied and can maintain the
dry contacts shall be capable of operating in a nor- specified high potential voltage at the equipment
mal manner after being subjected for 50 cycles of during the duration of the test and is to be used to
signal operation at a rate of not more than six cycles determine compliance with the foregoing. The
per minute while connected to a source of supply in applied potential is to be increased gradually from
accordance with Section 12-72-303 (a), Item 5, with zero until the required test value is reached and is to
150 percent rated loads at 60 percent power factor be held at that value for one minute.
applied to output circuits which do not receive (p) Abnormal operation.
energy from the detector. There shall be no electrical
or mechanical failure of the switching circuit. 1. A detector shall be capable of operating continu-
ously under abnormal conditions without resulting
5. The test loads shall be set at 150 percent of rated
in a fire hazard.
current while connected to a separate power source
of supply in accordance with Section 12-72-303 (a), 2. To determine if a detector complies with the require-
Item 5. ment of Item 1, it is to be operated under the most
severe abnormal conditions liable to be encountered
(n) Endurance.
in service while connected to a source of supply in
1. A detector shall be capable of operating in a normal accordance with Section 12-72-303 (a), Item 5.
manner after being subjected to 6,000 cycles of Emission of flame or molten metal, or any other

144 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

manifestation of a fire hazard, is considered to be a 2. Sensitivity measurements shall be recorded before

failure. and during exposure to the humidity condition in
3. In determining if a detector complies with the accordance with the sensitivity test.
requirement with respect to circuit-fault conditions, 3. The sensitivity values measured with the unit in the
the fault condition is to be maintained continuously humid atmosphere shall be within 50 percent of the
until constant temperatures are attained, or until value recorded in the normal ambient condition.
burnout occurs, if the fault does not result in the (s) Component failure.
operation of an overload protective device. Shorting
of electrolytic capacitors would represent a typical 1. Failure of electronic components of questionable
fault. reliability such as opening or shorting of electrolytic
capacitors shall either have no adverse effect on nor-
(q) Transient tests. mal operation or may be indicated by a trouble or an
1. Two detectors shall be capable of operating in a nor- alarm signal.
mal manner after being subjected to 500 externally 2. If failure of a questionable component cannot be
induced and 500 internally induced transients while indicated by a trouble or alarm signal, a reliable
energized from a source of supply in accordance component shall be employed. The reliability may
with Section 12-72-303 (a), Item 5, and connected to be based on derating or on reliability data recorded
the devices normally used with the unit. for the particular component. See Section 12-72-303
2. The primary of a 120/240 volt, 60 Hz, 2 kilovolt- (a).
amperes (kVA) isolating power transformer, with (t) Dust test.
the secondary open circuited, is to be connected to
the same branch circuit as the detector. The input to 1. The sensitivity of a detector shall either not be
the transformer is to be de-energized for approxi- affected adversely by an accumulation of dust or
mately one second by an automatic switching device may result in a false alarm.
at a rate of not more than six cycles per minute for 2. To determine compliance with Item 1 two samples
500 cycles. During the test the detector is to be oper- in their normal mounting position, are to be placed,
ated for normal signaling performance to determine de-energized, in an air tight chamber having an
whether transients, generated by the random col- internal volume of at least 3 cubic feet.
lapse of the magnetic field of the transformer,
resulted in a component failure or other adverse 3. Approximately 2 ounces of cement dust, capable of
effect. passing through a 200 mesh screen, is to be circu-
lated for 15 minutes by compressed air or a blower
3. The electrical characteristics of the testing trans- under controlled velocity conditions not exceeding
former are as follows: 50 rpm so as to completely envelop the sample in
INDUCTANCE QUALITY
DC the chamber.
RESISTANCE
VOLTAGE FREQUENCY (L) FACTOR
MILLIHENRIES Q
(R) OHMS 4. Following the exposure to dust the detector is to be
(23°C)
removed carefully, mounted in its intended position,
Primary energized from a source of supply in accordance
120 1,000 21.2 11.50 0.244
winding
with Section 12-72-303 (a), Item 5, and tested for
Secondary sensitivity unless a false alarm is obtained. Sensitiv-
240 1,000 109.3 4.65 0.371
winding
ity measurements after subjection to the dust test
4. Two detectors are to be energized in the normal may be greater than 50 percent toward the more sen-
standby condition while connected to a source of sitive region but shall not be more than 50 percent
supply in accordance with Section 12-72-303 (a), toward the insensitive region.
Item 5, which is to be interrupted for approximately (u) Static discharge test.
one second at a rate of not more than six cycles per 1. The components of a detector shall be shielded so
minute for a total of 500 cycles. Following the test that its operation is not affected adversely, or a false
the detector is operated for normal signaling perfor- alarm obtained, when subjected to static electric dis-
mance. charges. Operation of the trouble circuit during this
(r) Humidity test. test is not considered a failure.
1. Two detectors shall be capable of operating in a nor- 2. Each of two detectors is to be mounted in its
mal manner while energized from a source of supply intended mounting position and connected to a
in accordance with Section 12-72-303 (a), Item 5, source of supply in accordance with Section 12-72-
after having been exposed for 24 hours to moist air 303 (a), Item 5. A 250 picofarad low leakage capaci-
having a relative humidity of 85 + 5 percent at a tor rated 10,000 volts direct current, is to be con-
temperature of 30 ± 2°C (86 ± 3°F). The sensitivity nected to two high-voltage insulated leads, 3 feet
shall be determined with the detector connected to a long, stripped 1 inch at each end. The end of each
source of supply in accordance with Section 12-72- lead is to be attached to a metal test probe mounted
303 (a), Item 5. on a plastic insulating rod to permit manipulation

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 145

PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

and isolation from shock hazard. The test probes ter of a 6 by 4 foot nominal 3/4-inch thick plywood
shall be metallic rods with a spherical end of 1/4-inch board which is secured in place at four corners. A 3-
radius. The capacitors are to be charged by touching foot board impact is to be applied to the center of the
the ends of the test leads to a source of 10,000 volts reverse side of this board by means of a 1.18 pound,
direct current for at least two seconds for each dis- 2 inch diameter steel sphere either (1) swung
charge. through a pendulum arc from a sufficient height, (h)
of 2.54 feet or (2) dropped from a sufficient height
3. Ten discharges with at least a five minute interval
(h) of 2.54 feet to apply 3 foot-pounds of energy
between discharges are to be applied to different
depending upon the mounting of the equipment. See
points on the exposed surface of the detector,
Figure 12-72-3-3.
recharging the capacitors for each discharge. Five
discharges are to be made with one probe connected 3. Compliance with Item 1 is to be determined by sup-
to earth ground and the other probed on the detector porting the detector in its intended mounting posi-
surface followed by five discharges with the polarity tion and conducting the jarring while the unit is in
reversed. the normal standby condition and connected to a
4. Following the discharges, if a trouble or an alarm rated source of supply in accordance with Section
signal is not obtained, the detector is to be tested for 12-72-303 (a), Item 5. Following the jarring the
sensitivity. Sensitivity measurements shall be within unit(s) shall be tested for sensitivity. Sensitivity
25 percent of the average of the readings measured measurements following the jarring shall be within
prior to the test. 25 percent of the average of the readings measured
prior to the test.
(v) Vibration test.
(x) Corrosion test.
1. A detector shall be capable of withstanding vibra-
tion without breakage or damage to parts. Following 1. A detector shall be capable of operating in a normal
the vibration the detector shall be capable of operat- manner after being subjected to the corrosive atmo-
ing in a normal manner. sphere tests described in the following paragraphs.
2. To determine compliance with Item 1, sensitivity 2. Two samples, one at maximum and one at minimum
measurements following the vibration shall be con- sensitivity setting, are to be exposed to an atmo-
ducted in accordance with the sensitivity test and sphere containing approximately 1 percent hydrogen
shall be within 50 percent of the value recorded in sulphide by volume in air saturated with water vapor
the normal ambient condition. at room temperature for 10 days. The units are not
energized during the exposure.
3. Two samples, one at the maximum and one at the
minimum sensitivity setting, are to be secured in 3. Two samples, one at maximum and one at minimum
their intended mounting position on a mounting sensitivity settings are to be exposed to an atmo-
board and the board, in turn, securely fastened to a sphere containing approximately 1 percent carbon
variable speed vibration machine having an ampli- dioxide and 0.5 percent sulfur dioxide by volume in
tude of 0.01 inch. The frequency of vibration is to be air saturated with water vapor at room temperature
varied from 10 to 35 cycles per second in increments for 10 days.
of five cycles per second until a resonant frequency 4. The detectors are to be tested for sensitivity prior to
is obtained. The samples are then to be vibrated at exposure to the corrosive atmospheres. Twenty-four
the maximum resonant frequency for a period of hours or more after the required exposure the detec-
one-fourth hour. If no resonant frequency is tors are to be again tested for sensitivity. Sensitivity
obtained, the samples are to be vibrated at 35 cycles measurements following the exposure to the corro-
per second for a period of four hours. sive atmospheres shall be within 50 percent of the
4. For these tests, amplitude is defined as the maxi- value recorded in the sensitivity test, except as indi-
mum displacement of sinusoidal motion from a cated in Item 5.
position of rest or one-half of the total table dis- 5. The sensitivity following exposure to the corrosion
placement. Resonance is defined as the maximum atmospheres described in Item 3 may exceed 50 per-
magnification of the applied vibration. cent from the value measured prior to the corrosion
(w) Jarring test. exposure if the same units, set at their minimum sen-
sitivity, are subjected to and comply with the fire
1. A detector shall be capable of withstanding jarring test requirements described in Section 12-72-303 (i),
resulting from impact and vibration such as might be Items 1-5.
experienced in service, without affecting adversely
its subsequent normal operation. A trouble signal (y) Radioactive element measurement test.
resulting from the jarring may be permitted if the
1. The total activity of the radioactive source(s) of a
normal operation is not affected.
detector shall not exceed the maximum content
2. The detector and associated equipment, if any, are to specified in the marking on the detector by more
be mounted in a position of intended use to the cen- than 10 percent.

146 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

2. The measurement shall be made on at least five sam- test. Consideration may be given to leaving in place compo-
ples of the detector in the as-received condition nents and other parts which may influence the performance.
using appropriate instrumentation and techniques.
(d) Two of the three test samples shall show acceptable
(z) Paint loading test. performance. If one sample fails, the test shall be repeated on
a new sample with the flame applied under the same condi-
1. A detector shall operate in a normal manner and
tions as for the failing sample. If the new specimen fails to
shall comply with the requirements of the sensitivity
comply with the requirements, the material is not acceptable.
test after painting, if the detector assembly, screens,
The following test equipment is employed.
openings, etc., are likely to be clogged by painting.
If a detector is marked prominently so it will be visi- 1. Test chamber. The test chamber consists of a sheet-
ble after the unit is installed which prohibits paint- metal cell 2 feet by 1 foot by 1 foot, open at the top
ing, then this test need not be conducted. See and on one long side. The chamber shall be located
Section 12-72-303 (a) and (b). so that an ample supply of air is provided, but the
sample is not subjected to drafts. The chamber may
2. The exterior surfaces of two samples, including
be placed in a hood, provided that the fan is turned
screened openings, etc., are to be coated with a lead-
off during the test and is allowed to run only
oil base paint which is spread at approximately two
between tests to remove fumes.
times the paint manufacturer’s recommended
spreading rate. The paint is to be allowed to dry, for 2. A ring stand with a suitable clamp is used for sup-
five days at room temperature. Following this, the porting the specimens.
samples are to be given a second identical applica-
3. Burner and mounting block. The test flame is to
tion of paint and again permitted to dry for five days.
be obtained by means of a Tirrill Burner having a
The detectors are to be tested for sensitivity, one at
nominal bore of 3/8 inch. The tube length above the
maximum and one at minimum sensitivity setting
primary air inlets is to be approximately 4 inches.
before and after the specified paint loading. Sensi-
The burner is to be adjusted so that, while the burner
tivity measurements following the paint loading
is in a vertical position, the overall height of the
shall be within 25 percent of the average of the read-
flame is 5 inches and the height of the inner blue
ings measured prior to the paint loading.
cone is 11/2 inches. A mounting block is to be pro-
vided so that the burner may be positioned at an
angle of 20 degrees from the vertical.
TESTS ON THERMOPLASTIC MATERIALS
4. A stopwatch or clock.
Sec. 12-72-304.
5. Circulating-air oven.
(a) General. Thermoplastic materials included for the sole
support of current carrying parts or as an enclosure of an (e) Conditioning and mounting. The test samples are to
appliance shall be subjected to the tests included in Sections be conditioned by placing them in a circulating-air oven
12-72-304(b) - (i) inclusive. Where possible, the complete maintained at a uniform temperature not less than 10°C
appliance shall be used. higher than the maximum temperature of the material mea-
sured under normal operating conditions but not less than
(b) Temperature test.
70°C in any case. The samples are to remain in the oven for
1. There shall be no excessive warping or exposure of seven days. Prior to test the samples are to be returned to
high-voltage uninsulated current carrying parts so as room temperature. The test sample is to be mounted as
to impair operation when representative samples of intended in service in the test chamber. The test flame is to be
a plastic material are aged for seven hours in an air applied at an angle of 20 degrees from the vertical to any por-
circulating oven maintained at 90°C (194°F). tion of the interior of the enclosure judged as liable to be
ignited by proximity to live or arcing parts, coils, wiring, etc.
2. At least three representative samples shall be placed
The test flame shall be applied to a different location on each
in the oven. At the end of the seven hours, the sam-
of the three samples tested. The test flame is to be applied for
ples shall be removed, permitted to cool and then
five seconds and removed for five seconds. The operation is
examined for adverse distortion.
to be repeated until the specimen has been subjected to a total
(c) Flame test. A plastic material employed as part of an of five applications of the test flame.
appliance for the sole support of current carrying parts or as
(f) Impact test. An appliance employing a thermoplastic
an enclosure shall not continue to burn for more than one
enclosure shall withstand three 5 foot-pound impacts without
minute after the fifth five-second application of a test flame,
exposure of live parts, impairment of the operation of the
with an interval of five seconds between applications of the
appliance or result in a shock hazard.
flame. There shall be do dripping of particles, complete con-
sumption of the sample during the test and the material shall Each of two units is to be mounted securely in a position
not be destroyed in the area of the test flame to such an extent of normal use on a surface representative of a typical installa-
that the integrity of the enclosure is affected. Three samples tion. Three 5 foot-pound impacts are to be applied to each
of the material or three test specimens consisting of a part or sample, each trial on a different section of the enclosure, by
section of the polymeric enclosure shall be subjected to this means of a 1.18 pound, 2-inch diameter steel sphere swung

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 147

PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

through a pendulum arc from a sufficient height to apply 5 o-dichlorobenzene—for simple vinyl type polymers
foot-pounds of energy. e.g., polyvinylchlorides.
Following the impacts, the unit is to be examined for dam- n,n-dimethylformamide—for polymers of nitrogen
age and checked for normal operation by being energized content, e.g., polyamides.
from a source of rated voltage and frequency. Cracking of the Some high molecular weight or highly cross-linked poly-
enclosure is acceptable if it does not impair normal operation, mers which are insoluble in all volatile solvents are to be pre-
but is not acceptable if a dust or moisture tight enclosure is pared by the pressed halide-disk technique. A few milligrams
required. of the plastic are to be removed from the surface of a sample
(g) Infrared analysis of plastics. The basic composition by a fine file. These filings are to be ground in a mechanical
of a plastic material employed for the sole support of current vibrating ball mill for three to five minutes. Care must be
carrying parts or an enclosure is to be by infrared analysis. taken to reduce the particle size to a size (approximately 2
micrometers) smaller than that of the shortest wave length to
(h) Sample preparation. The general technique for pre-
be scanned so as to minimize scattering effects. The appropri-
paring plastics for infrared analysis is to dissolve the sample
ately ground sample is to be intimately mixed with spectro-
in a suitable boiling hot solvent. The resulting solution is then
scopic grade potassium bromide and a sufficient amount of
to be placed on a sodium chloride plate from which the sol-
this mixture to produce a 1 mm thick, 1/2-inch diameter disk is
vent is evaporated by gentle heating, thereby leaving a rea-
to be placed in an evacuable die. The die is to be placed under
sonably uniform thin film of the plastic on the sodium
vacuum and a pressure of 10,000-15,000 psi is to be applied.
chloride plate. The salt plate is then mounted in a spectrome-
The pressed disk is removed from the die and mounted in a
ter and the infrared spectrum of the plastic is recorded.
spectrometer, and the infrared spectrum of the plastic is
A suitable solvent is one which will dissolve the plastic recorded.
without reacting with it and which can be readily evaporated
on gentle heating. (i) Instrumentation. The infrared spectrum from 2.0–15.0
micrometers (5000–667 cm-1) of a given plastic is to be
Examples of solvents suitable for certain polymer types are: obtained on an optical double beam recording infrared spec-
acetone—for polymers of high oxygen content, e.g., trometer, having either a grating or sodium chloride prism
polyesters and phenolic resins. dispersing element.

TABLE 12-72-3A—CAST-METAL ENCLOSURES

MINIMUM THICKNESS IN INCHES

Cast metal of other

Die-cast metal
USE OR DIMENSIONS OF AREA INVOLVED than the die-cast type
1 1
Area of 24 square inches or less and having no dimension greater than 6 inches /16 /8
3 1
Area greater than 24 square inches or having any dimensions greater than 6 inches /32 /8
1 1
At a threaded conduit hole /4 /4
1 1
At an unthreaded conduit hole /8 /8

TABLE 12-72-3B—SHEET METAL ENCLOSURES

MINIMUM THICKNESS OF SHEET METAL IN INCHES
MAXIMUM ENCLOSURE DIMENSIONS COPPER, BRASS
Steel
OR ALUMINUM
Any linear dimension in inches Area of any surface in square inches Coated Uncoated
0.035 0.031 0.045
12 90
(20) (20) (16)
0.046 0.042 0.058
24 360
(18) (18) (14)
0.057 0.053 0.075
48 1,200
(16) (16) (12)
0.070 0.067 0.095
60 1,500
(14) (14) (10)
0.097 0.093 0.122
Over 60 Over 1,500
(12) (12) (8)

148 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

TABLE 12-72-3C—THICKNESS OF GLASS COVERS

MAXIMUM SIZE OF OPENING MINIMUM THICKNESS
Length or width in inches Area in square inches OF GLASS IN INCHES

1
4 16 /16
1 1
12 144 /
8

Over 12 Over 144 1

1. One-eighth inch or more, depending upon the size, shape and mounting of the glass panel.

TABLE 12-72-3D—THICKNESS OF INSULATING MATERIAL

MAXIMUM DIMENSION IN INCHES MAXIMUM AREA IN SQUARE INCHES MINIMUM THICKNESS IN INCHES
3 1
24 360 8 /
1
48 1,152 /2
5
48 1,728 /8
3
Over 48 Over 1,728 /4
1. Material less than 3/8 inch but not less than 1/8 inch in thickness may be employed for a panel if the panel is adequately supported or reinforced to provide
rigidity not less than that of a 3/8-inch sheet. Material less than 1/8 inch may be employed for subassemblies, such as supports for terminals for internal wiring,
resistors and other components.

TABLE 12-72-3E—MINIMUM SPACINGS

MINIMUM SPACING—INCHES1
POINT OF APPLICATION Voltage Range Volts Through Air Over Surface

To walls of enclosure
1 1
Cast-metal enclosures 0–300 /4 /4
1 1
Sheet metal enclosures 0–300 /2 /2
1 3
Installation wiring terminals 0–30 /8 /16
1 1
With barriers—see Section 12-72-302 (t), 31–150 /8 /4
1 3
Item 6 151–300 /4 /8
3 3
0–30 /16 /16
1 1
Without barriers 31–150 /4 /4
1 1
151–300 /4 /8
1
0–30 /323 /323
1
Rigidly clamped assemblies2 3 3
0–30 /64 /64
100 volt-amperes maximum 1 1
31–150 /16 /16
Over 100 volt amperes 3 3
151–300 /32 /32
1 1
0–30 /16 /8
1 1
Other parts 31–150 /8 /4
1 3
151–300 /4 /8
1. Measurements are to be made with solid wire of adequate ampacity for the applied load connected to each terminal. In no case is the wire to be smaller than
No. 18 AWG.
2. Rigidly clamped assemblies include such parts as contact springs on relays or cam switches, printed wiring boards, etc.
3. Spacings less than those indicated, but in no case less than 1/64 inch are acceptable for connection of integrated circuits and similar components where the
spacing between the adjacent connecting wires on the component is less than 1/32 inch.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 149

PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

TABLE 12-72-3F—MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE RISES

DEVICE OR MATERIAL DEGREES °C DEGREES °F

1. Any point on rectifiers:

A. Copper oxide 30 54
B. Germanium 50 90
C. Magnesium-copper sulphide 95 171
D. Selenium 50 90
E. Silicon 75 135
2. Rubber or thermoplastic insulation 351 631
3. Varnished cloth insulation 60 108
4. Fuses 65 117
5. Surfaces adjacent to or upon which the unit may be mounted in service 65 117
6. Wood or other combustible material 65 117
7. Fiber used as electrical insulation 65 117
8. Class A (Class 105) insulation 653 1173
9. Class B (Class 130) insulation 853 1533
10. Phenolic composition used as electrical insulation 125 225
11. Capacitors 40 72
4
12. Solid state devices (transistors, silicon-controlled rectifiers, etc.) integrated circuits See
13. Wirewound resistor 1502 3022
14. Carbon resistor See4
(27) less than the
15. Sealing compound 15
melting point2
1. This limitation does not apply to an insulated conductor or a material which has been investigated and accepted for a higher temperature.
2. These are limiting temperatures, not temperature rises.
3. 10°C (18°F) higher on coil insulation if measured by the resistance method.
4. The temperature of a solid-state device shall not exceed 50 percent of its rating during the normal standby condition. The temperature of a solid-state device
shall not exceed 75 percent of its rated temperature under any other condition of operation of the complete unit which produces the maximum temperature
dissipation of its components. For reference purposes 0°C (32°F) shall be considered as 0 percent. For integrated circuits the loading factor shall not exceed 50
percent of its rating under the normal standby condition and 75 percent under any condition of operation. Both solid-state components and integrated circuits
may be operated up to the maximum ratings, under any one of the following conditions:
4.1. All components comply with the requirements Mil-Std. 883C.
4.2. A quality control program is established by the manufacturer consisting of inspection and test of 100 percent of all components, either on an individual
basis, as part of a subassembly, or equivalent.
4.3. Each assembled production unit is subjected to a burn in test while in an alarm condition for 24 hours while connected to a source of rated nameplate
voltage and frequency in an ambient of at least 49°C (120°F) followed by an operational test the maximum temperature on a carbon resistor shall be not
greater than 50°C during the normal standby condition and not greater than 75°C during the alarm condition.

150 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

TABLE 12-72-3G—OBSCURATION—OPTICAL DENSITY CHART

(Based on a 5-foot light beam)
PERCENT PER FOOT
METER READING OBSCURATION TOTAL OBSCURATION TOTAL OPTICAL DENSITY OPTIC DENSITY PER FOOT
(Microamperes) Ou Od ODt ODf

100.0 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000

99.5 0.1002 0.5001 0.0022 0.0004
99.0 0.2008 1.0001 0.0044 0.0009
98.5 0.3019 1.5001 0.0066 0.0013
98.0 0.4033 2.0001 0.0088 0.0018
97.5 0.5051 2.5002 0.0110 0.0022
97.0 0.6074 3.0002 0.0132 0.0027
96.5 0.7101 3.5002 0.0155 0.0031
96.0 0.8132 4.0003 0.0177 0.0036
95.5 0.9167 4.5003 0.0200 0.0040
95.0 1.0227 5.0003 0.0223 0.0045
94.5 1.1251 5.5004 0.0246 0.0049
94.0 1.2300 6.0004 0.0296 0.0054
93.5 1.3353 6.5004 0.0292 0.0058
93.0 1.4410 7.0005 0.0315 0.0063
92.5 1.5473 7.5005 0.0339 0.0068
92.0 1.6539 8.0005 0.0362 0.0072
91.5 1.7611 8.5005 0.0386 0.0077
91.0 1.8687 9.0006 0.0410 0.0082
90.5 1.9768 9.5006 0.0434 0.0087
90.0 2.0853 10.0006 0.0458 0.0092
89.5 2.1944 10.5007 0.0482 0.0096
89.0 2.3039 11.0007 0.0506 0.0101
88.5 2.4139 11.5007 0.0531 0.0106
88.0 2.5244 12.0008 0.0555 0.0111
87.5 2.6355 12.5008 0.0580 0.0116
87.0 2.7470 13.0008 0.0605 0.0121
86.5 2.8590 13.5008 0.0630 0.0126
86.0 2.9716 14.0009 0.0655 0.0131
85.5 3.0847 14.5009 0.0680 0.0136
85.0 3.1984 15.0009 0.0706 0.0141
84.5 3.3125 15.5010 0.0732 0.0146
84.0 3.4272 16.0010 0.0757 0.0152
83.5 3.5425 16.5010 0.0783 0.0157
83.0 3.6583 17.0011 0.0809 0.0162
82.5 3.7746 17.5011 0.0836 0.0167
82.0 3.8916 18.0011 0.0862 0.0172
81.5 4.0091 18.5011 0.0889 0.0178
81.0 4.1271 19.0012 0.0915 0.0183
80.5 4.2458 19.5012 0.0942 0.0188
80.0 4.3651 20.0012 0.0969 0.0194

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 151

PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

FIGURE 12-72-3-1—SMOKE DETECTOR TEST CHAMBER

FIGURE 12-72-3-2—FIRE TEST DETECTOR INSTALLATION

152 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

 PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS

FIGURE 12-72-3-3—JARRING TEST

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 153

154 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE
 HISTORY NOTE APPENDIX
CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE

Title 24, Part 12, California Code of Regulations (CCR)

HISTORY:
For prior code history, see the History Note Appendix to the
California Referenced Standards Code, 2013 Triennial Edi-
tion, effective January 1, 2014.
1. (DSA-SS 04/15) Amendments to the 2016 California
Referenced Standards Code, California Code of Regu-
lations, Title 24, Part 12. Effective on January 1, 2017.

2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE 155

156 2016 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE